JP2020130889A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on operation of a start lever 41 start rotating after performing bet operation. A corresponding reel stops by operation of stop switches 42 to 44, and a stop display mode corresponding to a lottery result stops and putout of tokens may occur. A pressing order bell in which a combination to be won differs depending on operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided, and an AT mode for reporting pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is provided. First BB and second BB are set as bonuses, and winning probabilities of an AT mode shift lottery and a shift permission lottery differ in a situation in which each BB is carried over although a losing probability in a situation in which each BB is carried over is common.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these game machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during the rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the game machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
Starting operation means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the starting operation means, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stopping operating means is operated.
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, and the gaming state is shifted to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, and is predetermined. A special transition means that can terminate the special state based on the establishment of the special termination condition,
In the game in which the special result is won, if the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means capable of storing the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result is used. ,
With
As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set.
The special transition means sets the gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The first special state is shifted to one special state, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and is in the effective position. The game state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped, and the second special end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined second special end condition is satisfied. It is possible to end a special state,
The special result storage means corresponds to winning the first special result when the first special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the first special result is won. In the game in which the first special result information is stored and the second special result is won, if the second special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the second special result is won. It is possible to store the second special result information corresponding to the fact that
When the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result.
In a configuration in which the special state is more advantageous than the case of shifting to the special state in a situation where the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied and the transition to the special state in the situation where the advantageous conditions are not satisfied. Yes,
When the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is such that the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. If the lottery result by the lottery means has the same or substantially the same probability as the specific result, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means. The probability is different from the probability that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, or is a probability difference larger than the probability difference that results in the specific result. It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which can be seen from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the carry-over state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the BB first state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB second state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB third state. It is a flowchart which shows the priority setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the AT mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the advantageous section transition lottery table and AT mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuation rate lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT consecutive villas. It is a figure which shows an example of the stock lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting a bonus AT. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows AT continuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous section transition game. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device as a control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bonus AT. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting a bonus AT in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition permission lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT consecutive villas. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bonus AT. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning mode and the change point of the lottery table in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting a bonus AT. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a winning suggestion notification processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the display effect by an auxiliary display part, and the stop mode of each reel. It is a figure for demonstrating the change | change between the winning mode and the lottery table in the modification 3. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the AT mode lottery table in the modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the AT continuation setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous section transition game. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the AT mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the change | change between the winning mode and the lottery table in the modification 2. (A) is a flowchart showing the bonus AT start processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the continuation chance processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 4. (A) is a part of the flowchart showing the winning result correspondence process, and (b) is a part of the flowchart showing the process for the advantageous section transition game. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the next BB lottery table, and (c) is an outline of the first BB and the second BB. It is a figure which shows collectively. It is a part of the flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In the first modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the next BB lottery table. In the second modification, it is a diagram showing various modifications of the next BB lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for advantageous section transition game in the modification 3. (A) is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a suggestion lottery table. In the fourth embodiment, (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the changes between the winning mode and the lottery table, and (c) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between an advantageous section and BB. In the modified example, (a) is a flowchart showing the second process of section display, (b) is a diagram for explaining the outline of the RT state, and (c) is for explaining the stop timing of the reach eye. It is a figure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by nailing a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving the stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th on the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops at the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops at the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, As a result of winning a prize, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out, or a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are bet. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is set as an effective line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as an effective line. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game started with three medals bet is a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game and the 2-bet game are not set. That is, in this embodiment, only a 3-bet game is set.

8 and 9 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is successful, 15 medals will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 10A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination prize corresponding to the bell has been established.

Left reel 32L "bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, right reel 32R "white 7" symbol, "white shell" If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination will be won. If the second small winning combination is successful, three medals will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small winning combination is won. If the third small winning combination is successful, three medals will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the third small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

The 4th to 27th small roles are mainly so-called missing roles in which a prize is established when the 1st small role is missed. If the 4th to 27th small wins are won, one medal will be paid out. The 4th to 27th small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. Designs and medium reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 8, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 4th small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination will not stop with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set to, so that it is easy to understand that the small winning combination prize corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the winning of the first small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination, the paid out medal is a kind of privilege given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

There are 1st re-game prize to 11th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. As shown in FIG. 9, prize-winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first re-game to the eleventh re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 10D, when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. When the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 12 (b). As described above, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are stopped on the upward-sloping line L5 in order from the left. When the second re-game winning is established, the game state does not shift, but the notification mode shifts to the player's advantage, and the AT mode in which medals can be expected to be won is started. The AT mode will be described in detail later.

The third re-game and the fourth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The fifth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 10 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the fifth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the sixth replay, the left reel 32L "bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "ark shell" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 10 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth re-game winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

In the 7th replay, the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R "replay" symbol And, the prize is established when stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the 7th re-game winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the eighth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

In the ninth replay, the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 11th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 11 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th re-game prize or the 11th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 9th re-game or the 11th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and stop the operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 9th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 11th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 9th re-game prize and the 11th re-game prize. In the tenth re-game, a prize is established when the ninth re-game and the eleventh re-game cannot be won, that is, when a omission may occur.

More specifically, the 10th re-game prize is established when the 9th re-game is won and the 9th re-game prize cannot be established, and the 11th re-game is won. It is established when the 11th re-game prize cannot be established. That is, when the 10th re-game prize is established, it is difficult to distinguish whether the 9th re-game is won or the 11th re-game is won. In other words, in order to determine whether the 9th re-game or the 11th re-game has been won, it is necessary to aim and operate the "cherry" on the left reel 32L.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state is changed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the JAC prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle.

The JAC prize can be established only during the first BB state and the second BB state. If the "Akakai" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Shirakai" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, a JAC prize will be awarded. If the JAC prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the JAC state. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the JAC winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the “white 7” symbols are aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line L5.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out the medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of games is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number is set to 3 or 2, and the specific number is set to 3, the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. The first is when three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because two virtual medals are inserted.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operation surface operated by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operability than the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by inserting a set specific number of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided, which includes a section indicator for changing the winning rate of the small winning combination and indicating an advantageous section which is a section in which the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and it can be considered that the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is a lower display unit 69 on which the model name of the game machine may be written or a predetermined display screen may be formed. It is provided. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation means for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be an operation means that can be operated.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state, but also when clearing various stored information of the slot machine 10 and when changing the winning probability.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be seen from the front of the game machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be seen from the front of the game machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 13 and 14.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a square wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this stabilized voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a combination monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 15), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 14, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the command transmission is not completed, this process is terminated and the timer interrupt process is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the reading result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68 to perform the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the main process of the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovering from a power failure or turning on the power switch 71.

In step S201, as the initialization process for driving, the value of the stack pointer is set in the CPU 102, the interrupt mode for permitting the interrupt process is set, and then various types of registers in the CPU 102, the I / O device, and the like are set. And so on.

When these initialization processes are completed, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 72 has been operated, and more specifically, whether or not an ON signal has been received from the reset detection sensor 72a. If the reset switch 72 is operated at the time of power-on (recovery) this time, in step S203, all the data stored in the RAM 106 is erased as the RAM clear process.

Whether or not the reset switch 72 is not operated in step S202, or after the RAM clear processing in step S203 is executed, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on in step S204. Or, more specifically, it is determined whether or not the ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 73a. If the setting key is turned on at the time of power-on (recovery) this time, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the initialization process of the advantageous section information.

Here, the slot machine 10 may win a winning combination with different profits depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation order may be notified by the instruction monitor 68 or the like. .. Then, the advantageous section in which the notification of the operation order may be performed and the normal section in which the notification of the operation order is not performed are distinguished, and the initialization process of the information for the advantageous section in step S205 is performed on the advantageous section. This is a process for erasing all information related to. That is, the advantageous section is set as the normal section by performing the initialization processing of the advantageous section information.

In the following step S206, the winning probability setting process is performed.

The outline of the winning probability setting process will be described. The slot machine 10 is prepared in advance with six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the winning probability setting process sets which winning probability is used as the basis for executing the internal processing. It is a process to do. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the reset switch 72. For example, each time the reset switch 72 is operated, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is set as the setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. To do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started.

If it is determined in step S204 that the setting key has not been turned on, or after the processing in step S206 is performed, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is not set, the normal process for performing the main control related to the game is executed in step S208.

On the other hand, when the power failure flag is set in step S207, the power recovery process shown in step S209 and subsequent steps is performed. The power recovery process is a process of returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. Therefore, in the power recovery process, it is first necessary to confirm whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal.

Therefore, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. Specifically, the checksum value of the RAM 106 is examined, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal, that is, whether or not the checksum value including the RAM determination value is 0. When the value of the checksum including the RAM determination value is 0, it is determined that the data in the RAM 106 is normal.

When the RAM determination value is abnormal in step S209, that is, the checksum value is not 0, there is a high possibility that the data in the RAM 106 has been destroyed. Therefore, in such a case, an error display process is performed in step S210. As an error display process, interrupt processing is first prohibited, and all output ports in the input / output port 104 are cleared to control all actuators connected to the input / output port 104 to an off state. After that, an error is displayed to notify the hall manager or the like that an error has occurred, and the state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is turned on.

If it is determined in step S209 that the RAM determination value is normal, the process proceeds to step S211 to write the value of the stack pointer saved in the backup area to the stack pointer of the CPU 102, and the stack state before the power is cut off. Return to the state. Next, in step S212, a power recovery command for notifying the execution of the power recovery process is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, in step S213, the game is stopped and the automatic settlement setting is saved, and in step S214, various sensors such as the start detection sensor 41a are initialized. After the above processing is completed, the power failure flag is reset in step S215 to return to the address before the power was cut off. Specifically, the timer interrupt processing described above is restored, and the watchdog timer clear processing (step S104) is executed.

Next, the normal process executed in step S208 of the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process for performing the main control related to the game.

First, in step S301, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S302, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 and the like wait until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S303 to S312 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S303, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S304, the start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, for example, when a re-game winning is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. When an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an error occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number. As described above, in this slot machine 10, only a 3-bet game can be played, and only 3 is set as a specified number. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S304, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S305 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S306. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied and notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64 And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S306, it is determined in step S307 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S304, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S308, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S309, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S310, the reel control process of step S311 and the medal payout process of step S312 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the lottery process in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 has a configuration in which the value of the free run counter is latched each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S402, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is acquired. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. The lottery table acquisition process will be described in detail when the game state is explained, but here, the state before the transition to the bonus state will be described.

That is, when the current game has not won the bonuses such as the first BB and the second BB and is in the normal game state, the lottery table for the normal game state is acquired in step S402. FIG. 19 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state acquired in the normal gaming state. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After acquiring the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S403, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S404. In such a determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S401 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S405, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S406, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S405 to the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the second small winning combination winning flag and the third small winning combination winning flag are set in step S406. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag and the first re-game winning flag are set in step S406, and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26. If so, the second BB winning flag and the first re-game winning flag are set in step S406.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S303 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery table for the carry-over state is referred to and the game lottery process is performed. In the carry-over state lottery table (FIG. 20), each index value IV and point value PV value are set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

In addition, instead of preparing a lottery table for the carry-over state separately, in step S406 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the combination corresponding to the first BB and the second BB (rip duplication first BB, rip). If the winning combination other than the duplicate second BB) is won, the corresponding winning flag may be set, and if the winning combination other than the winning combination corresponding to the first BB and the second BB is not won, the corresponding winning flag may not be set. ..

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, for example, the first BB winning flag and the first re-game winning flag are not set. , In the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 4th small winning combination winning flag, and the 5th small winning combination The winning flag and the eighth small winning combination winning flag may be set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S405, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S407, and in the subsequent step S408, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S405, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 19, that is, when the game is played in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (winning when IV = 1). Probability) is about 1 / 27.3. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are about 1 in 26.2. Is. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164, and the probability of winning the chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 5). Is about 1/262, and the probability of winning the chance C (the probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 1/16400, and the chance B is better than the chance C. Is set so that it is easy to win, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9) is It is set to be about 1/13100, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/6560. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as the push order bell) is about (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22). It is 1 / 18.2. The probability of winning a watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/219. The probability of winning the first BB with overlapping rips (the probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1 / 20.1. The probability of winning the second BB with overlapping rips (probability of winning when IV = 26) is about 1/6.7. The probability of winning either the first BB with overlapping rips or the second BB with overlapping rips (probability of winning when IV = 25, 26) is about one-fifth in total, and the other roles (re-re). It is set higher than the winning probability of games, small roles, and IV = 1 to 24). In the normal game state, it is set not to win the duplicate single-card combination (IV = 24) or JAC (IV = 27) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV). In the normal game state, the probability of not winning any combination (probability of losing result) is 0.

In the lottery table for the carry-over state (FIG. 20) acquired in the situation where the first BB or the second BB is won, the winning probabilities of the rip duplication 1st BB and the rip duplication 2nd BB corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are normal games. Unlike the lottery table for the state, the other lottery probabilities are the same in the normal game state and the carry-over state. That is, in the lottery table for the carry-over state, the probability of winning the rip duplication first BB and the rip duplication second BB (probability of winning when IV = 25, 26) is zero. And, in the lottery table for the carry-over state, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations (probability of losing result) is about 1 / 5.02 because the first BB of overlapping rips and the second BB of overlapping rips are not won. is there. The lottery table for the normal game state and the lottery table for the carry-over state are acquired according to the state in the process of step S402.

By the way, in the normal game state, excluding the increase / decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, a decrease of about 1.92 medals can be expected per game (net increase number minus about 1.92), and in the carry-over state. , Excluding the increase / decrease in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, a decrease of about 2.52 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 2.52).

After setting the winning flag in step S406, or when it is determined in step S408 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S409, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S410, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S401 to S408, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S410, the lottery result command is set in step S411. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S412, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S406. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winned when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination flag, the 4th small winning combination winning flag, the 5th small winning combination winning flag, and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the fourth small combination, the fifth small combination, and the eighth small combination winning can be stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, if the watermelon is won (winned when IV = 23) and the 2nd small winning combination flag and the 3rd small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 2nd small winning combination and the 3rd small winning combination will be displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In the following step S413, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S412, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. The priority setting process will be described in detail later, but basically, when a plurality of roles among the small role, replay, and bonus roles are won, the priority setting shown below is set. To do. If you have won a small role and a bonus, set the priority so that the small role prize will be established with priority, and if the small role prize cannot be established, the bonus prize will be established. .. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is given priority.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the game that won the 1st BB or the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won and the 1st BB prize is awarded. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd small winning combination and the 3rd small winning combination is set, the 2nd small winning combination and the 3rd small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. Set the priority. In addition, in the situation where the second BB is won (the second BB winning flag is set and the game that won the second BB or the second BB winning is carried over), the normal lip A is further won and the second BB is won. When the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning and the first re-game and the second re-game winning is set, the priority is set so that each re-game winning is prioritized over the second BB winning. To do.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize for any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established. In the present embodiment, the first BB and the second BB are won by winning the first BB and the second BB, and when the first BB and the second BB are won, the first BB is won. And not only the 2nd BB but also the 1st replay. Therefore, in the game in which the first BB or the second BB is won, the first re-game prize is established instead of the first BB or the second BB.

After executing the process of step S413, the section display first process is executed in step S414, and then the lottery process ends. The section display first process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S501. The rotation effect processing is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S409. In the following step S502, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S503, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S504, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. To do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S503 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S505. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S506 to S512 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S506, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S507, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S507, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S508, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S509, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S510. Do. After that, in step S511, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S512, and the process returns to step S503.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The second stop information setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, or the 16th small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, stop information is set so that the first small winning combination can be established in addition to the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, and the 16th small winning combination. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, or the 16th small winning combination as described above.

The 12th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. The thirteenth small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red clam" symbol and a "white shell" symbol. The 16th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 12th small winning combination symbol, the 13th small winning combination symbol, and the 16th small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any one of the 12th small winning combination symbol, the 13th small winning combination symbol, and the 16th small winning combination symbol is on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop the symbols having a small number of sliding frames on the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "Akakai" symbol (2), which is the thirteenth small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 reels), which is the 16th small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, but the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 13th small winning combination, the 12th small winning combination and the 16th small winning combination will not be established.

When the 13th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 13th small winning combination winning can be established.

The thirteenth small winning combination symbol on the medium reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The thirteenth small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbols and the "youth" symbols is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 13th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. is there. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper stage, the 13th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper stage, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, the 13th small is won by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the case where the winning combination may be established, there is also the possibility that the 15th small winning combination may be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 15th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 13th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 13th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 15th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 13th small winning combination symbol and the 15th small winning combination symbol are the 15th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 13th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 15th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 13th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the player has won the middle forward push bell 1 or the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped to win the 13th small winning combination. And even if the stop mode is such that there is a possibility of winning the 15th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for the winning.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination, the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, or the 16th small winning combination.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the priority setting process (step S413) of the lottery process (FIG. 18), as the priority order when a plurality of small winning combination winning flags are set, the symbol number priority control and the number of sheets priority are given. Its priority is set based on one of the controls. That is, as described above, for example, when the bonus and the small winning combination (the first small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination where the medal payout can occur) are won in duplicate, the winning of the small winning combination is preferentially established. If the bonus and the re-game are won in duplicate, the re-game winning is set to be preferentially established. On the other hand, if multiple small wins are won in duplicate, the small wins with the same number of medals to be paid out as a privilege at the time of winning are divided into groups and then treated as winning symbols for each group. Priority control is given to the number of symbols that is set so that the winning of the small winning combination of the group with a large number of symbols is preferentially established, and the winning of the small winning combination of the group with a large number of medals paid out as a privilege at the time of winning is prioritized. The priority is set by one of the control of the number of sheets, which is set so as to be satisfied.

For example, the cases of the first small winning combination, the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, and the 16th small winning combination associated with the operation order of middle → left → right in the middle forward push bell 1 will be described. When the first small winning combination is established, 15 medals are paid out, whereas when the 12th small winning combination, 13th small winning combination or 16th small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out. In this case, as a grouping of small wins with the same number of medals to be paid out as a privilege at the time of winning, the first group (first small win) in which 15 medals are paid out and one medal are paid out. It becomes the second group (12th small role, 13th small role and 16th small role). In the symbol number priority control, for example, the winning symbols of the first group on the middle reel 32M (the first small winning symbol of the middle reel 32M) are "replay" symbols, and four are provided on the middle reel 32M. , The winning symbols of the second group in the middle reel 32M (12th small winning combination symbol, 13th small winning combination symbol and 16th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M) are the "replay" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol, and the middle reel Five are provided in 32M, and since there are more winning symbols in the second group, it is set so that the small winning combination prize in the second group is preferentially established. On the other hand, in the number-of-sheet priority control, the small winning combination of the first group with a large number of medals paid out is set to be preferentially established. That is, when the middle forward push bell 1 is operated in the operation order of middle → left → right, and when the symbol number priority control is applied, the 12th small winning combination, the 13th small winning combination, or the 16th small winning combination is awarded. While it is controlled so as to be established, when the number-of-sheet priority control is applied, it is controlled so that the first small winning combination is established.

When the middle forward push bell 1 is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right associated with the first small winning combination, when the symbol number priority control is applied, The first small winning combination symbol in the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, the 12th small winning combination symbol and the 13th small winning combination symbol are "replay" symbols, and the 16th small winning combination symbol is a "white 7" symbol. In this case, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol can be stopped at the same time on the effective line (upper row). , The stop control is performed so as to give priority to the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol to stop at the effective line. Since the "replay" symbol and the "white 7" symbol are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less, the 12th small winning combination symbol and the 13th small winning combination are on the effective line regardless of the operation timing. Either the symbol or the 16th small winning combination symbol stops. Then, as described above, the remaining left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are stopped and controlled so as to maximize the winning small winning combination in relation to the already stopped symbols. That is, when the number of symbols priority control is applied when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, even if the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, there is no room for the first small winning combination, and the 12th small winning combination, the 12th small winning combination. Either the 13 small wins or the 16th small wins will be established.

On the other hand, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right associated with the first small winning combination, the number of sheets priority control is applied. If this is the case, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, it is possible to stop the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol or the "white 7" symbol at the same time on the effective line (upper row). For example, stop control is performed so that the "bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is given priority and stopped at the effective line. Since the "bell" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less, the first small winning combination symbol stops at the effective line regardless of the operation timing. Regarding the first small winning combination, not only the middle reel 32M but also the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are arranged so that the distance between the symbols is 4 symbols or less, so that the effective line is effective regardless of the operation timing. It is possible to stop the first small reel symbol. Therefore, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right, and the number of sheets priority control is applied, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

Not limited to the above-mentioned middle forward push bell 1, in each push order bell, not only the first small win but also one medal is paid out in the operation order corresponding to the first small win, and the fourth to 27th small wins are paid out. Are set in plurality (FIG. 22). In any of the push order bells, in the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination, the number of winning symbols in the group different from the first small winning combination is set to be larger.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the carry-over state of the first BB to the second BB, the symbol number priority control is basically applied, and the priority order between each small winning combination is set. That is, in the normal game state or the carry-over state of the first BB to the second BB, even if the operation order at the time of winning the push order bell matches the first small winning combination with a large number of medals to be paid out, the number of symbols is prioritized control. Instead of the 1st small winning combination, the winning of the 4th to 27th small winning combination, which is the other one medal payout, is prioritized.

By the way, when the common bell is won, the 1st small winning combination flag is set, and the 4th to 27th small winning combination winning flags, which are the other one medal payouts, are not set. Therefore, when the common bell is won, even if the number of symbols priority control is applied, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S511 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S513. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S514. The bonus state processing is a process of shifting to a bonus state such as a first BB state or a second BB state based on the winning result. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. In the following step S515, the winning result correspondence process is performed. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the display mode or the like is performed based on the winning result. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S516. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S517, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the medal payout process in step S312 will be outlined.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game prize to the eleventh re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for setting the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S304) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

<Bonus state processing>
The bonus state processing in step S514 in the reel control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the bonus state process is a process activated between the payout determination process (step S513) and the winning result corresponding process (step S515) in the reel control process (FIG. 21).

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not they are in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S601, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes is not established, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the first BB carry-over flag or the second BB carry-over flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The 1st BB carry-over flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the 1st BB winning is carried over, and the 2nd BB carry-over flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the 2nd BB winning is carried over. It is a flag to grasp. That is, in the present embodiment, the information carrying over the first BB winning and the information carrying over the second BB winning are stored, respectively, and the CPU 102 can grasp which BB winning state is carried over. It has become. If any of the BB carry-over flags are set, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is.

If none of the BB carry-over flags are set, the process of setting the BB carry-over flag corresponding to the winning BB in step S605 in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the bonus state process ends. More specifically, in step S605, the first BB carry-over flag is set when the first BB winning flag is set, and the second BB carry-over flag is set when the second BB winning flag is set.

If it is determined in step S603 that the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, a process of inputting "140" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, when "140" is input to the BB counter in step S606, the first BB state and the second BB state are set to end when 140 or more medals are paid out. In step S607, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are cleared.

Then, in step S608, the carry-over flag corresponding to the BB won this time is cleared. That is, when the first BB prize is established, if the first BB carry-over flag is set, the first BB carry-over flag is cleared, and if the first BB carry-over flag is not set, that state is maintained. .. In addition, when the second BB prize is established, if the second BB carry-over flag is set, the second BB carry-over flag is cleared, and if the second BB carry-over flag is not set, that state is maintained. .. The case where the 1st BB carry-over flag or the 2nd BB carry-over flag is set is the case where the winning game is not established in the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning game, and the 1st BB carry-over flag or the 2nd BB carry-over flag is set. The case where it is not set is the case where the winning game is established in the winning game of the first BB or the second BB.

After that, in step S609, the BB state flags corresponding to the BB won this time are set in the various flag storage areas 106d. That is, when the first BB prize is established, the first BB state flag is set, and when the second BB prize is established, the second BB state flag is set. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S601.

In the following step S610, a process of setting the corresponding BB winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. That is, when the first BB winning is established, the first BB winning game flag is set, and when the second BB winning is established, the second BB winning game flag is set. Each BB winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the BB winning has been established in this game, and is a flag cleared at the end of one game (at the start of the next game). After executing the process of step S610, the bonus state process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S601 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S611, and the end determination process is performed as the process during the first BB state or the second BB state.

Here, the end determination process of step S611 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the current bonus state is the JAC state by determining whether or not the JAC state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The JAC state is a small number of times (8 times in this embodiment) determined in advance when the lottery result of the game is JAC winning (winning when IV = 27) and the JAC winning is established. It is in a state of continuing until the winning combination is established or the game is executed a predetermined number of times (12 times in this embodiment).

If it is not in the JAC state, the JAC winning flag is set in step S702, and it is determined whether or not the JAC winning state is in the state. If the JAC has been won, the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the JAC winning is established as a result of this game. If the JAC winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S704, and it is determined whether or not the JAC carry-over flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The JAC carry-over flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the carry-over state in which the JAC winning is carried over. That is, in the present embodiment, not only the first BB winning and the second BB winning that trigger the transition to the bonus state, but also the JAC winning that triggers the transition to the internal state during the bonus state can be carried over to the next game or later. It is said. If the JAC carry-over flag is not set, the process of setting the JAC carry-over flag is executed in step S705.

If it is determined in step S703 that the JAC prize has been established, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, a process of inputting "8" to the JAC first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e and inputting "12" to the JAC second counter is executed. The JAC first counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of small wins in the JAC state, and the JAC second counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of games in the JAC state. That is, the JAC state is set to end with 8 small wins or 12 game digestions. After that, in step S707, the JAC winning flag is cleared, the process of clearing the JAC carry-over flag is executed in step S708, and the JAC status flag is set in step S709. If the JAC carry-over flag is not set in step S708, that state is maintained. As a result, the internal state in the bonus state shifts to the JAC state, and an affirmative judgment is made in the next step S701.

If it is determined in step S702 that the JAC has not been won, if it is determined that the JAC carry-over flag has been set in step S704, or after the processing of step S705 or step S709 is executed, the process proceeds to step S710. .. In step S710, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been established in this game. When the small winning combination is established, the process of subtracting the number of medals paid out based on the current winning from the BB counter is executed in step S711. In addition, the case where it is determined in step S710 that the small winning combination is established is the case where the small winning combination is won in a situation other than the JAC state.

If it is determined in step S701 that the state is JAC, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been established in this game. When the small winning combination is established, 1 is subtracted from the JAC first counter in step S713, and the number of medals paid out based on the current winning is subtracted from the BB counter in step S714. When it is determined in step S712 that the small winning combination is not established, or after the process of step S714 is executed, the process of subtracting 1 from the JAC second counter is executed in step S715. Then, in step S716, it is determined whether or not the JAC first counter or the JAC second counter is 0. If any of the counters is 0, the other JAC counter is also cleared to 0 in step S717, and the process of clearing the JAC status flag is executed. As a result, the JAC state ends, and in the next step S701, a negative determination is made.

If a negative determination is made in step S710 or step S716, or after executing the process of step S711 or step S717, the process proceeds to step S718. In step S718, the BB counter is 0 or less, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied. If the end condition is not satisfied, the end determination process is terminated as it is.

If the end condition is satisfied, the BB state flag staying in step S719 is cleared. After that, in step S720, the process of setting the BB end game flag corresponding to the BB state to be terminated this time is executed in the various flag storage areas 106d, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when ending the first BB state, the first BB end game flag is set, and when ending the second BB state, the second BB end game flag is set. Each BB end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the BB state has been established in this game, and is a flag that is cleared at the end of one game (at the start of the next game).

That is, in the present embodiment, the states in the bonus state are a state in which JAC is not won (BB first state), a state in which JAC is won but before JAC winning (BB second state), and JAC. The state (BB third state) is set, and when the bonus state is entered, the state shifts from the BB first state through the BB second state or without the BB second state to the BB third state, and the BB When the third state ends, it shifts to the BB first state. Then, when the maximum number of payouts in the BB state is reached, the BB state ends in any of the BB first state to the BB third state. That is, even if the maximum number of winnings for small wins or the maximum number of games is not reached in the JAC state, the BB state ends.

By the transition of the internal state in the bonus state in this way, the lottery probability of each game in the bonus state changes. Here, the acquisition process of the lottery table performed in the lottery process (FIG. 18) of each game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 25. The lottery table acquisition process is a process performed in step S402 in the lottery process.

In step S801, the presence / absence of the BB state flag is determined, and if it is not set, the presence / absence of the BB carry-over flag is determined in step S802. If neither the BB state flag nor the BB carry-over flag is set, the game is in the normal game state. In this case, the lottery table for the normal game state is acquired in step S803, and then the acquisition process is terminated. If the BB carry-over flag is set even if the BB state flag is not set, it means that one of the BB carry-over states is set. In this case, after acquiring the carry-over state lottery table in step S804, This acquisition process ends.

In the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, it is determined whether or not the JAC carry-over flag is set. When the JAC carry-over flag is set, it is the BB second state. In this case, the lottery table for the BB second state is acquired in step S806, and then the acquisition process is terminated. If the JAC carry-over flag is not set, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the JAC status flag is set. If neither the JAC carry-over flag nor the JAC state flag is set, it is the BB first state. In this case, in step S808, the lottery table for the BB first state is acquired, and then the acquisition process ends. When the JAC state flag is set, it is the BB third state. In this case, the lottery table for the BB third state is acquired in step S809, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

These BB first state lottery tables to BB third state lottery tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26 shows an example of the BB first state lottery table, FIG. 27 shows an example of the BB second state lottery table, and FIG. 28 shows an example of the BB third state lottery table.

In the BB first state, the probability of winning the JAC (the probability of winning when IV = 27) is about 1/3.0. In addition, the probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10), the probability of winning the push order bell (probability of winning when IV = 11-22), and the probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 11-22). The probability of winning when IV = 23) is the same as the normal game state and carry-over state, the common bell is about 1/6560, and the push order bell is about 1.5 minutes in total. It is 1, and the watermelon is about 1/219. In the BB first state, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 1-9 and 24 to 26, and various replays, duplicate 1-card combination, rip duplicate 1st BB, and rip overlap 2nd BB. Does not win. By the way, in the BB first state, it is set so as not to cause a deviation result. Then, in the BB first state, a decrease of about 2.92 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 2.92).

As described above, the JAC is won in the BB first state, and when the JAC winning is carried over, the process shifts to the BB second state. In the BB second state, the winning probability of the common bell, the push order bell, and the watermelon is the same as that of the BB first state, but it is set so that each re-game can be won. The probability of winning a replay (probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is about 1/3.0. That is, in the BB second state, the point value PV for the JAC winning in the BB first state is allocated to the point value PV for the re-game winning, and no deviation result is obtained even in the BB second state. Is set to. In other words, in the second state of BB, there is no loss result, and small wins and replays are controlled so that winning is established in preference to JAC, which is a type of bonus. The JAC prize cannot be established, and if the JAC prize is not established in the game in which the JAC is won in the BB first state, the bonus state ends without the JAC prize being established as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the push order bell is won in the second state of BB, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the operation order associated with the first small winning combination, the first small winning combination is established. You will be able to.

Here, as described above, when duplicate winnings between small wins occur, the priority is set based on the number of symbols priority control, and the priority is set based on the number priority control. In the normal game state or carry-over state, the priority is basically set by the symbol number priority control.

More specifically, in the priority setting process of step S413 in the lottery process (FIG. 18), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, when it is determined in step S901 that the JAC carry-over flag is not set, step S902 is performed. The priority is set based on the number of symbols priority control. Therefore, when the push order bell is won, even if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the operation order associated with the first small winning combination prize, the fourth small winning combination is a group in which one medal is paid out. Since the winning to the 27th small winning combination is prioritized, the 1st small winning combination is not established.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S901 that the JAC carry-over flag is set, the priority order is set based on the number of sheets priority control in step S903. Therefore, when the push order bell is won, if the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the operation order associated with the first small winning combination, the first small winning combination is a group in which 15 medals are paid out. However, the 4th small winning combination to the 27th small winning combination, in which one medal is paid out, is prioritized, and the 1st small winning combination is established.

After executing the process of step S902 or step S903, other priority setting processes are performed in step S904, and then this setting process ends. In step S904, priority settings are made between bonuses, small wins, and replays. These priorities are as described above, and the small win is prioritized over the bonus, and the replay is prioritized over the small win to win the prize.

In this way, in the BB first state, the JAC is won and the JAC winning is avoided, so that the BB second state is reached, and the first small winning combination can be established when the push order bell is won. Then, in the second state of BB, a decrease of about 1.15 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 1.15).

On the other hand, by establishing a JAC prize in the game in which the JAC is won in the BB first state, the game shifts to the BB third state. In the BB third state, the winning probability of the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is set to about 1 / 8.9, which is higher than the BB first state and the BB second state. It is set to be. On the other hand, in the BB third state, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 11 to 22, and the push order bell is set not to be won. In addition, in the BB third state, the point value PV of the index value IV = 1 to 9,25 to 27 is also set to 0, and it is set not to win the winning combination corresponding to these. In the third state of BB, the probability of losing any of the winning combinations is about 1/5.7. Then, in the third state of BB, a decrease of about 0.66 medals per game can be expected (net increase number minus about 0.66).

As described above, when the common bell is won, the first small winning combination prize is established in which 15 cards are paid out regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, in the BB third state, the first small winning combination is established with a probability of about 1/8.9. On the other hand, in the BB second state, even if the push order bell is won, the operation order is one of the six operation orders associated with the first small winning combination. If it does not match, the first small winning combination cannot be established. Then, if the push order bell is won with a probability of about 1 / 1.5, the first small winning combination will be established with 1/6, and the first with a probability of about 1/9.0. A small role prize will be established. That is, it can be said that the BB third state is a state in which the main first small winning combination, which triggers the increase in medals, is more likely to be established than the other states, as compared with the other states.

However, in the BB second state, the operation order associated with the first small winning combination prize in the operation order of the push order bell may be notified (push order notification). In this case, in the BB second state, it is possible to establish the first small winning combination prize at about 1/1. If the push order notification is performed in the second state of the BB and the first small winning combination can be established when the push order bell is won, an increase of about 7.91 medals per game can be expected (net increase in number). Plus about 7.91), many medals can be expected to increase. Hereinafter, the playability using the push order notification will be described.

<Processing for lottery results>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step S410 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lottery result handling process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode, specific mode) as a mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game. It is a process of performing a transition lottery to the state).

More specifically, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As described above, in the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of the push order notification or the like, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section. Is.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S1002.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S1101. Then, in step S1102, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the advantageous section transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 34, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 34, the triggers for the lottery to shift to the advantageous section are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, watermelon, duplicate 1-card combination, lip overlap 1st BB, lip overlap 2nd BB, and JAC are set. That is, in the normal game state, the carry-over state, and the BB first state to the BB third state, all the results that can be won are set as triggers for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S1102, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S1103. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S1103, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S1104, and in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won, and if not, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated as it is. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S1101 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not a loss result), the processing of steps S1102 to S1105 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S1106, the process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the advantageous section transition lottery process ends. .. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section has been won in this game.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process, when it is determined in step S1001 that the advantageous section flag is set, or after the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and the AT mode flag is a flag set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or the transition has been completed. If none of the flags are set in step S1003 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been confirmed, the AT lottery process is executed in step S1004. On the other hand, if any of the flags is set in step S1003, the AT consecutive villa processing is executed in step S1005.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S1004 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not it is in the BB state by determining whether or not any of the BB state flags is set. If it is in the BB state, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not performed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

If it is not in the BB state, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S1202. Then, in step S1203, the process of acquiring the AT mode lottery table is executed.

In the AT mode lottery table acquisition process, a lottery table according to the current situation is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. That is, as shown in FIG. 33, it is determined in step S1301 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the section is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S1302, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

If it is an advantageous section, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode are provided as a state before winning the AT mode transition lottery, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode is easier to win the transition lottery to the AT mode than the normal mode. It is set as a mode. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current mode is the CZ mode, and is set when shifting to the CZ mode.

When the CZ mode flag is not set in the advantageous section in which the AT lottery process is performed, it means that the current mode is the normal mode. In this case, in step S1304, the AT mode lottery table for the normal mode is acquired, and then the acquisition process is terminated. When the CZ mode flag is set in step S1303, it means that the current mode is the CZ mode. In this case, in step S1305, the AT mode lottery table for CZ mode is acquired, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 34, each of these AT mode lottery tables has a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the order of the normal section AT mode lottery table → the normal mode AT mode lottery table → the CZ mode AT mode lottery table. The AT mode lottery table for the normal section has the lowest winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode lottery table for the CZ mode has the highest winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery. ing. More specifically, in the normal section, only Cherry C and watermelon are set as the trigger results for winning the AT mode transition lottery, and the other lottery results are set so as not to win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, each lottery result excluding the common bell, the push order bell, the duplicate 1-card combination, the lip duplication 1st BB, the lip duplication 2nd BB, and JAC can win the AT mode transition lottery. It is set. Then, for example, the chance eye B is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the chance eye A, and the chance eye C is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the chance eye B. , The lower the winning probability (appearance rate) as the lottery result of the game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. Further, for normal lip A and cherry A, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process (step S206), and the setting is set so that the ball output rate is high. The higher the value (the higher the set value), the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

In the normal section, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed with these common bells and push order bells, and the game result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the above. For example, the superiority of the CZ mode may be ensured by different types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery between the normal mode and the CZ mode. In this case, the game that triggers the AT mode transition lottery. It is preferable that the number of result types is larger in the CZ mode. Further, in this case, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery itself may be the same in the normal mode and the CZ mode. Multiple CZ modes are provided, and in one CZ mode it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery at the chance, and in other CZ modes it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery with cherry, etc. The AT mode transition lottery table may be set.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S1203, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S1204. In the AT mode transition lottery, as in the advantageous section transition lottery, random numbers for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106e, and the lottery is performed using the random numbers. The configuration for such a lottery is the same for the following other lottery, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won. If the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the AT mode transition lottery in the normal section is won, the process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1207. When the advantageous section flag is set in step S1206, or after the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S1207, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S1208.

In the following step S1209, a continuation rate lottery process for setting the continuation rate of the current AT mode is executed. In the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is performed at a predetermined determination trigger in the AT mode, the AT mode continues when the continuous lottery is won, and the AT mode ends when the continuous lottery is not won. It is configured in some cases. The continuation rate lottery process in step S1209 is a process for determining the winning probability of the continuous lottery. In the continuation rate lottery process, the selected continuation rate may differ depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the AT mode transition. In the present embodiment, 60% continuation mode, 70% continuation mode, 80% continuation mode and 90% continuation mode are set as the continuation rate of the AT mode, and one of these continuation modes is determined by lottery. In step S1209, the continuation rate is determined by lottery based on the continuation rate lottery table acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 35, in the continuation rate lottery table, for example, when the AT mode transition is won with the chance eye A as the trigger, the 70% continuation mode is most likely to be selected, and the AT mode with the chance eye B as the trigger. When the transition is won, the 60% continuation mode is set so as to be most easily selected.

After executing the continuation rate lottery process in step S1209, the continuation rate flag corresponding to the lottery result is set in step S1210. That is, when the 60% continuation mode is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and similarly, when the 70% continuation mode is selected, the 70% flag and the 80% continuation mode are selected. If this is done, the 80% flag is set, and if the 90% continuation mode is selected, the 90% flag is set.

In step S1211, the precursor game number lottery process is executed. In the precursor mode, a suggestion effect suggesting that the AT mode transition has been won is sent to the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. before the notification of the AT mode transition winning (AT mode winning notification effect) is performed. It is a mode to be called. The precursor mode is set so that a maximum of 32 games can be continued, and the number of precursor games of any of 0 to 32 is determined by lottery in the lottery process of step S1211.

In step S1212, the number of precursor games determined in step S1211 is input to the precursor counters of the various counter areas 106e, and the process of setting the precursor flags in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S1213. The precursor counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game in the precursor mode, and the precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode is set. Then, in step S1214, after executing the process of setting the precursor command as the output target to the display control device 81, the AT lottery process is terminated. The precursor command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the precursor mode has been set, and is information on the number of games remaining until the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the precursor mode, that is, the number of games in the precursor mode. Information is included.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1215. In step S1215, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. In the case of an advantageous section, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter of various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1216. The ceiling counter defines the maximum number of games that can be consumed without winning the AT mode transition lottery from a predetermined setting opportunity. The ceiling counter is decremented by 1 for each game, and when it becomes 0, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed without winning the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in step S1217, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1216, and if it becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S1208 and the AT mode winning flag is set. The processing after step S1208 is as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215 or step S1217, the pseudo precursor mode processing is performed in steps S1218 to S1224. In the present embodiment, although the same or similar suggestion effect as that of the precursor mode is generated, the effect mode is finally terminated without performing the AT mode winning notification effect that the transition to the AT mode is allowed. A pseudo precursor mode (a mode in which a so-called ghost effect occurs) is set. That is, in step S1218, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor flag for the CPU 102 to identify the pseudo precursor mode is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and if it is already set, it is as it is. The AT lottery process is completed.

If the pseudo precursor flag is not set, it is determined by lottery whether or not to set the pseudo precursor mode in step S1219. The lottery is set so that, for example, the result of the lottery of the game that is difficult to win (the appearance rate is low) makes it easier to win the lottery for shifting to the pseudo precursor mode. In the following step S1220, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor lottery in step S1219 has been won, and if it has not been won, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the pseudo precursor lottery is won, the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is determined by lottery in step S1221. Regarding such a lottery, for example, if the lottery result of the game is easy to win (high appearance rate) and the lottery is won, a pseudo-precursor mode with a relatively long number of games is set. Is set to. Then, in step S1222, a process of inputting the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode determined in step S1221 into the pseudo precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. After that, the pseudo precursor flag is set in step S1223, and the pseudo precursor command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1224, and then the AT lottery process ends. The pseudo precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode, and the pseudo precursor command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the pseudo precursor mode has been set. Information on the number of remaining games in the precursor mode is included, and the display control device 81 performs a lottery to generate a suggestion effect according to the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode.

<Processing for AT consecutive villas>
Next, the process for AT consecutive villas executed in step S1005 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the process for AT consecutive villas is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set, and the AT mode from a predetermined start trigger to the end trigger is executed as one set. This is a process for adding (stocking) the number of sets of AT modes to be performed.

That is, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not it is in the BB state by determining whether or not any of the BB state flags is set. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the transition permission flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The transition permission flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the BB prize can be established in the AT mode and the prize permission condition (transition permission condition) is satisfied. If the migration permission flag is set, the AT consecutive villa processing is terminated as it is.

The case where it is determined in step S1401 that the state is in the BB state and the case where it is determined in step S1402 that the transition permission flag is not set proceed to step S1403. In step S1403, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in steps S1404 to S1414, the process of acquiring the stock lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed.

That is, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1405. judge. The AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode winning notification effect has been executed, and has already been notified that the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won or that the ceiling has been reached. It is a flag indicating that. In the present embodiment, after the AT mode winning notification effect is executed, the AT mode is started when the lottery result of the game becomes a result (normal rips A to C) that triggers a predetermined start. That is, the situation in which the AT mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is not set is a situation in which the AT mode winning flag is set but before the AT mode winning notification effect is executed. The situation in which the mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is set is a situation in which the AT mode winning notification effect is executed but before the start of the AT mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S1405, a stock lottery table for before AT winning notification is acquired in step S1406, and if a positive judgment is made in step S1405, a stock lottery table for before AT transition is obtained in step S1407. get.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode flag is set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the BB state flag is set. If it is not set, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the BB carry-over flag is set. The situation in which the BB carry-over flag is not set in step S1409 is mainly the situation before the BB is won in the AT mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, a stock lottery table for no BB carry-over is acquired in step S1410, and if a positive determination is made in step S1409, a stock lottery table for BB carry-over is acquired in step S1411.

When it is determined in step S1408 that the state is BB, it is determined in step S1412 whether or not the JAC carry-over flag is set. If the JAC carry-over flag is not set and the BB is in the first state or the BB third state, the stock lottery table for no JAC carry-over is acquired in step S1413, the JAC carry-over flag is set, and the BB is set. In the second state, the stock lottery table for JAC carry-over is acquired in step S1415.

As shown in FIG. 37, when these stock lottery tables are compared between before the AT winning notification (step S1406) and after the AT winning notification and before the AT transition (step S1407), the AT after the AT winning notification is compared with that before the AT winning notification. It is set so that it is easier to win the stock lottery before the transition. Therefore, in the precursor mode after winning the AT mode until the AT mode winning notification is performed, or in the configuration in which the stock lottery is performed even after the AT mode winning notification and the AT mode start, the winning notification is performed more than before the AT winning notification. It can be said that the latter is given preferential treatment. This is a situation in which it is difficult for the player to identify whether or not the transition to the AT mode will still occur in the precursor mode in order to eliminate the frustration of the player due to the AT mode not being started easily. Therefore, it is known that the transition to the AT mode will occur after the notification of winning and before the transition, and this is due to the difference in waiting for the start of AT.

Further, before the transition to the BB state, comparing the case without the BB carry-over flag (step S1410) and the case with the BB carry-over flag (step S1411), it is easier to win the stock lottery without the BB carry-over than with the BB carry-over flag. Is set to. In the BB state, the BB second state with the JAC carry-over flag is set to be easier to win the stock lottery than the BB first state and the BB second state without the JAC carry-over flag.

After acquiring the various stock lottery tables, the stock lottery is executed in step S1415, and it is determined in step S1416 whether or not the stock lottery has been won. If the stock lottery has been won, a process of adding 1 to the stock counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1417. Then, in step S1418, the process of setting the stock command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for AT consecutive villas is terminated. The stock counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets in the AT mode, and the stock command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information that the stock lottery has been won. If it is determined in step S1416 that the stock lottery has not been won, the AT consecutive villa processing is terminated as it is. In addition, it may be set so that multiple sets of stock may be won in the stock lottery. In that case, the value corresponding to the number of sets is added to the stock counter and the information of the number of sets is input to the stock command. It may be configured to be included in.

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 30), after executing the AT consecutive villa processing in step S1005, the bonus AT start processing is executed in step S1006. The bonus AT start process is a process for executing the notification (transition allowance notification) that the winning permission condition is satisfied in the situation where the BB winning may be established.

<Process for starting bonus AT>
That is, in the bonus AT start processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the state is BB. If it is in the BB state, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the BB winning flag is set. If the BB winning flag is not set, the transfer permission cannot be granted yet, so the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, the bonus AT start processing is terminated as it is.

If the BB is won in the AT mode, in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is an out-of-order result and the BB prize can be established. By the way, in the present embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, it is a duplicate winning with the first re-game (rip overlapping first BB, rip overlapping second BB), so that the first BB or the second BB winning game is the first. It is configured so that 1BB prize and 2BB prize cannot be established. That is, the game in which the BB prize can be established is the game after the BB is won, and the lottery result of the game is the result of the deviation. If the result is not out of order, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. If the result is out of alignment, in step S1505, a process of setting a migration permission flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. Then, in step S1506, after executing the process of setting the winning permission command as the output target to the display control device 81, the process for starting the bonus AT is terminated. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the winning permission command will be described in detail later. In step S1504, if the lottery result of this game is not a wrong result, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is.

Return to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 30).

After executing the process of step S1004 or step S1006, in step S1007, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order winning combination. The push order combination is a result including the push order bell, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C. Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, and Normal Lip C are all results of winning multiple re-games, so that the re-games that establish a prize may differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is set.

Specifically, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so that the second re-game winning is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first. When the stop control is performed and the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the first re-game winning is established. However, in these normal rip A, normal rip B, and normal rip C, even if any of the re-game prizes that have been won in duplicate is established, the privilege to be given is the re-game, and the re-game that is established. Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are game results in which the re-game winning is established regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop result differs depending on the operation order. Then, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are the triggers for starting the AT mode, the AT mode winning flag is set, and the AT mode is a game in which the second re-game winning can be established. Is started.

When it is determined in step S1007 that the push order winning combination is won, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If any of the flags is set, the push order notification process is executed in step S1009, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1007 or step S1008, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process executed in step S1009, the outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 39 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 39A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, on the instruction monitor 68, at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and "." Can be displayed.

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of the eight segments. It may be configured to use 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually in each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be composed of a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. If so, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1 The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which a push order notification can occur, such as an AT mode winning notification being performed and an AT mode flag being set, is set. If it is satisfied, it is lit in the game in which the start condition is satisfied. Further, it is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (advantageous state, specific state), and the eighth display segment N8 is the relevant section. In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section and the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It serves as a display (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the game machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the player is suppressed from overlooking because it is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy for the player who advances the game to acquire the medal.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

<Processing for push order notification>
Next, the push order notification process executed in step S1009 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. The case where the AT mode flag is not set is the case where the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred after the AT mode is won. In this case, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the AT mode flag is not set and the AT notification flag is not set, it means that although the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the mode is still in the precursor mode. In this case, in this game, the push order notification is not generated, and the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is any of normal rip A to normal rip C. If the push order bell is used instead of the normal lip A to the normal lip C, the final push order notification process is terminated as it is. In the case of any of the normal rip A to the normal rip C, the AT start flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1604. The AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the AT mode is started from this game. After that, in step S1605, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second re-game winning is performed. Then, in step S1606, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. In the display control device 81 that has received this push order command, as the push order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning, the push order notification effect in the order in which the middle stop switch 43 should be operated first and "Aim from the inside! The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the display such as "!", Voice navigation, and the like are performed, and the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning prize is notified.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the AT mode flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order bell. If it is not the push order bell, the push order notification process ends as it is. In the case of the push order bell, in step S1608, it is determined whether or not the above transition permission flag is set. If the migration permission flag is not set, it is determined in step S1609 whether or not it is in any of the BB states. When it is determined in step S1608 that the migration permission flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1609 that the migration permission flag is not set but it is not in the BB state, the process proceeds to step S1610, and the present pressing is performed. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination is performed according to the type of the forward bell. Then, in step S1611, a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then a process for notifying the final push order is executed. To finish. The display control device 81 that has received this push order command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination is performed. On the other hand, when the transition permission flag is not set and the state is in the BB state, the push order notification process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification when the push order bell is won even in the AT mode. ..

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S515 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the AT mode and the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1701, the number of games management process is performed. In the game number management process, a process for managing the number of games in the CZ mode and the number of games in the precursor mode is performed.

More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and if it is in either BB state, the game is played as it is. End the number management process. That is, if the transition to the BB state occurs in the CZ mode or the precursor mode, the number of games in the precursor mode or the CZ mode is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1803. Then, in step S1804, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter has become 0, and if it becomes 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1805, and the CZ end command is output to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the target. By clearing the CZ mode flag, the CZ mode ends and the normal mode is entered.

After executing the process of step S1805, the process of setting the number of ceiling games is executed in step S1806. The ceiling game number setting process is a process of inputting a predetermined value from 100 to 999 to the ceiling counter. Which value to enter in the ceiling counter is determined by lottery. The process of setting the number of ceiling games will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in any of step S1802 and step S1804, or after the process of step S1806 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag or the pseudo precursor flag is set. If neither flag is set, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If any of the flags is set, the process proceeds to step S1808 to execute a process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter and the pseudo precursor counter. That is, in step S1808, the precursor counter is subtracted by 1 in the precursor mode, and the pseudo precursor counter is subtracted by 1 in the pseudo precursor mode.

After executing the process of step S1808, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not the precursor flag is set and the precursor counter becomes 0. That is, when the number of precursor games becomes 0 in the precursor mode, the process proceeds to step S1810 to clear the precursor flag. Then, in step S1811, the AT notification flag is set, and in step S1812, the AT winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the game number management process is completed. When the AT notification flag is set, the processing for generating the push order notification for the second re-game winning is performed in the above-mentioned push order notification process. Further, the display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification command has won the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT mode winning notification effect is performed as a notification that the transition to the AT mode is permitted. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

In step S1809, if the precursor counter is not 0 or the pseudo precursor flag is set instead of the precursor flag, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1813, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor counter is 0 and the pseudo precursor flag is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1813, the process of clearing the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S1814, and then the game number management process is terminated. As a result, the pseudo precursor mode ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1813 and the pseudo precursor counter is not 0 or the precursor flag is set instead of the pseudo precursor flag although it is 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process, after executing the game number management process in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the AT start flag is set. As described above, the AT start flag is a flag set in the game in which the second re-game winning is possible when the transition to the AT mode is caused. More specifically, the AT notification flag is set. This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won in the present situation. If the AT start flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1703, the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1704, and the AT start flag is cleared in step S1705. Then, the AT mode flag is set in step S1706, and the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S1707. The continuation flag is a flag for determining to continue the AT mode at the time of a predetermined continuation determination of the AT mode.

After that, in step S1708, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the AT mode start effect is performed according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the AT start flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1709. In step S1709, the AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT mode is in progress, in step S1710, the AT continuation setting process for managing the continuation of the AT mode is executed based on the game result of the current game, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

<AT continuation setting process>
In the AT continuation setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not any BB winning game flag is set, so that any BB winning game is won in this game. Is determined whether or not is satisfied. As described above, the BB winning game flag is a flag set in the bonus state processing performed immediately before the winning result correspondence processing.

In the present embodiment, the continuation determination of the AT mode is executed from the time of winning the BB to the end of the BB. More specifically, the AT mode ends if the AT mode continuation condition is not satisfied by the end of the BB, and if the AT mode continuation condition is satisfied at the end of the BB, at least the next BB The AT mode continues until the end of the state. That is, step S1901 is a process of determining whether or not the AT mode continuation determination is included in the timing.

If the BB prize is established in this game, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not the stock counter is 0. When the stock counter is 1 or more, the process of subtracting 1 from the stock counter is executed in step S1903, the process of setting the continuation command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1904, and then AT. End the continuation setting process. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the continuous effect corresponding to the continuation of the AT mode is performed in the BB state that won the prize this time.

If the stock counter is 0 in step S1902, the continuous lottery process is executed in step S1905. In such a process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to continue the AT mode based on the continuation rate lottery performed when the AT mode transition lottery is won. That is, when the 60% flag is set and the 60% continuation mode is set, the continuous lottery in step S1905 is won with a 60% probability, the 90% flag is set, and the 90% continuation mode is set. A continuous lottery is performed, such as winning the continuous lottery in step S1905 with a 90% probability.

In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the continuous lottery in step S1905 has been won, and if it has been won, the process proceeds to step S1904, a continuation command is set, and then the AT continuation setting process ends. If the continuous lottery is not won, the continuation flag is cleared in step S1907, the discontinuation command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S1908, and then the AT continuation setting is performed. End the process. The display control device 81 that has received the discontinuation command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the discontinuity effect corresponding to the fact that the AT mode does not continue is performed in the BB state that won the prize this time. For example, if the BB prize is established without winning the stock lottery after shifting to the AT mode and the continuous lottery in step S1905 is not won, the continuation flag set at the time of shifting to the AT mode is cleared in step S1907. Will be.

When it is determined in step S1901 that the game is not a BB winning game, it is determined whether or not the game is in the BB state by determining whether or not any of the BB state flags is set in step S1909. If it is in the BB state, it is determined in step S1910 whether or not the continuation flag is set. The case where the continuation flag is not set is the case where the continuation is discontinued at the time of winning the BB in step S1907 and step S1908, and the effect for that is performed. In this case, in step S1911, it is determined whether or not the stock counter is 0. When the continuation flag is not set and the stock counter is 1 or more, although it is not continued at the time of BB winning, the stock lottery is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (AT consecutive villa processing) during the BB state. If you win. In this case, the process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1912, the continuation command is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S1913, and then the AT continuation setting process ends. When the display control device 81 receives the continuation command during the BB state, the display control device 81 controls so that the discontinuity effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is rewritten to the continuation effect and executed. If the continuation flag is set in step S1910, or if the stock counter is 0 in step S1911, the AT continuation setting process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1909 that the game is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1914 whether or not any of the BB end game flags is set, so that this game is the end game in the BB state. Judge whether or not. As described above, the BB end game flag is a flag set in the bonus state processing performed immediately before the winning result correspondence processing.

If it is not the end game, the AT continuation setting process is ended as it is. In the case of the end game, the process of clearing the transition permission flag is executed in step S1915. In the following step S1916, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set, and if it is set, the AT continuation setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the AT mode continues even after the BB state ends, and after the BB is won, the winning permission flag is set, and then the BB winning is established, so that a positive judgment is made in step S1901 and the subsequent continuation judgment is made. It will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the continuation flag is not set, the process of clearing the AT mode flag is performed in step S1917. Then, in step S1918, the process of setting the AT end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT continuation setting process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the AT end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the end of the AT mode.

<Management of the number of games and the number of differences in the advantageous section>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section display and managing the number of games and the difference number of advantageous sections will be described. ..

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The section display first process is a process performed in step S414 in the lottery process (FIG. 18), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. Display mode transition It is carried out after the lottery etc. (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case in which at least a specific section in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S2001 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S2004. Then, in step S2005, the advantageous section flag is set. By setting the advantageous section flag, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. Then, in step S2006, a process of starting counting the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e is performed. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section, and a process of adding one in each game in the advantageous section is executed.

In the following step S2007, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is executed. The process for the advantageous section transition game is a process related to the instruction function performed in the game in which the transition to the advantageous section occurs.

<Processing for advantageous section transition game>
The process for the advantageous section transition game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not any of the BB carry-over flags is set. When the BB carry-over flag is set, the ceiling game number table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a in step S2102. As shown in FIG. 47, the ceiling game number table is set so that one ceiling game number is randomly determined between 100 games and 999 games, and 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, and so on. , 999 games, and the number of games that can be easily selected in units of about 100 games are set. Further, in the ceiling game number table, the number of ceiling games that can be easily selected differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value (the higher the ball output rate is set), the easier it is to select the shorter number of ceiling games. There is.

After acquiring the ceiling game number table in step S2102, the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is executed in step S2103. Then, after executing the process of inputting the number of ceiling games determined by the lottery into the ceiling counter in step S2104, the process for the advantageous section transition game is ended. As described above, the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 for each game in the AT lottery process, and when it becomes 0, the AT mode winning flag is set without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

By the way, the process of steps S2102 to S2104 is the process of setting the number of ceiling games, and in step S1806 in the game number management process (FIG. 43), the process of acquiring the ceiling game number table (step S2102) and the lottery of the number of ceiling games. The process (step S2103) and the ceiling counter input process (step S2104) are executed.

The ceiling game number table acquired in step S2102 and the ceiling game number table acquired in step S1806 may be different, and more specifically, the number of ceiling games set in the advantageous section transition game. , The number of games may be different from the number of ceiling games set when the CZ mode ends. For example, the number of ceiling games set when the CZ mode ends is larger than the number of ceiling games set in the advantageous section transition game. The number of games with a smaller number may be easily set as the number of ceiling games, and vice versa.

When it is determined in step S2101 that the BB carry-over flag is not set, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not any of the BB state flags is set. If any of the BB state flags is set and the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, the shifted flags are set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S2106, and then steps S2102- In step S2104, the above-mentioned number of ceiling games is set, and then the advantageous section transition game process ends.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may be terminated at the time of winning the BB and at the end of the BB state, and the shifted flag is the end of the BB state when the advantageous section is shifted during the BB state. It is a flag to prevent the end of the advantageous section from time to time. That is, when the advantageous section can be ended at the time of BB winning and the end of BB, even if the advantageous section is ended with the BB winning and then re-shifted to the advantageous section during the BB state, the advantage such as the end of BB is followed. The configuration is such that the end of the section can occur. Therefore, there is a case where the advantageous section is terminated at the time of BB winning (re-shifting to the advantageous section during the BB state) and a case where the advantageous section is not terminated at the time of BB winning (the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state). It is necessary to distinguish from the case (not), and the above-mentioned migrated flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to distinguish it.

On the other hand, when the transition to the advantageous section occurs in a situation where the BB winning is not carried over and the BB state is not performed, the process of setting the CZ mode flag is executed in step S2107. Then, after inputting 32 to the CZ counter in step S2108, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is terminated.

That is, when shifting to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB winning is carried over or in a BB state, the mode shifts to the normal mode, and the transition is made to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB winning is not carried over and the BB state is not present. In that case, the mode shifts to the CZ mode, and the mode at the time of shifting to the advantageous section differs depending on whether or not the BB winning is carried over and whether or not the BB state is present. And since the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the CZ mode than in the normal mode, the situation where the BB winning is carried over or the situation where the BB state is not the case, rather than the transition to the advantageous section, That is, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the advantageous section before the BB winning or in the BB winning game.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, if the advantageous section flag is set in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag or the CZ mode flag is set. As described above, after the AT mode winning notification effect is performed, the AT mode flag is set so that the push order notification at the time of winning the push order combination can occur, and the notification start condition of the section display Will be established. Further, in the slot machine 10, as a notification start condition of the section display, not only the state in which the push order notification at the time of winning the push order combination can be generated, but also the lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which the push order notification can occur is won. It is also set as a notification start condition to shift to the CZ mode, which facilitates the operation. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the push order notification can be generated in the CZ mode, and the notification start condition may be satisfied as the state in which the push order notification at the time of winning the push order combination itself can be generated by shifting to the CZ mode.

When it is determined in step S2008 that the AT mode flag or the CZ mode flag is set, the section display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S2009. In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is set to be lit and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!"" Is spoken from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. At the start of display of the eighth display segment N8, the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit may be configured to generate an effect. In this case, the corresponding command is output to the display control device 81 and the corresponding command is output. It is preferable that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

When it is determined in step S2001 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not it is in the normal mode. In the normal mode, in step S2011, a process of ending the display in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of switching the eighth display segment N8 from the lit state to the extinguished state is performed. On the other hand, when the mode is not in the normal mode in step S2010, the display in the advantageous section is continued. Specifically, a process is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state.

When it is determined in step S2003 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, and when it is an advantageous section winning game (after executing the process of step S2007), the situation where the push order notification can occur and the push order Transition to the state where notification is generated If it is not easy to win the lottery (when it is determined in step S2008 that neither the AT mode flag nor the CZ mode flag is set), the section is displayed in step S2011. When the display of the vessel is finished, the process proceeds to step S2012. Further, after executing the display start process in step S2009 and after determining in step S2010 that the mode is the normal mode, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and the CZ mode flag is set. Is also set, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

If it is determined in step S2013 that the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, a process of adding 1 to the winning combination second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S2012 or step S2014, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S2015. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S2016, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S2015 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units composed of seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the role ratio monitor 77, and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S2016, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S2015 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Perform display control. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numbers are displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S2016, the section display first process is terminated.

In addition, in the arithmetic processing of step S2015, the display control of the combination monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the number having the fifth digit after the decimal point. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, since "0" is basically displayed on the first display unit 77a, the first display unit 77a may not be provided, or the first display unit 77a may be printed. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S516 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (bonus state processing, winning result handling processing) will be performed.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, in step S2202, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. After executing the process of step S2202, in step S2203, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S2203, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on the condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is the number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section MY. By adding to, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S2203, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S2204, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S2205. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is there. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous section games AG is 1450 at the start of the AT mode, and even if the AT mode is performed as it is, the end condition of the AT mode (any BB is at least 1). Understand whether or not the situation is such that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached before (retrieving). Then, in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, at the start of the AT mode, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is 2300, and even if the AT mode is performed as it is, the end condition of the AT mode (upper limit payout number of BB = 140). ) Before the situation where the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached. Then, in such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S2206, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit number of games 1500, or whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S2207, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S2208, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S2209, after performing the process of initializing the parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second process of displaying this section ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2209 is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time to the initial values. .. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, the continuation flag, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of advantageous section games AG, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY, the precursor counter for the precursor mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as CZ mode, etc. are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using push order notification, and RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

Incidentally, the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S205 in the main process also clears the RAM with respect to the variables or parameters for the advantageous section, as in step S2209.

If it is determined in step S2206 that the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S2210 and any BB winning game flag By determining whether or not is set, it is determined whether or not any BB prize has been established in this game. If any of the BB prizes is established, it is determined in step S2211 whether or not any of the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, and various CZ mode flags is set. That is, the processes of steps S2210 and S2211 are processes for determining whether or not the game is a BB winning game in the normal mode and before the AT mode is won.

In the case of the BB winning game in the normal mode and before the AT mode is won, the process proceeds to step S2207, the processing for ending the advantageous section of steps S2207 to S2209 is performed, and then the second section display processing is ended. .. On the other hand, when the game is in the normal mode and is not the BB winning game before the AT mode is won, the section display second process is ended as it is without ending the advantageous section. That is, in the present embodiment, the game in which the BB prize is established may or may not be the end trigger of the advantageous section depending on the internal mode in the advantageous section, and the AT mode in the normal mode in the advantageous section If the BB prize is won before winning, it will be the end of the advantageous section, and if it is before the AT mode is won in a mode other than the normal mode or in the normal mode, it will not be the end of the advantageous section. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the timing (internal mode) at which the BB prize is established, and simply win the BB to win the prize and obtain the benefits associated with the BB. It is possible to realize a novel playability that is significantly different from conventional slot machines.

If it is determined in step S2210 that the game is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S2212 whether or not any of the BB end game flags is set, so that this game is an end game in the BB state. Judge whether or not. In the case of the end game in the BB state, it is determined in step S2213 whether or not the continuation flag is set. As described above, the continuation flag is a flag that is set at the time of transition to the AT mode and cleared at the start of the bonus AT state when the AT mode is discontinued.

If the BB winning game is in a situation where the continuation flag is set, the section display second process is ended as it is without ending the advantageous section. If the BB end game is in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2214 to determine whether or not the transitioned flag is set. The shifted flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the advantageous section during the BB state (step S2106). If the migrated flag is set, the transitioned flag is cleared in step S2215, and then the second process of displaying this section ends. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

On the other hand, in the case where the BB end game is in a situation where the continuation flag is not set and the transferred flag is not set, the processing for the end of the advantageous section in steps S2207 to S2209 is performed. After that, the second section display process is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, depending on whether or not the continuation condition of the AT mode is satisfied, the end of the BB state may or may not be the end trigger of the advantageous section, and the continuation condition of the AT mode may be the trigger. If the BB ends in a situation where it is not satisfied, it will be the end trigger of the advantageous section, and if the BB ends in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, it will not be the end trigger. In this way, when the continuation condition of the AT mode is not satisfied, not only the BB state ends but also the advantageous section ends, so that the bonus AT state due to the overlap between the BB state and the AT mode Since the extreme situations of the advantage such that even the advantageous section can be terminated immediately after the advantageous situation such as, the advantage of the bonus AT state is conspicuous, and the difference of the advantage makes the bonus AT state. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 49, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won by winning the second small role (watermelon), the advantageous section is started in the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (the game is advantageous). (Section transition game), measurement of the number of executed games in the advantageous section (counting the number of advantageous section games AG) is started from the game. The above-mentioned advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46) is a process performed after shifting to the advantageous section in the game that has shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the watermelon.

Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won during the advantageous section and the winning notification and the AT mode flag are set so that the push order notification can occur, the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit, push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends and the eighth display is finished when the third reel stop ON operation is performed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, and the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. Is finished. In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted from the game that has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, while the push order notification is generated only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, the push order notification does not occur in the section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off even in the advantageous section. That is, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefit of the push order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). It is possible to clearly grasp. By doing so, there is no difference in the advantage between the player who ends the game without knowing that he / she can enjoy the benefits of the push order notification and the successor player who is seated after that. Can be done. In other words, in the situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the push order notification does not occur, so that the game can be finished gracefully.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S2302, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or after the process of step S2302 is executed, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S306 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S2304. In the bet-time effect setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the effect based on the bet operation this time is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or after the process of step S2304 is executed, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S411 of the lottery process. There are precursor commands, pseudo precursor commands, stock commands, winning permission commands, push order notification commands, etc. that are set in the process (FIG. 30). In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S2306.

When a negative determination is made in step S2305, or after the process of step S2306 is executed, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S505 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). It is a stop command command set in. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S2308 executes each stop operation effect setting process. In each stop operation effect setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the effect based on the current stop operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or after the process of step S2308 is executed, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S517 of the reel control process (FIG. 21). In addition to the commands, there are AT start command, CZ end command, AT winning notification command, continuation command, discontinuation command, AT end command, etc. set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 42). In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after the process of step S2310 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S2311, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the connection is made without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described. In the description of each effect setting process, the outline of the display effect of FIGS. 55 to 57 will be referred to.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, the display mode setting process is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is the normal mode, the CZ mode, or the AT mode, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed in the corresponding display mode. Set so that the production is performed. Specifically, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side are also provided with areas for setting the CZ mode flag and the AT mode flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and each mode is provided. The corresponding flag is set at the start of, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. In step S2401, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. When the push order notification command is received, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is any of normal rip A to normal rip C. The case where the push order notification command is set in the games of normal rip A to normal rip C means that it is the start game of AT mode, and in this case, the second replay winning is supported in step S2405. The auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the push order notification effect is performed.

The case of making a negative judgment in step S2404 means that the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning, and in this case, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination is performed in step S2406. The auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so as to be used.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the lottery result of the current game is not the push order winning combination, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the specific winning combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear as a lottery result of each game (it is difficult to win), and in this embodiment, chance eyes A to chance C, cherry A to specific roles Cherry C and watermelon are set. As shown in FIG. 34, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to be triggered by the lottery results other than the specific winning combination. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, the specific combination notification process is executed in step S2408. In the specific combination notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the specific combination notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific combinations is performed. As the specific combination notification, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), three characters with exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. The production is set. As mentioned above, since the probability of winning the AT mode transition differs depending on the type of specific role, there is a great deal of interest in the type of specific role, and when the specific role notification is performed as described above, any of them As a result, it is considered that an attempt is made to determine whether or not the player has won.

Here, among the specific roles, especially in Cherry A and Cherry B and Cherry C, if the former Cherry A and Cherry B are won, the ninth replay prize, which is a weak cherry replay, is possible. , The latter, Cherry C, has the difference that in addition to the weak cherry replay 9th replay prize, the strong cherry replay 11th replay prize is possible, and in any of Cherry A to Cherry C Even so, there is a common point that the 10th replay prize, which is a cherry spill replay, will be possible. That is, if the 9th re-game prize or the 10th re-game prize is established, there is a possibility that either Cherry A to Cherry C will be won, and if the 11th re-game prize is established, Cherry A- It is confirmed that Cherry C was won among Cherry C. In this case, in order to determine which of Cherry A to C is won, the cherry C is won by stopping at the valid line, aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 11th re-game winning. If the corresponding symbol does not become an effective line despite the aim, it can be determined that it is Cherry A or Cherry B. In the left reel 32L, the symbol corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is the "BAR" symbol. That is, in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the cherry C is at least by aiming at the ninth "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and performing a stop operation. The left stop switch 42 was stopped from the timing when the fifth "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reached the middle stage and when the eighth "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reached the middle stage. In this case, it is possible to stop the "BAR" symbol in the middle of the left reel 32L.

By the way, when operated in such an operation mode, the "white 7" symbol corresponding to the first BB and the second BB cannot be stopped at the effective line on the left reel 32L, and the "Akakai" corresponding to JAC on the left reel 32L. The symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403 or step S2407, or after executing the process of step S2405, step S2406 or step S2408, the process proceeds to step S2409. In step S2409, the continuous effect setting process is executed. Then, in step S2410, the bonus AT process is executed, and in step S2411, other start-time effect setting processes are performed, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. In step S2411, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

<Continuous production setting process>
The continuous effect setting process in step S2409 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect setting process is a process for executing the continuous effect before the number of games becomes 0 in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode. The continuous production is a production in which a series of productions are performed over a plurality of games, and either an advantageous result notification or a disadvantageous result notification is notified as a result notification in the series of productions. The result notification is set to be performed, for example, in the final game of a series of effects. More specifically, for example, in a continuous effect as a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other, a plurality of results are notified. The confrontation effect is performed over the game, and as a result notification, the effect that the main character wins is an advantageous result notification, and the effect that the main character loses is a disadvantageous result notification. For example, in the continuous production of notifying whether or not the AT mode is won, the AT mode winning is notified when the advantageous result notification is performed, and the AT mode non-winning is notified when the unfavorable result notification is performed.

By the way, in the continuous effect setting process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When a precursor command is included, in step S2502, a process of inputting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command into the continuous effect counters provided in various counter areas 183b is performed. The continuous effect counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the precursor mode and the pseudo precursor mode and the start game of the continuous effect. Then, when the continuous effect counter reaches a value corresponding to the start of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is started. After executing the process of step S2502, the process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2503. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the precursor mode is in progress.

When it is determined in step S2501 that the precursor command has not been received, it is determined in step S2504 whether or not the pseudo precursor command is included as the start command received this time. When the pseudo precursor command is included, in step S2505, the process of inputting the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode included in the pseudo precursor command into the continuous effect counter is performed. Then, in step S2506, a process of setting a pseudo precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. The pseudo precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the pseudo precursor mode is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, or after executing the process of step S2503 or step S2506, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag or the pseudo precursor flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2508. Then, in step S2509, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous effect counters corresponds to the continuous effect. In the present embodiment, for example, a continuous effect to be performed over four games is set. In this case, in step S2509, when the continuous effect counter is 0 to 4, the number corresponds to the continuous effect. judge.

When the number of continuous effect counters corresponds to the continuous effect, in step S2510, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the precursor flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2511 to acquire the precursor effect table from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2513, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, as the continuous effect of this time. Perform the setting process. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for precursors, if the continuous effect counter is 1-3, it is the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, and the continuous effect counter is 0. If this is the case, the production data indicates that the continuous production of this time ends as an advantageous result notification.

If it is determined in step S2510 that the precursor flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo precursor flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2513, the production data of the corresponding continuous production is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous production counter, and the corresponding production data is acquired from the production data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the continuous production of this time is performed. Performs the process of setting as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous production counters are 1 to 3, the production data indicating that the continuous production continues until the next game or the production data indicating that the continuous production does not continue is used. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect this time is terminated as a disadvantageous result notification.

After the processing of step S2513 is performed, it is determined in step S2514 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag or the pseudo precursor flag is performed in step S2515, and then the continuous effect setting process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2507, step S2509, or step S2514, the continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Processing for bonus AT>
Next, the bonus AT process executed in step S2410 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, the bonus AT process is terminated as it is. If it is in the AT mode, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not it is in the BB state. The state of being in the AT mode and not in the BB state means that the situation is waiting for the start of the bonus AT, and more specifically, the situation from the start of the AT mode to the BB winning or the BB. The situation is that the state is once terminated and waiting for the next BB winning, or after the BB winning, the situation is waiting for winning permission. In this case, in step S2603, it is controlled so that the effect for the BB prize waiting state is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. The production for the BB prize waiting state is, for example, a production corresponding to the lottery result of each game (a production suggesting the lottery result), and the player can clearly recognize that the bonus AT is waiting. , It is set as an effect different from the effect of other states.

In the following step S2604, it is determined whether or not the winning permission command has been received. As described above, the winning permission command is a command output from the main control device 101 in a game in which any BB can be won in the situation of waiting for the start of the bonus AT. This command is output when the lottery result of the game is out of order in the situation of waiting for the start of the bonus AT which has won the BB. When the winning permission command is received, the BB winning permission notification process is executed in step S2605. In the BB prize permission notification process, as a BB prize permission notification for the player to know that it is time to establish the BB prize, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 wins. In addition to notifying the type of BB being used, a male character screaming "Aim!" Is displayed. When notifying the type of winning BB, for example, in the first BB notification when the first BB is won, a stop roll for which the first BB winning is established ("white 7" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2). In the second BB notification when the second BB is won by displaying the stop roll (stop roll), the stop roll ("white 7" symbol, "white 7" from the left on the middle line L2) where the second BB prize is established is displayed. It is preferable to display the symbol, "Red 7" symbol (stop roll) at which the symbol stops.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the BB state is in the BB state and the current state is the bonus AT state, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, a process of adding 1 to the BB counters provided in various counter areas 183b is executed. The BB counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in the bonus AT mode. More specifically, in the AT mode and the BB state, the AT mode ends with the end of the BB state this time. It is a counter for determining the production content of each game in order to notify whether or not to do so.

Here, the outline of the effect in the bonus AT state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

In the present embodiment, a battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed in the bonus AT state, and when the AT mode is continued, the main character defeats all the enemy characters and wins the continuous effect. When the mode ends, the hero character is defeated without defeating the enemy character. For example, in the first game in the bonus AT state, after the main character holding the machine gun is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (a1), three zombie enemy characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (a2). Is displayed. In this case, if all three zombies can be defeated by the end of the battle effect, it will be a continuous effect, and if even one remains, it will be an end effect.

For example, in the second game in the bonus AT state, after the appearance of the main character attacking with a machine gun is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), the attack is performed as shown in FIG. It shows that the number of enemy characters has decreased by one (defeated). Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (c1), in the third game in the bonus AT state, the main character further attacks, and as shown in FIG. 56 (c2), the number of enemy characters is further reduced by one. Is shown.

After that, in the fourth game in the bonus AT state, either the above-mentioned continuous effect or the end effect is displayed as the result notification of the battle effect. In the case of continuous production, as shown in FIG. 57 (a1), it is displayed that the last enemy character is blown off by the attack of the main character, and as shown in FIG. 57 (a2), the main character raises a sword. Along with showing how happy the victory is, the character display such as "WIN" clearly indicates that the result of the battle effect is a continuous effect. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the AT mode will continue even after the bonus AT state this time. In the case of the end effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (b1), the appearance of the enemy character attacking is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 57 (b2), the appearance of the main character falling on his back is displayed. At the same time, the character display such as "LOSE" clearly indicates that the result of the battle effect is the end effect. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the AT mode will also end with the end of the bonus AT state this time.

Returning to the description of the bonus AT process, after executing the BB counter addition process in step S2606, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The continuation flag is set based on the fact that the continuation command is received from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state (at the time of winning the BB), and is cleared based on not receiving the continuation command at the start of the next bonus AT state. This is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp whether or not the battle effect in the bonus AT state is to be a continuous effect. When the continuation flag is set, in step S2608, the effect table for continuation is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the effect data for the corresponding bonus AT state is specified from the effect table for continuation and the BB counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and this effect is produced. Performs the process of setting as. As the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the effect table for continuation, the continuation effect of FIG. 57 (a) is set, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game in which the result is notified. There is.

On the other hand, when the continuation flag is not set in step S2607, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the resurrection flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The revival flag is set based on the fact that the continuation command is received from the main controller 101 during the bonus AT state (during the BB state), and based on the fact that the continuation command is not received at the start of the next bonus AT state. It is a flag to be cleared. When the resurrection flag is set, in step S2611, the effect table for resurrection is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the effect data for the corresponding bonus AT state is specified from the effect table for resurrection and the BB counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and this effect is produced. Performs the process of setting as. As the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the effect table for revival, the end effect of FIG. 57 (b) is set, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game in which the result is notified. At the same time, a revival effect is set in which the BB counter is a value larger than 4 and the main character stands up and faces the battle again until the bet operation at the start of the next game of the BB end game. ing. For example, when the revival effect is set during the BB end game, as shown in FIG. 57 (c1), in the game in which the AT mode end effect is performed, the AT mode ends, the number of continuous games in the AT mode, and the like. After the notification of the number of acquired medals is performed, as shown in FIG. 57 (c2), the above-mentioned revival effect is performed, and the player can clearly grasp that the AT mode is continued.

If neither the continuation flag nor the resurrection flag is set in step S2710, the discontinuation effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a in step S2712. Then, in step S2609, the effect data for the corresponding bonus AT state is specified from the effect table for discontinuation and the BB counter, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Performs the process of setting as an effect. As the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the effect table for discontinuation, the end effect of FIG. 57 (b) is set, especially when the BB counter is 4 corresponding to the fourth game in which the result is notified. ing.

Here, the effect data acquired by using the effect data table for revival and the effect data acquired by using the effect data table for discontinuation are notified of the result from the start game of the battle effect. The contents up to the game are set to be the same, and the data table is set so as to acquire the same production data. Therefore, the production data is shared.

After setting the effect for the bonus AT state in step S2609, it is determined in step S2613 whether or not the lottery result of this game is JAC winning. If the JAC is won, the JAC avoidance notification process is executed in step S2614. The JAC avoidance notification process is a process for notifying the JAC winning avoidance, and more specifically, a process for causing the winning avoidance notification to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As mentioned above, when the "Akakai" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol, and "White 7" symbol stop on the effective line from the left, the JAC prize is established, and the "Akakai" symbol is on the effective line (middle) of the left reel 32L. It is possible to avoid the JAC winning by performing the stop operation of the stop switch 42 at the timing when the stop cannot be stopped. More specifically, it is possible to avoid JAC winning by stopping the operation while avoiding the timing when the 0th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage and the timing when the 4th "Akakai" symbol reaches the middle stage. is there.

As a prize avoidance notification, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), an effect in which three characters with exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. Is set. As described above, even when the lottery result of each game is the winning of the specific combination, the notification of FIG. 55 (b) is performed as the notification of the specific combination. The winning avoidance notification for avoiding the JAC winning has the same content as the specific combination notification, and the production data is shared. This is because the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44 for avoiding the JAC winning and the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44 for determining the type of the specific combination overlap. That is, in the present embodiment, if the stop operations 42 to 44 are stopped at the operation timing for determining the type of the specific combination, the JAC winning can be avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604 or step S2613, or after executing the process of step S2605 or step S2614, the process proceeds to step S2615. In step S2615, it is determined whether or not a stock command has been received. If a stock command has been received, the stock notification process is executed in step S2616. In the stock notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled to notify that the stock lottery (see FIG. 36) of the main control device 101 has been won. As an effect for stock notification, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to display characters such as "V stock !!", and the speaker 64 is set to emit a violent electronic sound such as "Kupipipikuin!". It is possible for the player to clearly know that the stock lottery has been won. In addition, by making the production for stock notification intense as described above, not only the player who is playing the game machine but also the game machines installed near the game machine (for example, 3 units). A player who is playing (up to the next door) can also grasp that the above-mentioned effect for stock notification is being performed, and through this, it is possible to enhance the superiority complex of the player who is playing the game machine. It has become. If a negative determination is made in step S2615, or after the process of step S2616 is executed, the bonus AT process is terminated.

<Production setting process when all stops>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop executed in step S2310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. The effect setting process at the time of all stops is a process for setting an effect to be executed at the end of one game.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the AT winning notification command has been received. When the AT winning notification command is received, the AT mode winning notification process is executed in step S2702. In the AT mode winning notification process, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays “AT GET !!” and outputs a sound effect for it from the speaker 64.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the AT winning notification command has not been received, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the AT start command has been received. When the AT start command is received, the AT mode start notification process is executed in step S2704. In the AT mode start notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the AT mode start effect is performed according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started this time. For example, in the AT mode start effect, a character display such as "AT START !!" is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the color of the character display or the effect of the character display is changed according to the continuation rate.

Here, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT mode, the transition to the bonus AT state is allowed, and then when the bonus AT state ends in the situation where there is no continuation flag, the advantageous section ends once, but it is advantageous. At the time of re-transition to the section, the CZ mode is set. Then, the CZ mode is set to the normal mode if the AT mode transition lottery is not won within the set number of games, and so on, each state and mode is shifted from the start of the AT mode to the end of the CZ mode. However, a series of favorable states are executed. The AT mode start effect is an effect for starting such a series of advantageous states.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the AT start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2705 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the AT mode end notification process is executed in step S2705. In the AT mode end notification process, the AT mode end effect (see FIG. 57 (c1)) that notifies the end of the AT mode and the number of continuous games and the number of medals won in the AT mode to be ended is performed. , Auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 are controlled.

After executing the AT mode end notification process in step S2705, the CZ mode start notification process is executed in step S2706. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, the AT mode and the advantageous section end. Then, after the advantageous section ends at the end of the BB state in this way, if the BB carry-over flag is not set and the BB state is not set at the time of re-transition to the advantageous section (step S2101 and step S2105: NO), CZ It is configured to shift to the mode. The CZ mode start notification process in step S2706 is a process for setting the CZ mode start effect to be performed at the start of the next game (for example, as a bet time effect). In the CZ mode start notification process, although the AT mode itself has ended, the transition to the CZ mode, which is a high probability of the transition to the AT mode, occurs, and it is notified that there is a chance to pull back the AT mode. For this purpose, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character such as "Aiming for revival !!", and the speaker 64 outputs a sound effect for it.

Here, the AT mode end effect set in step S2705 and the CZ mode start effect set in step S2706 are set to be executed without interruption. More specifically, the AT mode end effect is as follows. The betting operation at the start of the game is carried out, and the CZ mode start effect is switched to based on the betting operation at the start of the next game. In this case, as the effect data for the bonus AT state specified from the above-mentioned effect table for revival, after the AT mode end effect is executed in the end game of the bonus AT state, the betting operation at the start of the next game is performed. Based on this, a pattern is set in which the revival effect is executed. That is, even if the AT mode end effect is executed, the end of the AT mode is not confirmed until the bet operation at the start of the next game, and if the revival effect is performed during the bet operation, the AT mode continues and the bet operation is performed. Occasionally, if the CZ mode start effect is performed, the AT mode ends. By doing so, in the configuration in which the advantageous section ends if the continuation condition is not satisfied with the end of the BB state, it is possible to avoid the event that the continuation condition is not satisfied clearly from the production content. be able to.

In addition, as described above, the CZ mode is set by shifting to the advantageous section in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, but the CZ mode start effect is set before the CZ mode is set. It notifies that the mode is changed to the CZ mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the AT mode and the CZ mode feel as if they are a series of advantageous sections, and the advantageous section when shifting to the CZ mode can be information as if it were in the previous advantageous section. Can be made to think that has been taken over.

By the way, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends the display indicating that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section when the medal payout is completed in the bonus AT state end game at which the advantageous section ends. Then, based on the CZ mode flag being set, the display is started by the display start process (step S2009). That is, the advantageous effect of the series of advantageous states from the start of the AT mode to the end of the CZ mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed without interruption even when the normal section is once shifted. The section indicator temporarily ends the display in accordance with the transition to the normal section, and starts displaying again based on the transition to the advantageous section. By doing so, the manager of the game hall or the like can suitably identify the fraudulent act utilizing the continuity of the advantageous section, and the effect of the effect toward the player can be preferably expected.

If it is determined in step S2705 that the AT end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2708 whether or not the CZ end command has been received. When the CZ end command is received, the CZ mode end notification process is executed in step S2709.
In the CZ mode end notification process, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are set so that the CZ mode end effect (for example, character display such as "I'm sorry" and its sound effect) that the CZ mode has ended is performed. Control. It should be noted that when the CZ mode ends, the above-mentioned series of advantageous states ends, and the CZ mode end effect can be said to be an effect executed at the end of the advantageous effect in the series of advantageous states.

If it is determined in step S2708 that the CZ end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2710 whether or not the continuation command has been received. As described above, the continuation command is output from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, and is also output when the continuation condition is satisfied during the bonus AT state. Is. When the continuation command is received, the process proceeds to step S2711, and it is determined whether or not the current game is the start game in the bonus AT state, that is, whether or not any of the BB prizes has been established. In the case of the start game in the bonus AT state, the process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step S2712. By performing such processing, in the subsequent bonus AT processing (FIG. 53), the effect setting using the continuous effect table is performed.

When it is determined in step S2711 that it is not the start of the bonus AT state, it means that the continuation condition is satisfied during the bonus AT state. In this case, the process of setting the resurrection flag is executed in step S2713. By performing such processing, in the subsequent bonus AT processing (FIG. 53), the effect setting using the effect table for revival is performed.

If it is determined in step S2710 that the continuation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2714 to determine whether or not the discontinuation command has been received. As described above, the discontinuation command is a command output from the main controller 101 at the start of the bonus AT state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. When the discontinuation command is received, the process of clearing the continuation flag and the resurrection flag is executed in step S2715. Specifically, if the continuation flag is set, it is cleared, and if the continuation flag is not set, the state is maintained. Also, if the resurrection flag is set, it is cleared, and if the resurrection flag is not set, that state is maintained. By performing such processing, in the subsequent bonus AT processing (FIG. 53), the effect setting using the discontinuity effect table is performed.

After executing any of the processes of step S2702, step S2704, step S2707, step S2709, step S2712, step S2713 and step S2715, or after making a negative determination in step S2714, at the time of all other stops in step S2716. After performing the effect setting process, the effect setting process at the time of this total stop is terminated. In step S2716, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. The sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting of is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<State of game progress>
The flow of the game will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 58 to 60.

First, the start and end of the advantageous section will be described.

When the setting is changed at the timing of t1 before the opening of the game hall or the like, the advantageous section flag is cleared in the advantageous section information initialization process (step S205) of the main process (FIG. 16). As a result, the advantageous section ends and is set to the normal section. However, even if the above setting is changed, the information that various BBs have been won (BB carry-over flag) is not cleared, and the BB carry-over state is maintained. The game is started, and soon after winning the advantageous section transition lottery at the timing of t2, the game shifts to the advantageous section. In this case, since the BB carry-over flag is set, in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46), the normal mode is shifted and the ceiling game number setting process (steps S2102-step S2404) is performed. .. At the timing of t3, for example, if the game shifts to the AT mode triggered by the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games, the continuation flag is set in the start game of the AT mode (step S1707). Although there is a slight difference between the timing at which the AT mode winning flag is set and the timing at which the transition to the AT mode occurs, they are collectively described as t3 in the figure. Further, at the time of transition to the AT mode, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started as the section display, and the AT mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, which is an advantageous effect of the effect during the AT mode. Is started.

After that, the winning of the BB carried over in the game, which is the result of the timing of t4 being off, is allowed. In this case, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), the AT mode flag is set and the BB prize is won in the situation where the transition permission condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous section is not terminated (step S2211: NO). ). Further, when the BB prize is established, the continuation determination (steps S1901 to S1908) at the time of the BB prize is executed in the AT continuation setting process (FIG. 44). For example, when the stock counter is 1 (step S1902: NO) or when the continuous lottery is won even if the stock counter is 0 (step S1906: YES), the continuation flag is maintained and the continuation command is the main controller. It is output from 101 to the display control device 81. As a result, in the bonus AT state starting from the timing of t4, the effect using the effect table for continuation is performed.

When the BB state ends at the timing of t5, in the continuation determination (steps S1914 to S1918) at the end of the BB, a process for continuing the AT mode is performed, and the continuation flag is maintained (step S1916: YES). ). As a result, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), the continuation flag is set and the BB ends in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous section is not ended (step S2213: YES).

Shortly after the BB state ends at the timing of t5, one of the BBs will be won at the timing of t6. After that, in the game which is the result of the timing of t7 being off, the winning of the BB won at t6 is allowed. In this case as well, the advantageous section does not end because the BB prize is won in the situation where the AT mode flag is set. However, in the AT continuation setting process at the timing of t7, it is shown that the continuation lottery is not won and the continuation condition is not satisfied. In this case, the continuation flag is cleared (step S1907) and the discontinuation command is issued. It is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. As a result, in the bonus AT state starting from the timing of t7, the effect using the effect table for discontinuation is performed.

If the BB state ends at the timing of t8 and the stock lottery is not won by the timing of t8, the AT mode flag is cleared in the continuation determination at the end of BB of the t8 (step S1917). ). Then, in the second section display process (FIG. 48), since the BB ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set and the continuation condition is not satisfied, the process for the end of the advantageous section is performed (step S2213). : NO). In the BB state that ends at the timing of t8, the transition to the advantageous section has not occurred, so the transitioned flag is not set. Further, at the end of the advantageous section, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends. On the other hand, since the AT end command is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 at the timing of t8, the AT mode end effect is performed, the CZ mode start effect is performed, and the auxiliary display is performed. A series of advantageous effects including the AT mode start effect on the unit 65 and the speaker 64 to the effect during the CZ mode are continued.

Shortly after the BB state and the advantageous section are completed at t8, the advantageous section is re-shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section transition lottery process (t9). In this case, the transition to the advantageous section before the carry-over of the first BB and the second BB is performed, and in the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46), the CZ mode transition process (step S2107 and step S2108) is performed. That is, the advantageous section that shifts at t9 is set to the CZ mode. After that, one of the BBs is won at the timing of t10, and the BB is carried over. Further, when the transition to the CZ mode occurs at the timing of t9, the display of the section indicator is also restarted. The advantageous effects of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are continued including the timings of t8 to t9.

In the CZ mode, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set higher than in the normal mode. Therefore, for example, if the AT mode transition lottery is won at the timing of t11 in the CZ mode, the transition to the bonus AT state is allowed again (t12). The figure shows a case where it is determined that the continuation is not continued in the continuation determination (steps S1901 to S1908) at the time of winning the BB, and the continuation flag set at the timing of t11 is cleared at the timing of t12. ..

Since the continuation flag is not set at the timing of t13 when the BB state ends, when the BB state ends at the t13, the advantageous section also ends. Then, at the timing of t14, when the first BB or the second BB is won, that is, when the rip overlapping first BB or the rip overlapping second BB is won, the game shifts to an advantageous section. In this case, the CZ mode is set because it is a transition to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB winning has not been carried over. The BB carry-over flag is set at the end of the BB winning game when the BB winning is not established. Therefore, from the next game of t14, which has shifted to the advantageous section, the BB is carried over (t15). Further, similarly to the timings of t8 to t9, the display of the section indicator ends at the timing of t13, and the display of the section indicator resumes at the timing of t14. On the other hand, a series of advantageous effects of the AT mode and the CZ mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are continued, including the timings of t13 to t14.

When the CZ mode shifted at t14 ends at the timing of t16 without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section is maintained, but the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when the mode shifts to the normal mode (at the end of the CZ mode), the ceiling game number setting process is performed (step S1806). In the normal mode, the game shifts to the AT mode depending on whether the set number of ceiling games is exhausted or the AT mode transition lottery is won. Further, since the mode shifts to the normal mode at the timing of t16, the display of the section display ends, and the advantageous effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 also ends.

When the setting is changed at the timing of t17, the advantageous section flag is cleared as described above, so that the game is started from the normal section after the setting change. In this case as well, since the BB winning information (BB carry-over flag) is not cleared by changing the setting, the game is started in the carry-over state. Then, when shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t18, the advantageous section is set as the normal mode instead of the CZ mode.

Next, a state in which the BB prize is established in a situation where the BB prize permission condition is not satisfied (a situation in which the AT mode is not established) will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

When the BB carry-over state shifts to the advantageous section at the timing of t21, the normal mode is set and the number of ceiling games is set. As described above, although the shift to the AT mode occurs due to the digestion of the number of ceiling games (t24), here shows the case where the BB prize is established at the timing of t22, which is before the digestion of the number of ceiling games. .. In this case, in the section display second process, a process for ending the advantageous section is performed as a BB prize in a situation where the winning permission condition is not satisfied (step S2211: YES).

Although the advantageous section transition lottery is performed even in the BB state, shortly after the transition to the BB state, the advantageous section transition lottery is won at the timing of t23, and the transition to the advantageous section occurs. In the advantageous section transition game process (FIG. 46) in this case, the shifted flag is set and the number of ceiling games is set as the advantageous section transition in the BB state (step S2105: YES).

Here, in the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed (step S1201: YES). Further, in the BB state, the number of ceiling games is not counted (step S1216). Therefore, no matter how long the BB state continues, the transition to the AT mode does not occur in the BB state, and each game in the BB state does not contribute to the ease of transition to the AT mode. Moreover, in the BB state, which is not in the AT mode, the push order notification does not occur as described above, so that the number of medals held is reduced. That is, if the player shifts to the BB state without shifting to the AT mode, a disadvantageous event occurs for the player. By the way, the BB state continues until 140 medals, which is the maximum number of medals to be paid out, are paid out.

When the BB state ends at the timing of t25, although the continuation flag is not set, the advantageous section does not end due to the shifted flag set in step S2106 as described above. Then, shortly after the BB state ends, the BB is won at the timing of t26, and the BB carry-over state is set again.

Similarly, if the BB prize is established at the timing of t27, which is before the timing of t31, which is the number of ceiling games set at t23, and before the transition to the AT mode occurs, the advantageous section ends. .. Then, at the timing of t28 in the BB state, the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the shifted flag is set, and the number of ceiling games is set. Then, when the BB state ends at the timing of t29, the BB carry-over state is re-shifted at the timing of t30 shortly thereafter.

The AT mode winning flag is set by digesting the game in the normal mode until the timing of t32, which is the number of ceiling games set in t28. However, since the number of ceiling games is not counted during the BB state from t28 to t29, the games that contribute to the subtraction of the number of ceiling games are the games from t29 to t32. Further, as described above, when the AT mode winning flag is set, the precursor mode is set. However, if the BB prize is established at t33 before the AT mode winning notification (before the transition to the AT mode), the advantageous section ends. Without doing so, the AT mode winning flag is not cleared. However, since the BB state won at t33 is not the BB in the AT mode, it is not the bonus AT state, the medal increase cannot be expected, and the precursor mode does not progress during the BB state. In this case, the precursor mode is restarted from the timing of t34 when the BB state won at the t33 ends, and the AT mode winning notification is performed at the timing of t35 when the number of games in the precursor mode becomes 0.

Next, a mechanism for increasing medals in the bonus AT state will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

When the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB carry-over state at the timing of t41, the normal mode is set as described above. As described above, when the BB prize is established in the normal mode at the timing of t42, the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section is re-shifted at the timing of t43 in the BB state.

As already explained, the BB state is set to the BB first state before JAC winning, the BB second state after JAC winning and carrying over the JAC winning, and the BB third state after JAC winning. .. When the BB state is started at t42, it first becomes the BB first state. In this BB first state, in addition to the push order bell, JAC can be won. Then, since the symbol number priority control is performed in the situation where the JAC carry-over flag is not set (see FIG. 29), even if the push order at the time of winning the push order bell matches the first small winning combination, the first The 4th to 27th small winning combination prizes, which are paid out one piece other than the 1 small winning combination, are given priority. In other words, the first small winning combination prize, in which 15 cards are paid out when the push order bell is won, is not established.

If the JAC is won at the timing of t44 and the JAC winning game cannot be established in the JAC winning game, the JAC carry-over state is set to the BB second state. In this case, since the JAC carry-over flag is set, the number of sheets priority control is performed (see FIG. 29), and if the push order at the time of winning the push order bell matches the first small winning combination, the first A small role prize will be established, and it will be possible to receive 15 medals. However, since this situation is the normal mode and the push order notification is not performed, it is rare that the push order at the time of winning the push order bell matches the first small winning combination (probability of 1/6). Many medals cannot be expected to increase.

If the bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, JAC) and the small role or re-game are won in duplicate, the small role or re-game will be given priority and the result will be lost in the 2nd state of BB. Since it is set so as not to be (see FIG. 27), it is difficult to establish a JAC prize in the BB second state, and basically, once the BB second state is reached, the BB state at the timing of t45 The second state of BB is maintained until the end of. In addition, the case where the JAC winning occurs in the BB second state is the case where the winning small winning combination is missed and the JAC symbol can be stopped at the effective line.

Shortly after the BB state ends at t45, the BB carry-over state shifts again at the timing of t46. When the mode shifts to the AT mode at the timing of t47 and the BB prize is established at the timing of t48, the bonus AT state is started as the BB state in the AT mode. This bonus AT state starts from the BB first state as described above. When the JAC is won at the timing of t49, the winning avoidance notification (FIG. 55 (b)) is generated in the JAC avoidance notification process (step S2614) as described above. Here, the case where the JAC prize is established without following the prize avoidance notification is shown. In this case, the BB third state is set from the timing of t48.

In the third state of BB, the probability of winning the unquestioned bell is improved, so that the first small winning combination is easily established. Since only the first small winning combination is associated with the unquestioned bell, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the push order or priority control at the time of winning. Then, since the appearance rate of the first small winning combination at the time of winning the unquestioned bell in the BB third state is higher than the appearance rate of the first small winning combination at the time of winning the push order bell in the BB first state and the BB second state, it is pushed. It can be said that the BB third state is more advantageous than the BB first state and the BB second state in the situation where the forward notification does not occur.

The case where the BB state ends at the timing of t50, the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the advantageous section also ends is shown here. After that, the re-transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t51, and since it is the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB winning is not carried over, the CZ mode is set. If the BB is won at the timing of t52 and the BB prize is established at the timing of t53, which is before the transition to the AT mode occurs, the BB state in which the push order notification does not occur is obtained as in the case of t43. ..

However, since the BB prize at the timing of t53 is the BB prize in the CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end and the CZ mode is maintained. Further, during the BB state, the counting of the number of games in the CZ mode is stopped. In the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed.

Since the push order notification does not occur, if the JAC prize cannot be established when the JAC is won at the timing of t54, the BB second state is set. That is, t53 to t54 are the BB first states, and t54 to t55, when the BB state ends, are the BB second states. Then, if the pushing order matches the first small winning combination in the BB second state, the first small winning combination can be established, but since the pushing order notification does not occur in the first place, the appearance rate of the first small winning combination Is lower than that of the BB third state.

As described above, even in the BB state shifted to the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed during the BB state, but the number of games in the CZ mode is not counted (see FIG. 43). Even at the timing of t55 when the BB state ends, the CZ mode can be continued again.

If the BB is won at the timing of t56 and the transition to the AT mode occurs at the timing of t57, the bonus AT state is started when the BB prize is established at t58. When the JAC is won at the timing of t59, the winning avoidance notification (FIG. 55 (b)) is generated by the JAC avoidance notification processing. Here, the case where the JAC winning is avoided according to the winning avoidance notification is shown, and in this case, the BB second state is set from the timing of t59.

In the BB second state during the bonus AT state, it is possible to establish the first small winning combination by following the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell. In this case, the appearance rate of the first small winning combination is 6 times that of the BB second state in which the push order notification does not occur, and many medals can be expected to be won until the timing of t60 when the BB state ends.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the section display second process, if the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established during the AT mode, the advantage section is not terminated and the bonus AT state is entered, while the first BB prize or the second BB is set during the normal mode. By configuring the advantageous section to end when a prize is established, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of expecting a large number of medals to increase by setting each BB state as a bonus AT state in AT mode, and in normal mode. Prevents you from enjoying the benefits of the bonus AT state, and it is possible to make a big difference in the profit in the BB state depending on the timing of the BB winning. Therefore, it is possible to raise interest in the timing of BB winning, and even if the BB is won in the normal mode, it is possible to perform a game such as waiting so as not to win the BB until the transition to the AT mode.

After winning a BB prize in the normal mode and shifting to the normal section, when re-shifting to the advantageous section, the normal mode is set. That is, since the advantageous section transition lottery process and the first section display process for the advantageous section transition are performed even during the BB state, the advantageous section transition during the BB state is performed after the advantageous section is completed based on the BB prize. Transition to advantageous section in the lottery process If the winner is elected, the transition to the advantageous section will occur. In this case, even if the transition is to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, the normal mode is set. In this way, even if the BB prize is given in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent an event in which the advantageous section that re-shifts after that becomes advantageous occurs, and to encourage the BB prize not to be given in the normal mode.

Moreover, at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section information is initialized to erase the number of ceiling games (initialization process of the ceiling counter), and when shifting to the normal mode, the number of ceiling games When the BB prize is won in the normal mode, the number of ceiling games is reset and the number of games up to that point is wasted. From this as well, it is possible to encourage the BB to not win the prize during the normal mode.

In the bonus AT state, which shifts when a BB prize is won in the AT mode, the JAC carry-over flag is set by avoiding the JAC prize that can be won in the BB state, and the JAC carry-over flag is set. Based on the winning of the forward bell, the structure is such that the first small winning combination, which is the payout of 15 cards, can be established. In other words, in the BB state, it is not enough to generate the push order notification when the push order bell is won, and it is also necessary that the JAC carry-over flag is set in order to establish the first small winning combination prize that pays out 15 cards. Become. By doing this, even if the BB prize is won in a situation other than AT mode and the operation order happens to correspond to the first small winning combination when the push order bell is won, the JAC carry-over flag must be set. If so, the first small role prize will not be established. Even if the JAC carry-over flag is set, the first small winning combination will not be established unless the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is matched. Therefore, the first small winning combination is in the BB state in the normal mode. It is possible to raise the hurdle to establish a small winning combination, prevent BB winning in normal mode, and increase the difference in advantage from the BB state (bonus AT state) in AT mode. Become.

In the AT lottery process, the AT mode transition lottery can be executed in the BB carry-over state in which the BB carry-over flag is set, and further, in the winning result handling process, the process of shifting to the AT mode in the BB carry-over state can be executed. Therefore, when the BB is won in the normal section, the normal mode, or the like, it is possible to preferably realize the playability such that the BB winning is maintained without being established until the transition to the AT mode occurs.

In the normal game state, the first BB is won by the first BB with overlapping rips, and the second BB is won by the second BB with overlapping rips. These winning probabilities are about 1/20.1 and about 6.7, respectively. It is one-fifth, and the total is about one-fifth. Such a probability is higher than the probability of winning any of the replays of normal lip A to normal lip C, chance eye A to chance eye C, and cherry A to cherry C (about 1 / 7.30). After the end of the BB state, it can be said that one of the BBs is won with a relatively high probability. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the continuous villa property in the bonus AT state.

Cherry A to Cherry C, which trigger the AT mode transition lottery, have significantly different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will be interested in which cherry is the trigger for the AT mode transition lottery. The winning modes of Cherry A to Cherry C are different from each other, and it is necessary to aim at the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L and stop the operation in order to determine which cherry winning mode. The operation mode in which the "BAR" symbol is aimed at the left reel 32L is an operation mode in which the "white 7" symbol corresponding to the first BB prize or the second BB prize cannot be stopped at the effective line. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of an event in which a player who is looking forward to the transition to the AT mode mistakenly establishes the first BB prize or the second BB prize.

If the AT mode winning flag is set, the advantageous section is not terminated even if the BB prize is in the normal mode. By doing this, even though you have won the AT mode, you will not cause the inconvenience that the advantageous section ends and the AT mode winning also disappears because you accidentally won the BB prize. Can be. However, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, if the BB prize is established, the benefit cannot be enjoyed as a bonus AT state because the AT mode flag has not been set yet. By doing so, the fairness between the player who can detect the AT mode winning at an early stage and the player who cannot detect it is ensured, and the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode such as whether or not the AT mode is won is ensured. It is possible to entertain the production inside to the end.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the BB state and the transition to the normal section is performed. However, when the transition to the advantageous section is performed again, the CZ mode is set on the condition that the BB carry-over flag is not set. It is configured to be. By doing so, at the end of the bonus AT state, the BB carry-over flag is not set when the advantageous section is temporarily terminated and immediately after that, the BB carry-over flag is set to the CZ mode. Therefore, it is possible to set the CZ mode after the bonus AT state.

Then, when the BB carry-over flag is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the normal mode is set. Therefore, for example, when the game hall is closed during the AT mode, the advantageous section is subsequently changed by changing the setting. If the initialization process of the information is executed, it is possible to delete the information in the AT mode so that the information in the AT mode is not carried over to the next day, and at that time, in the normal section. Even if it is set, it is possible to avoid being set to the CZ mode in the morning as long as the BB carry-over flag is maintained.

On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned on while operating the reset switch 72, the RAM clear process is executed in the main process, so that not only the advantageous section information but also the BB carry-over flag, the BB state flag, etc. Various information stored in the RAM 106 is initialized. In this case, after the power-in, the normal section is set and the BB carry-over flag is not set. Therefore, if the advantageous section shift occurs after that, the CZ mode is likely to be set. By doing so, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to make settings that make it difficult to set to CZ mode or make it easy to set to CZ mode in the morning, etc., and the specifications of the game machine can be adjusted. It is possible to make good use of the game settings.

Further, even if it is necessary to temporarily shut off the power of the game machine (make it a power cut state), for example, when a problem occurs in the game machine during the AT mode during the business of the game hall, the setting is made. If no change is made (unless the setting key insertion hole 73 is turned on), the advantageous section information initialization process is not executed in the main process, so the information in AT mode is maintained and the BB carry-over flag. Is also maintained. In this case, it is possible to restart the game while inheriting the information in the AT mode before the power is cut off.

Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the BB state in the situation where the continuation flag is not set. By doing so, at the end of the AT mode, the advantageous section is terminated in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, and when the transition to the advantageous section is performed again, the advantageous section transition without the BB carry-over flag is performed. , Will be set to CZ mode. As a result, the pullback mode after the end of the AT mode can be realized while temporarily ending the advantageous section, and a state substantially more advantageous than the normal mode (AT mode and CZ mode) can be continued across the advantageous section. It is possible to realize playability such as letting. Then, by configuring the configuration so that a substantially advantageous state can be continued across such advantageous sections, even in an advantageous section in which forced termination is performed under forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum number of increased numbers. It will be allowed for the above-mentioned advantageous state to exceed these upper limit games and the upper limit increase number.

When the advantageous section ends at the end of the BB state, the CZ mode start effect is performed after the AT mode end effect. That is, the CZ mode start effect is executed in the BB end game before the transition to the CZ mode. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the game without making the player aware that the advantageous state continues across the advantageous sections.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section ends at the end of the BB state, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends, and when the CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, at the time of transition. The display is started. That is, as described above, the advantageous effect on the advantageous state of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 continues across the advantageous sections, while the display by the section display does not continue across the advantageous sections, which is advantageous. At the end of the section, the display is temporarily terminated. By doing so, for example, the manager of the game hall can confirm that the advantageous section has ended, and the number of games in a substantially advantageous state and the number of increase / decrease are the upper limit of the advantageous section. It is possible to help in discovering fraudulent activities that can be exceeded without being bound by the number of games or the maximum number of games that can be increased.

If the continuation flag is set, the advantageous section is not ended at the end of the BB state, so after the end of the BB, by winning the BB again, it is possible to re-shift to the bonus AT state. It is possible to realize an interesting playability such as making the first BB state and the second BB state as a bonus state in which the small winning combination probability (JAC probability) can change as a bonus AT state.

In a configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, if the advantageous section is terminated at the time of BB winning, the advantageous section is reopened at the end of the winning BB state. I tried not to end it. More specifically, when the advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section during the BB state, the advantageous section ends at the time of winning. In this case, the shifted flag is set when the advantageous section shifts, and at the end of the BB state. Even if the continuation flag is not set, the advantageous section is not terminated when the migrated flag is set. As a result, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing and simplify the processing configuration without unnecessarily ending the advantageous section.

When shifting to an advantageous section in a situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, in the configuration set to CZ mode, the first re-game as a transition trigger for the advantageous section such as the lip duplication 1st BB and the lip duplication 2nd BB Each BB will be elected in the wake of the overlapping result, and the normal section will be shifted to the advantageous section in the winning games of the first BB and the second BB. By doing so, even if it is a normal section and the BB carry-over flag is not set, even if it shifts to an advantageous section triggered by the overlapping result of the first BB and the second BB, the first BB or Even in the case of shifting to the advantageous section triggered by the trigger result (usually Lip A, etc.) of another advantageous section transition that does not overlap with the second BB, the CZ mode is set in each case. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being set to the CZ mode even though the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the AT mode, and the CZ mode start effect is executed in advance at the end of the AT mode. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being set to the CZ mode.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the ease with which the BB winning permission condition is satisfied in the AT mode differs depending on the type of the winning BB. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a bonus AT start process in this modification. As described above, the bonus AT start process is a process (step S1006) that is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 30) in a situation where the AT mode is won.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the state is BB. If it is in the BB state, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the BB state, the process proceeds to step S2802 to determine whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the BB state and is in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S2803 to determine whether or not the transition permission flag is set.

If the transition permission flag is not set, it is determined in step S2804 whether or not any of the BB winning flags is set. If the BB has been won, the process proceeds to step S2805 to execute a process of grasping the type of the winning BB. When none of the BB winning flags are set in step S2804, and after executing the process of step S2805, the current number of stocks is grasped by checking the stock counter in step S2806. Then, in step S2807, the process of acquiring the transfer permission lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in step S2808, the transfer permission lottery process is executed. In the transition permission lottery process, a transition permission lottery is performed to determine whether or not the BB winning permission conditions are satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 62, the transition permission lottery table is based on the presence or absence of BB winning, the type of BB winning if BB is won, the number of stocks, and the lottery result of the game. The winning probability is different. Specifically, it is easier to win the transition permission lottery when the BB is won than when the BB is not won, and when the BB is won, it is the first than when the first BB is won. If you win 2BB, it will be easier to win the transfer permission lottery, and if you have less stock (if you do not have it), it will be easier to win the transition permission lottery than if you have more stock (if you have it). Is set to. In other words, it is easiest to win the transition permission lottery when the second BB is won and the stock is low, and it is most difficult to win the transition permission lottery when neither BB is won and there is stock. It has become.

In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the transition permission lottery is uniform regardless of the lottery result of the game, but the winning probability may differ depending on the lottery result. Further, in the present embodiment, the transition permission lottery is performed even if the result is out of order. However, the transfer permission lottery may not be performed in the case of the out-of-order result. The transfer permission lottery may not be performed based on the winning combination or the result of the replay.

After executing the transfer permission lottery process in step S2808, it is determined in step S2809 whether or not the transfer permission lottery has been won. If it is won, the process of setting the migration permission flag is executed in step S2810.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the migration permission flag is set, if it is determined in step S2809 that the migration permission lottery is not won, or after executing the process of setting the migration permission flag in step S2810. Goes to step S2811. In step S2811, it is determined whether or not any of the BB winning flags is set. If it is not set, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. If any of the BBs has been won, in step S2812, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is an outlier result. The process of step S2812 is the same as the process of step S1504, and is a process of determining whether or not the game is capable of establishing a BB prize.

If the result is not out of order, the bonus AT start process is terminated as it is. If the result is an error, it is determined in step S2813 whether or not the above migration permission flag is set. If it is set, the process of setting the winning permission command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2814, and then the process for starting the bonus AT is terminated. If the transition permission flag is not set, the process of setting the winning avoidance command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2815, and then the bonus AT start process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, even when the mode is changed to the AT mode, the winning permission command in the BB carry-over state is not output unless the transfer permission lottery is won. In addition, the transition permission lottery will be conducted before the BB is won.

Next, the process for AT consecutive villas in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not it is in any of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the transition permission flag is set. If the transition permission flag is not set, the stock lottery process is executed in steps S2903 to S2918. The processing of steps S2903 to S2918 is the same as the processing of steps S1403 to S1418.

However, in this modification, when the transition permission flag is set in step S2902, it is determined in step S2919 whether or not any of the BB winning flags is set, and if it is not set, it is determined. , Step S2907. As described above, step S2907 is a process of acquiring the stock lottery table after the AT mode winning notification and before the transition to the AT mode, and for performing the stock lottery at the table having a relatively high probability of winning the stock lottery. This is a process (Fig. 37).

As described above, in this modification, the transition permission flag can be set by winning the transition permission lottery that is carried out before the BB winning. Then, by making it relatively easy to win the stock lottery in the situation where the transition permission flag is set before the BB winning, the transition permission winning before the BB winning reduces the chances of receiving the stock lottery. Can be the price for.

Further, as described above, in this modified example, in the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won, the situation where the second BB is won is easier to win the transition permission lottery. It has become. Therefore, in the situation where the second BB is won, the bonus AT state is started relatively quickly, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of medals held due to the situation of waiting for the BB prize between the bonus AT states. .. However, even in the situation of waiting for the start of the bonus AT state, the stock lottery is performed as described above. Therefore, when comparing the situation of winning the first BB and the situation of winning the second BB, the stock From the viewpoint of receiving a lot of lottery, the situation where the first BB is won is preferable for the player. By doing so, for example, when the number of stocks is small or in the early stage of the transition to AT mode, it is expected that the first BB will be won in order to increase the number of stocks, and the number of stocks is sufficient. In many situations, or in situations close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, it is possible to expect to win the second BB in order to suppress the decrease in medals held during the bonus AT state. By doing so, it is possible to make the expected BB different according to the situation, to diversify the game, and to provide the game according to the diverse needs of the player.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the bonus AT processing in this modification.

In this modification, the content of the processing in the BB prize waiting state is different from that of the bonus AT processing in the first embodiment. That is, steps S3001 to S3003 are the same as those in steps S2601 to S2603, and perform the effect setting process in the AT mode and not in the BB state (step S3003). After that, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the winning permission command is received, and if so, the BB winning permission notification process is executed in step S3005. In this case, the winning permission notification shown in FIG. 55A is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

If the winning permission command has not been received, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the winning avoidance command has been received. When the winning avoidance command is received, the BB winning avoidance notification process is executed in step S3007. The BB avoidance notification process is a process for notifying the BB winning avoidance, and more specifically, a process for causing the winning avoidance notification to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As mentioned above, when the "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol stop on the effective line from the left, the first BB prize is established, and from the left, the "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, When the "BAR" symbol stops, the first BB prize is established, but by performing the stop operation of the stop switch 42 at the timing when the "white 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the effective line (middle) of the left reel 32L, the first BB or It is possible to avoid winning the second BB. More specifically, by avoiding the timing when the 19th "white shell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage and the timing when the 3rd "white 7" symbol reaches the middle stage, the first BB and the first BB and the first are operated. It is possible to avoid winning 2BB.

As the notification for avoiding the BB winning, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the winning avoidance notification shown in FIG. 55 (b) is performed. As described above, when the lottery result of each game is a specific winning combination, or when the notification for avoiding the JAC winning is also notified in FIG. 55 (b). The prize avoidance notification for avoiding the BB prize has the same contents as the prize avoidance notification for avoiding the JAC prize and the specific role notification, and the production data is shared. This is to avoid the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 for avoiding the first BB prize and the second BB prize, the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 for determining the type of the specific combination, and the JAC prize. This is because the operation timings of the stop switches 42 to 44 overlap. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stop operations 42 to 44 are stopped at the operation timing for determining the type of the specific combination, it is possible to avoid not only the JAC prize but also the first BB prize and the second BB prize. ..

In this way, by performing the operation in an operation mode in which the type of the specific combination can be discriminated, it is possible to avoid not only the JAC but also the first BB and the second BB prizes. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is not accustomed to the game from accidentally establishing the first BB prize or the second BB prize and suffering a disadvantage.

As described above, in this modified example, in the situation where the first BB and the second BB are won, the transition to the bonus AT state is not allowed immediately, but the transition permission lottery is won to win the bonus AT state. Since the configuration allows the transition to, while it is possible to win more medals due to the consecutive villas in the bonus AT state, by adjusting the winning probability of the transition permission lottery well, the increase speed of medals and It is possible to adjust the reduction speed of medals well while waiting for the transition permission between the bonus AT states.

In this case, although the probability of winning each BB winning result is common between the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won, the above-mentioned transition permission lottery is won. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to make the increase / decrease speed of medals at the time of winning each BB different without individually setting the lottery table for the carry-over state of each BB.

It should be noted that the probability of winning each BB winning result does not have to be exactly the same between the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won, and it is difficult for the player to identify. It may be different to any extent. In this case, the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won are more than the probability difference that results in a deviation between the situation where the first BB is won and the situation where the second BB is won. It is advisable to make the probability difference of the winning probability of the transition permission lottery from the situation larger.

Here, since the configuration is such that the normal mode shifts to the AT mode through the AT mode transition lottery, and after the shift to the AT mode, the transition to the bonus AT state may occur through the transition permission lottery, the transition to the bonus AT state is performed. In order to generate it, it is necessary to win in a plurality of lottery such as AT mode transition lottery and transition permission lottery. By doing this, it becomes more difficult to shift to the bonus AT state, and the state where even the AT mode transition lottery has not been won (normal mode) or the AT mode transition lottery has been won but the transition is permitted. It is possible to fully enjoy the transition to the bonus AT state through multiple states, such as the state where the lottery has not been won (AT mode and before the bonus AT state), including each state. Become.

In the configuration of shifting to the bonus AT state through such a plurality of stages, in the above modified example, the situation in which the second BB is carried over is easier to win the transition permission lottery than the situation in which the first BB is carried over. For example, after shifting to AT mode in the situation where the second BB is carried over, the bonus AT state is relatively earlier than when shifting to AT mode in the situation where the first BB is carried over. The transition to will occur. Moreover, even between the bonus AT state and the bonus AT state, the case where the second BB is won will shift to the bonus AT state earlier than the case where the first BB is won, and the continuous in the bonus AT state. The villa speed is better when the 2nd BB is won. By doing so, it becomes possible to adjust the number of games and the number of medals to be reduced after the transition to AT mode or between the bonus AT states depending on the winning BB, and the interest of the game can be improved through the diversification of the game. ..

Since the stock lottery is not held after winning one of the BBs and winning the transition permission lottery, the easier it is to win the transition permission lottery, the less the stock lottery is held, and the stock lottery is won. It becomes difficult. That is, the harder it is to win the transition permission lottery, the easier it is to win the stock lottery. From this, it is possible to follow the point that the number of medals held can be reduced by increasing the number of games after the transition to the AT mode or between the bonus AT states, according to the number of consecutive villas (stock number). In addition, for example, in a situation where the number of stocks is small, it is difficult to win the transition permission lottery, and it is expected that the first BB, which is likely to receive many stock lottery, will be won (the first BB has been won), and the stock. In a situation with a large number of medals, the type of BB that is expected to be won differs depending on the number of stocks, such as expecting to win the second BB (winning the second BB) in order to suppress the decrease in medals held. It can be done and the fun of the game is improved.

Then, in the lottery process of each game, the winning probability of the first BB and the winning probability of the second BB are different, and by adjusting the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB, the number of medals held between the bonus AT states can be increased. It is possible to adjust and adjust the number of consecutive villas. By the way, as described above, in this embodiment, since the second BB is easier to win than the first BB, it is easy to win the transition permission lottery and it is difficult to receive the stock lottery. It is a setting that the number of medals held during the bonus AT state is small, and the expected increase number per game in AT mode is relatively large, including the game between the bonus AT state and the bonus AT state. Can be. On the other hand, if the first BB is configured to be easier to win than the second BB, it becomes a game playability in which it is difficult to win the transition permission lottery and the stock lottery is easily received, and the situation during the carry-over of the first BB is likely to occur. When the transition to occurs, the AT mode can be continued for a relatively long time to entertain.

Since the probability of winning the transition permission lottery is higher after the BB is won than before the BB is won, it is possible to shift to the bonus AT state relatively quickly after the BB is won. In addition, since the winning probability of the stock lottery is higher before the BB winning than after the BB winning, it is expected that the stock lottery will be won before the BB winning, and the bonus AT state will be reached after the BB winning. The game content can be greatly different before and after the BB winning, such as expecting to win the transition permission lottery in order to suppress the decrease in medals, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the situation where the transition permission lottery has not been won, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell occurs in the push order notification process (FIG. 41) on condition that the push order bell is not in the BB state. That is, if the shift to the BB state is performed when the shift permission lottery has not been won, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell does not occur even in the AT mode. As a result, it becomes impossible to enjoy the benefits of the bonus AT state, and more specifically, a disadvantage for the player such as a decrease in the number of medals held occurs. By doing so, it is possible to delay the BB winning until the transition permission lottery is won after the transition to the AT mode or between the bonus AT state and the bonus AT state.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the first BB or the second BB may be allowed to win before the AT mode winning notification is performed. First, with reference to FIG. 65, the winning mode and the changes in the lottery table set in this modification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65A, in this modified example, in addition to the one of the first embodiment, the twelfth re-game and the thirteenth re-game are set as the winning mode. In the twelfth replay, a prize is established when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. In the twelfth re-game, the corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L is different from the corresponding symbol of the first BB, and the corresponding symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is common to the corresponding symbol of the first BB. Therefore, the twelfth replay can also be referred to as a winning mode that is out of the first BB tempai.

In the thirteenth replay, a prize is established when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. In the thirteenth replay, the corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L is different from the corresponding symbol of the second BB, and the corresponding symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R is common to the corresponding symbol of the second BB. Therefore, the thirteenth replay can also be referred to as a winning mode that is out of the second BB tempai.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the normal lip A and the normal lip B with index values IV = 1 and 2 are won in this modified example, each replay or the like of the first embodiment is performed. In addition, the 12th re-game and the 13th re-game will also be won. More specifically, if the normal lip A is won, the 12th re-game is also won in addition to the first re-game and the second re-game, and if the normal lip B is won, the first re-game and the second re-game are won. In addition to the re-game and the third re-game, the thirteenth re-game will also be won. Then, the 12th re-game and the 13th re-game are set so that a prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are stopped from the right reel 32R at the time of winning the normal lip A and the normal lip B. ing.

FIG. 66 shows a part of the flowchart of the AT lottery process in this modified example.

In this modification, when the advantageous section flag is set in step S1206, after the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S1207, or when the ceiling counter is 0 in step S1217, The process proceeds to step S3101. In step S3101, the AT mode winning flag is set as in step S1208. In the following step S3102, the continuation rate lottery process is executed as in step S1209, and in step S3102, the process of setting the continuation rate flag is executed as in step S1210.

In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set by determining whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If it is not in the CZ mode, in steps S3105 to S3108, the process for setting the precursor mode is performed in the same manner as in steps S1211 to S1214, and then the AT lottery process ends.

When in the CZ mode, the process proceeds to step S3109 to execute the direct transition lottery process. The direct transition lottery process is a process of executing the direct transition lottery to enable the bonus AT state to be started directly without going through the precursor mode or the AT mode winning notification effect when the AT mode winning flag is set. is there. In the direct transfer lottery process, the direct transfer lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the direct transfer lottery is performed according to the type of the winning BB. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the direct transition lottery table is set so that it is easier to win the direct transition lottery when the first BB is won than when the second BB is won. ing. At the time when the direct transition lottery process is performed, if none of the BBs have been won, the direct transition lottery is set to be non-winning.

After executing the direct transition lottery process in step S3109, it is determined in step S3110 whether or not the direct transition lottery has been won. In the case of non-winning, the process proceeds to step S3105, the above-mentioned processing for setting the precursor mode is performed, and then the processing for AT lottery ends. If the direct transition lottery has been won, the direct transition notification flag is set in step S3111, and then the AT lottery process ends. The direct shift notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the direct shift lottery has been won.

The bonus AT start processing in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

In this modification, the processing when the AT mode flag is not set is different. That is, when it is determined in step S3201 that the state is not in the BB state and the BB winning flag is set in step S3202, and the AT mode flag is set in step S3203, the above step S1504 -Similar to the process of step S1506, in steps S3204 to S3206, the process of setting the transition permission flag and outputting and setting the winning permission command is executed.

The case where the AT mode flag is not set in step S3203 means that the AT mode winning flag is set, which means that the situation is before the start of the AT mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3207 to determine whether or not the direct transition notification flag is set. The case where the direct transition notification flag is set is the case where the above direct transition lottery is won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3208, and it is determined whether or not the game is capable of winning a BB prize. Such a process is the same as the process of step S1504 described above, and is a process of determining whether or not the lottery result of this game is a result of deviation. If the result is out of alignment, the process proceeds to step S3209, the process of setting the AT start flag is executed, and the process of setting the migration permission flag is executed in step S3210. After that, in step S3211, the process of setting the winning suggestion command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for starting the bonus AT is terminated.

The winning result handling process in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.

After executing the game number management process in step S3301, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not the AT start flag is set. When the AT start flag is set, as described above, the game in which the AT mode winning notification effect is performed and the AT notification flag is set, and then the normal rip A to the normal rip C are won, and the game It is one of the games that can win the BB prize after winning the direct transition lottery. If the AT start flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3303, and it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is a prize of any of normal rip A to normal rip C. In the case of winning any of the normal rip A to the normal rip C, in steps S3304 to S3309, the process for starting the AT mode is executed in the same manner as in steps S1703 to S1708 above, and then the winning result is dealt with. End the process.

The case where it is determined in step S3303 that the prize is not a prize of the normal lip A to the normal lip C is a case where the direct transition lottery has been won. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3310. In step S3310, it is determined whether or not the BB winning is established by determining whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. If the BB prize is established, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S3311 to S3317.

That is, in step S3311, the AT mode winning flag is cleared. In the following step S3312, the direct transition notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S3313, the AT start flag is cleared. In step S3314, the AT mode flag is set, and in step S3315, the continuation flag is set. In step S3316, a process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. Then, in step S3317, the AT continuation setting process is executed, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. The AT continuation setting process in step S3317 is a process for confirming whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied at the start of the bonus AT state, and more specifically, the processes of steps S1901 to S1908 in FIG. 44 are executed. Will be.

If it is determined in step S3310 that the BB winning has not been established, the processing for clearing the AT start flag is performed in step S3318, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. In this case, the AT mode will not be started until the game is able to win the BB prize again.

If it is determined in step S3302 that the AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S3319 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, the AT continuation setting process is executed in step S3320, and then the winning result handling process ends. If the AT mode flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

In this way, if the AT mode winning flag is set during the CZ mode and the direct transition lottery is won, there is no need to go through the precursor mode, the AT mode winning notification effect, or the waiting state from the start of the AT mode to the start of the bonus AT state. , Directly, the bonus AT state is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of medals held before the start of the bonus AT state.

In this modification, as described above, the twelfth re-game in which the winning mode of the first BB tempai is set and the thirteenth re-game in which the winning mode of the second BB tempai is set are provided. Then, by utilizing these 12th re-game and 13th re-game, the expected effect of expecting the direct transition of the bonus AT state is performed. Such an expected effect is set by a winning suggestion notification process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. The winning suggestion notification process is, for example, a process executed in another process for setting the start effect (step S2411) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In the winning suggestion notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69A, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the winning suggestion command has been received. The winning suggestion command is a command output from the main control device 101 in a game in which a BB winning is possible in the situation where the direct transition lottery is won as described above. When the winning suggestion command is received, the notification content of this time is set by grasping the winning BB in step S3402, and the setting process of the winning suggestion notification effect is performed in step S3403. After that, the process for notifying the winning suggestion is terminated. As a winning suggestion notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a1) and 70 (b1), in addition to the winning permission notification of FIG. 55 (a), it is suggested that the right reel 32R should be stopped. A left-pointing arrow is displayed.

For example, when the first BB is won, the notification for the first BB is set in step S3402, and the winning suggestion notification in step S3403 is performed, the stop operation is aimed at the first BB winning from the right reel 32R. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (a2), in the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M, the symbols corresponding to the first BB winning stop at the effective line. In the figure, the "white 7" symbol is displayed as a bonus symbol that can be easily identified. However, when the "white 7" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R as shown in the figure, the effective line of the right reel 32R. When the "cherry" symbol is stopped in the upper row and the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 32M, the "white shell" symbol is stopped in the upper row which is the effective line of the middle reel 32M. ing.

Further, for example, when the second BB is won, the notification for the second BB is set in step S3402, and the winning suggestion notification in step S3403 is performed, the right reel 32R aims at winning the second BB. When the stop operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), in the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M, the symbols corresponding to the second BB winning stop are stopped at the effective line. In the figure, the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol are displayed as bonus symbols that are easy to identify, but when the "red 7" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R as shown in the figure, When the "BAR" symbol is stopped on the upper row, which is the effective line of the right reel 32R, and the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the middle row of the middle reel 32M, "white" is stopped on the upper row, which is the effective line of the middle reel 32M. The "shellfish" pattern has stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3401 that the winning suggestion command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3404 to determine whether or not the BB carry-over state is in effect. In the case of the BB carry-over state, it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the CZ mode is in progress. When in the CZ mode, in step S3406, it is determined whether the lottery result of this game is the winning of either the normal lip A or the normal lip B. If either the normal lip A or the normal lip B is won, the pseudo winning suggestion notification lottery process is executed in step S3407. The pseudo-winning suggestion notification lottery process is a process for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect as the above-mentioned winning suggestion notification effect in a situation where the direct transition lottery has not been won. In the pseudo-winning suggestion notification lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to acquire the pseudo-winning suggestion table from various table storage areas 182a and generate the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect. In the pseudo-winning suggestion table, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the winning probabilities of the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect for the first BB and the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect for the second BB are set, and the one of the first BB Is set to be easier to win than that of the second BB.

After executing the pseudo-winning suggestion notification lottery process in step S3407, it is determined in step S3408 whether or not the lottery has been won, and if so, which BB is supported in step S3409. After grasping whether or not the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect has been won, the setting process of the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect is performed in step S3403, and then the main winning suggestion notification process ends.

In this case, when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the first BB is set, the effect of FIG. 70 (a1) occurs, and when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the second BB is set, FIG. 70 The effect of (b1) occurs. That is, the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect and the winning suggestion notification effect have the same production content on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and the direct transition lottery is won to establish the first BB prize and the second BB prize. It is difficult to determine from the content of the production whether or not the situation is acceptable.

Moreover, when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the 1st BB is performed, the winning result of this time is the normal lip A, and the 12th re-game is won, and the 1st BB winning from the right reel 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the above, as shown in FIG. 70 (a2), in the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M, the symbols corresponding to the first BB prize are stopped at the effective line. In addition, when the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect for the 2nd BB is performed, the winning result of this time is the normal lip B, and the 13th re-game is won, and the 2nd BB winning from the right reel 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), in the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M, the symbols corresponding to the second BB prize are stopped at the effective line. That is, depending on whether the winning suggestion notification effect is performed or the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect is performed, which effect is produced from the stop symbols of the right reel 32R and the middle reel 32M, that is, the first It is difficult to determine whether or not the 1BB prize or the second BB prize is established.

After that, when the left reel 32L is stopped, if the winning suggestion notification effect is performed, the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, and the bonus AT state is started as described above. On the other hand, if the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect is performed, the 12th re-gaming prize and the 13th re-game winning are established, and the bonus AT state is not started.

As described above, according to this modification, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the playability of waiting for the AT mode transition lottery to be won in the situation where the first BB or the second BB is won, the precursor mode In some cases, the winning suggestion notification effect may be performed without going through the AT mode winning notification effect, and when the corresponding BB prize is established when the winning suggestion notification effect is performed, the bonus AT state is started. I made it. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals held until the bonus AT state is started by the amount that does not go through the precursor mode, etc., and it seems that there are cases where it goes through the precursor mode and cases where it does not. If this is the case, the number of medals held can be increased or decreased, and the games can be diversified in situations where the first BB and the second BB are waiting for winning permission.

In addition, as a winning mode, a twelfth re-game that is out of the first BB tempai and a thirteenth re-game that is out of the second BB tempai are provided so that a pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect can occur. The game in the situation of waiting for the winning permission of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB without increasing the probability of the pattern that the bonus AT state is started without going through (the winning probability of the direct transition lottery, the occurrence rate of the winning suggestion notification effect). It is possible to improve the interest of.

In the situation where the 1st BB and the 2nd BB have not been won, even if the direct transition lottery is won, the winning suggestion notification effect cannot occur. Therefore, the game in the situation of waiting for the winning permission of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. It is possible to more preferably enhance the significance of trying to improve the interest of the prize by the winning suggestion notification effect. That is, assuming that the winning suggestion notification effect can occur including the situation where the first BB and the second BB have not been won, whether or not the first BB or the second BB has been won is the meaning of the winning suggestion notification effect. Suggestions are also included, and there is concern about diluting the significance of occurrence. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to concentrate the significance of the winning suggestion notification effect on whether or not the winning permission of the first BB and the second BB is permitted, and it is possible to more preferably increase the degree of attention at the time of occurrence. it can.

As already explained, if the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the situation where the AT mode winning flag is not set in the normal mode, the advantageous section can be terminated. By configuring the structure to generate the winning suggestion notification effect, the effect of making the player feel that the winning permission conditions (AT mode transition winning) of the first BB and the second BB are satisfied can be further enhanced. In other words, in the situation where the winning permission condition is not satisfied, if the winning of the first BB or the second BB is established, the situation shifts to a disadvantageous situation. Therefore, in such a situation, the first BB winning or the first BB winning from the game machine side. By utilizing the player's psychology that the instruction effect for establishing the 2BB prize cannot be performed, the expectation when the prize suggestion notification effect or the pseudo prize suggestion notification effect is performed is more preferably raised. Can be done.

Moreover, since the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the CZ mode in which the winning suggestion notification effect and the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect can occur, the winning suggestion notification effect and the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect have occurred. In some cases, it is easy to think that it is due to the establishment of the winning permission condition (the winning suggestion notification effect).

When the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect occurs and the BB winning is not established, the winning is not established due to the failure of the own stop operation, and the first BB winning or the first winning is made again in the next game or later. There is a concern that these BB prizes will be established by operating with the aim of 2BB prizes, but the prize suggestion notification effect and the pseudo prize suggestion notification effect will establish the BB prize in a situation where the prize permission conditions are not satisfied. However, it is configured to occur during the CZ mode in which the end of the advantageous section is restricted. By doing so, while raising the expectation when the winning suggestion notification effect or the pseudo winning suggestion notification effect is performed, the player's failure when the BB prize is mistakenly established by these effects. It is possible to reduce profits.

However, even in the CZ mode, if the BB prize is won in a situation where the prize permission condition is not satisfied, the bonus AT state is not entered. Therefore, the significance of the prize suggestion notification effect and the pseudo prize suggestion notification effect. Is secured.

Generally, on the premise that the operation is often performed from the left reel 32L in normal times, the 12th re-game and the 13th re-game are made different from the 1st BB and the 2nd BB only by the corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L. The corresponding symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are the same as those of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and when a pseudo winning suggestion notification effect occurs, the right reel 32R is operated from the 1st BB in the normal state. It is possible to raise the expectation when the pseudo-winning suggestion notification effect occurs without having the expectation that the winning or the second BB winning will be established.

<Modification example 3>
In the first embodiment described above, when the first BB and the second BB are won, both are won as a duplicate winning with the first re-game, but in this modified example, the first BB and the second BB are duplicately won. The presence or absence of is different.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in this modified example, in addition to each winning mode of the first embodiment, the 28th small winning combination is set. The 28th small role wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "Akakai" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. Is established. When the 28th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, one medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the lottery table for the normal gaming state of this modified example, when the winning is achieved when the index value IV = 25, in addition to the first BB winning flag, the 28th small winning combination is won. The flag is set. On the other hand, if the winning is achieved when the index value IV = 26, only the second BB winning flag is set. Then, the first BB and the second BB are not won except for these index values IV = 25 and 26. That is, in the game in which the first BB is won, the 28th small role is also won, and in the game in which the second BB is won, other small roles and replays are not won.

FIG. 71 (c1) shows an example of a stop roll of the game that wins the first BB, and FIG. 71 (c2) shows an example of the stop roll of the game that wins the second BB. As described above, in the game in which the first BB is won, the 28th small role is also won. Then, in the stop control when the small winning combination and the BB are won in duplicate, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination is controlled so as to be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, in the game in which the first BB is won, the first is Even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 1BB prize, the 28th small winning combination prize will be established. In addition, by winning the 28th small winning combination in the normal section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and the winning probability of the transition lottery is 100% in this modified example. By the way, the 28th small winning combination is set so that the winning flag is not set when the winning is won at the time of another index value IV, and the game in which the 28th small winning combination is established is the 1st BB winning game. Limited to. That is, the 28th small winning combination has a function as a so-called reach role, which notifies that the first BB has been won and prevents the first BB winning from being established in the winning game. Then, in the 1st BB winning game, the 28th small winning combination is established, and in the carry-over state of the 1st BB after that, if the game is a result of the loss, the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol corresponding to the 1st BB winning. Although the first BB winning can be established, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol corresponding to the first BB winning cannot be stopped at the effective line, no winning is established as a result, so-called missed stitches stop at the effective line. It should be noted that the 28th small winning combination may be won even in the carry-over state after the first BB winning game or in the BB state, and in that case, it is preferable that the winning probability does not differ depending on the gaming state.

On the other hand, in the second BB winning game, only the second BB winning flag is set, and when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning, the second BB winning is established, but the second BB winning is achieved. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the corresponding symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line, no winning is established as a result, so-called deviation is stopped at the effective line. Then, not only in the second BB winning game, but also in the carry-over state of the second BB after that, if the game is a result of the loss, the second BB winning is established by stopping the game aiming at the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning. However, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the second BB winning cannot be stopped at the effective line, the above-mentioned deviation will be stopped at the effective line.

Therefore, assuming that the stop operation is not performed aiming at winning the first BB or the second BB, the first BB can determine whether or not the player has won from the stop roll, while the second BB is from the stop roll. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not a player has won.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, if the continuation condition is not satisfied at the end of the bonus AT state, the advantageous section ends at the end of the bonus AT state, and then the slot machine 10 re-shifts to the advantageous section. Since the situation is such that the BB winning is not carried over, the transition to the CZ mode may occur. Then, in the first embodiment, both the first BB winning game and the second BB winning game are duplicated with the first re-game, and if, in the normal section, the overlapping rip 1st BB and the overlapping rip before the transition to the advantageous section are performed. Even if the second BB is won, the game shifts to an advantageous section by the first replay that is duplicated in the game, and the winning flags of the first BB and the second BB are only set in the game. The carry-over flag was set to allow the transition to the CZ mode because it was not set.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the first BB is won in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the game when the 28th small winning combination is won, while when the second BB is won, the game is concerned. Then, the configuration does not shift to the advantageous section.

Hereinafter, the transition of the advantageous section and the mode at the time of transition in this modification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 72.

For example, when the game is started in the situation where the first BB winning is carried over and the game shifts to the advantageous section in the situation where the first BB is carried over at the timing of t71, the normal mode is set as described above. It is assumed that the AT mode is entered at the timing of t72, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t73, and the bonus AT state is terminated at the timing of t74 without satisfying the continuation condition. In this case, as described above, the advantageous section ends at the timing of t74.

At the timing of t75, when the index value IV = 25, the game is won, and when the 1st BB winning flag and the 28th small winning combination winning flag are set, the game is won in the advantageous section transition lottery and the game shifts to the advantageous section. In this case, since the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the winning game of the first BB, the transition is performed in a situation where the carry-over flag is not set, and the CZ mode is set. In the figure, the first BB winning game and the game in which the first BB carry-over flag is set are displayed as the same timing of t75. Then, in the game in which the first BB is won, the 28th small winning combination as the reach role is established, and it is clear that the player has won the first BB and has been set to the CZ mode. It becomes possible to grasp.

It is assumed that the AT mode is entered at the timing of t76, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t77, and the bonus AT state is terminated at the timing of t78 without satisfying the continuation condition. In this case as well, the advantageous section ends at the timing of t78.

If the game is won at the timing of t79 and the index value IV = 26 and the second BB winning flag is set, the game will not be won in the advantageous section transition lottery and will not be transferred to the advantageous section. Then, after that, when the advantageous section transition lottery is performed at the timing of t80 and the winning is achieved, the advantageous section transition is performed in the situation where the second BB carry-over flag is set, and the normal mode is set. Then, in the game in which the second BB is won, the 28th small winning combination as the reach role is not established.

It is assumed that the AT mode is entered at the timing of t81, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t82, and the bonus AT state is terminated at the timing of t83 without satisfying the continuation condition. In this case as well, the advantageous section ends at the timing of t83.

After that, when the 1st BB winning flag and the 28th small winning combination winning flag are set at the timing of t84, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the same manner as described above, and the CZ mode is set.

As described above, according to this modification, the advantage of shifting to the advantageous section differs between the first BB, which is a duplicate winning with the 28th small winning combination, and the second BB, which is not a duplicate winning combination with the 28th small winning combination. , If you win the 1st BB that is a duplicate of the 28th small role, it will be set to CZ mode, and if you win the 2nd BB that is not a duplicate of the 28th small role, you will not move to the advantageous section in the game. , Then it may be set to normal mode. By doing so, the interest in which BB will be won will be raised, and the player will determine whether the mode is set to the CZ mode or the normal mode with the 28th small winning combination as a guide. It becomes possible.

By the way, even if the second BB, which does not win the 28th small role, is won, if there is a shift to the advantageous section due to another result that does not win the BB more than that. The CZ mode will be set as an advantageous section transition in a situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set.

In other words, not only the reach role overlapping BB where the advantageous section transition and the BB carry-over flag set are performed, but also the single BB where only the BB carry-over flag is set and the advantageous section transition does not occur is provided in the normal section. , The situation where the BB carry-over flag is set can occur even after the bonus AT state. As a result, after the bonus AT state, the CZ mode may be set or the normal mode may be set, and the playability in the configuration in which the mode at the time of transition to the advantageous section is set depending on the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag. It is possible to increase it suitably.

In other words, if the result other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB (1st re-game to 11th re-game, 1st small role to 28th small role) is used as a trigger result for the transition to the advantageous section, it is a trigger. By configuring the configuration to include a duplicated result of the result and the BB and a single result that includes the trigger result but does not include the BB, the case of shifting to the advantageous section triggered by the duplicated result and the case of shifting to the advantageous section triggered by the single result are advantageous. The advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred differs depending on the case of shifting to the section, and when shifting to the advantageous section based on the overlapping result winning, the CZ mode is set, and when shifting to the advantageous section based on the single result winning. Is set to the normal mode on the condition that the BB is won before that. With such a configuration, interest in the result that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is raised, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this case, when shifting to the advantageous section based on the single result winning, if the BB is not won before that, it is set to the CZ mode instead of the normal mode, so after the BB winning and the single result winning. It will be possible to raise interest in the timing of the transition to the advantageous section and the opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, including the above.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode is different between the case where the first BB is carried over and the case where the second BB is carried over.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the AT mode lottery table in this modification.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the section is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S3502, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S3501 that the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not the first BB carry-over flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S3505, when the first BB carry-over for the normal mode is carried over. After acquiring the AT mode lottery table, this acquisition process ends. If the first BB carry-over flag is not set, the AT mode lottery table at the time of the second BB carry-over for the normal mode is acquired in step S3506, and then the acquisition process ends. If it is determined in step S3503 that the CZ mode flag is set, the AT mode lottery table for the CZ mode is acquired in step S3507, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 74, the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the first BB and the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the second BB are both AT mode transition lottery than when the AT mode lottery table for CZ mode is used. It is set so that it is difficult to win and it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than when the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is used, and further, when the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the first BB is used. Is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than when the AT mode lottery table at the time of carrying over the second BB is used. That is, in the normal mode in which it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, the situation in which the first BB is carried over is easier to shift to the AT mode than the situation in which the second BB is carried over.

As described above, in this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the type of BB carried over, so that the interest in which BB will be won after the bonus AT state ends. To improve the interest of the game.

The AT mode transition lottery can be performed in a situation where the BB winning is carried over, and it is disadvantageous if the BB winning is established without winning the AT mode transition lottery (advantageous section ends or bonus AT state). In the configuration (there is no transition to), the game is waiting for the AT mode transition winning while preventing the BB winning from being established, and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is determined by the type of BB carried over in such game. By making them different, it is possible to increase interest in the AT mode transition lottery even before the BB is won. In other words, assuming that the BB is carried over, no matter which BB is won, it is not possible to immediately win a prize, so it is possible that interest in the type of BB will decline. In that respect, as in the above configuration, if the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the type of BB winning that is the starting line of the AT mode transition lottery, even if the BB cannot immediately win the prize. It becomes possible to attract the attention of the player.

Here, the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set is mainly a normal section, the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set is an advantageous section, and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the advantageous section. It is set to be higher (Fig. 34), and even because the number of ceiling games is set in the advantageous section, the BB carry-over flag is set rather than the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set. It can be said that the situation is more likely to shift to the AT mode. Based on this premise, by making the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section different depending on the type of BB carried over, simply changing the number of BB types will win the AT mode transition lottery. The probabilities can be different, and the game in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set is diversified.

In the advantageous section transition game process, the BB carry-over flag is set in the CZ mode when the BB carry-over flag is not set. Therefore, the BB carry-over flag is set after the transition to the CZ mode. Even with such a configuration, since the AT mode lottery table is only different, when setting the CZ mode, the BB to be won can be predicted in advance, and the presence or absence of the BB prize at the time of BB winning can be predicted in advance. It is possible to make the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode different without using a complicated configuration such as prediction.

In this case, for example, as in the first modification of the first embodiment, the normal mode or the CZ mode is shifted to the AT mode through the AT mode transition lottery, and after the transition to the AT mode, the transition permission lottery is passed to the bonus AT state. If the winning probability of the transfer permission lottery differs depending on the type of BB that has been won, such as the configuration that can cause the transition to, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in this modification differs depending on the type of BB that has been carried over. When the configuration is applied, the lottery probability of both the first stage lottery to the bonus AT state and the second stage lottery differs depending on the type of BB that has been won.

In the above modification, the situation in which the first BB is carried over is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the situation in which the second BB is carried over. In such a configuration, for example, in the above-mentioned first modification. As described above, if the situation in which the second BB is carried over is easier to win the transition permission lottery than the situation in which the first BB is carried over, it is easier to shift to the AT mode in the situation where the first BB is carried over. After shifting to AT mode, the number of games up to the bonus AT state tends to be long, and in the situation where the second BB is carried over, it is difficult to shift to AT mode, but after shifting to AT mode, it shifts to the bonus AT state relatively quickly. Depending on the BB carried over, the playability will differ greatly, and the interest of the game will be improved through the diversification of the game.

On the other hand, for example, contrary to the first modification, this modification is applied to a configuration in which the situation in which the first BB is carried over is easier to win the transition permission lottery than the situation in which the second BB is carried over. Then, in the situation where the first BB is carried over, it is easy to shift to the AT mode, the number of games to the bonus AT state is likely to be shortened, and the road from the AT mode transition to the bonus AT state is easier than in the situation where the second BB is carried over. Is in a relatively advantageous state. Even in this way, the playability will differ greatly depending on the BB carried over, and the interest of the game will be improved through the diversification of the game.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the end timing of the advantageous section is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation condition of the AT mode is not satisfied. However, in the present embodiment, the continuation condition of the AT mode is satisfied. If the BB is won in the situation where it is not done, the advantageous section is terminated. It should be noted that the point that the advantageous section is terminated when the BB prize is established in the normal mode is the same as that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the changes in the processing configuration due to the above changes will be described.

<AT continuation setting process>
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in the present embodiment.

The AT continuation setting process in this embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment in that the AT mode flag is not cleared at the end of BB in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied. Is the same as that of the first embodiment.

That is, when it is determined in step S3614 that any of the BB end game flags is set, the presence or absence of the continuation flag is determined in step S3616 after clearing the transition permission flag in step S3615. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the AT continuation setting process is terminated as it is. Such processing is the same as that of the first embodiment. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S3616 and the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT end command is displayed in step S3617 without clearing the AT mode flag. After executing the process of setting as the output target to 81, the present AT continuation setting process is terminated.

<Second section display process>
The second section display process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76.

The section display second process in the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in the end conditions of the advantageous section, and is the same as that of the first embodiment in other respects.

That is, when it is determined in step S3706 that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section has not been reached, it is determined in step S3710 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. In the case of the BB winning game, in step S3711, it is determined whether or not the BB winning is achieved before the AT mode is won in the normal mode. If the BB prize is won before the AT mode is won in the normal mode, the process for ending the advantageous section is performed in steps S3707 to S3709. If a negative determination is made in step S3711, the advantageous section is not terminated. These processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

When it is determined in step S3710 that the BB winning game flag is not set, it is determined in step S3712 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. Each BB winning game flag is a flag that is set in each BB winning winning game and is cleared at the end of the winning game. In the case of a BB winning game, it is determined in step S3713 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the BB is won in a situation where the continuation flag is not set and the continuation condition is not satisfied, the processing for the end of the advantageous section is performed in steps S3707 to S3709. If it is not a BB winning game, or if the continuation condition is satisfied even if it is a BB winning game, the advantageous section is not ended.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the following advantageous section transition game processing, the processing (step S2105 and step S2106) for setting the shifted flag at the time of the advantageous section transition in the BB state is not provided. Therefore, even in the section display second process in the present embodiment, a process for confirming the shifted flag at the end of the advantageous section is not provided. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is not terminated at the time of BB winning (the advantageous section is re-shifted to the advantageous section during the BB state) and the advantageous section is not terminated at the time of BB winning. It was necessary to distinguish the case (the transition to the advantageous section did not occur during the BB state) at the end of the BB, whereas in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is not ended at the end of the BB. This is because there is no need to distinguish between.

<Processing for advantageous section transition game>
Next, the changes for causing the transition to the CZ mode after the end of the bonus AT state will be described. In the first embodiment, since the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the BB, when the advantageous section ends with the end of the bonus AT state, the BB is not won. Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB winning is not carried over, the CZ mode is set, and if the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB winning is carried over, the normal mode is set. It was configured to be set to.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the advantageous section is terminated at the time of winning the BB, if the BB winning that triggered the end of the advantageous section is carried over, the BB winning will shift to the advantageous section. The situation will be carried over. Therefore, in the present embodiment, which of the CZ mode and the normal mode is set depending on whether or not the BB winning is carried over at the time of transition to the advantageous section is configured to be the opposite of that of the first embodiment.

That is, in the advantageous section transition game process in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 77, it is determined in step S3801 whether or not any of the BB carry-over flags is set. Then, when any of the BB carry-over flags is set, the process for setting the CZ mode is performed in steps S3802 to S3805, and when the BB carry-over flag is not set, steps S3806 to It is configured to perform the process for setting the normal mode in step S3808, which is the reverse of the first embodiment.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S3801 that any of the BB carry-over flags is set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the first BB carry-over flag is set. When the first BB winning is carried over, the process of setting the first CZ mode flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S3803. On the other hand, when the situation is such that the second BB winning is carried over instead of the first BB winning, the process of setting the second CZ mode flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S3804. In the present embodiment, the first CZ mode and the second CZ mode are set as the CZ mode, and the first CZ mode flag and the second CZ mode flag are set to the CZ mode, and whichever CZ mode is used. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to know whether it is set. After executing the process of step S3803 or step S3804, in step S3805, "32" corresponding to the number of games in the CZ mode is input to the CZ counter, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game is ended.

If the BB carry-over flag is not set in step S3801, the ceiling game number table is acquired in step S3806, the lottery process for the number of ceiling games is executed in step S3807, and the ceiling game is set on the ceiling counter in step S3808. After executing the process of inputting the number, the process for the advantageous section transition game is terminated. The processing of steps S3806 to S3808 is the same as the processing of steps S2102 to S2104.

<AT mode lottery table acquisition process>
The acquisition process of the AT mode lottery table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is not set and the section is a normal section, the AT mode lottery table for the normal section is acquired in step S3902, and then the acquisition process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S3901 that the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the second CZ mode flag is set. If the second CZ mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the first CZ mode flag is set, and if it is not set, the AT mode lottery table for the normal mode is set in step S3905. Is acquired, and then the acquisition process is terminated. If the first CZ mode flag is set in step S3904, the AT mode lottery table for the first CZ mode is acquired in step S3906, and then the acquisition process ends. If it is determined in step S3903 that the second CZ mode flag is set, the AT mode lottery table for the second CZ mode is acquired in step S3907, and then the acquisition process ends.

As shown in FIG. 79, the AT mode lottery table for the first CZ mode and the AT mode lottery table for the second CZ mode are both more than when the AT mode lottery table for the normal section or the normal mode is used. It is set so that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, and further, when the AT mode lottery table for the first CZ mode is used, the AT mode lottery table for the second CZ mode is used. It is set so that it is easy to win the mode transition lottery. That is, when the first BB winning is carried over to the advantageous section and set to the first CZ mode, the second BB winning is carried over to the advantageous section and set to the second CZ mode. It is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the case of. Then, after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied, the AT mode is re-established depending on whether the first BB is won and the advantageous section ends, or the second BB is won and the advantageous section ends. The transition (pullback) probability is different, and the AT mode re-transition probability is higher when the first BB is won and the advantageous section ends.

By the way, when the first CZ mode is set, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery during the first CZ mode is about 70%, and when the second CZ mode is set, the AT mode transition is performed during the second CZ mode. The probability of winning the lottery is about 40%.

<Main processing>
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the BB winning is carried over to the advantageous section, the CZ mode is set, and when the BB winning is not carried over, the advantageous section is set to the normal mode. If the information for the advantageous section is initialized at the time of input, and the information indicating that the BB has been won (BB carry-over flag) remains, the CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section immediately after the start of the game. It will be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the BB carry-over flag is also deleted when the advantageous section information initialization process is performed in the main process.

That is, in the main process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, when it is determined in step S4004 that the setting key is turned on, the advantageous section information initialization process is executed in step S4005. After that, in step S4006, the carry-over information initialization process is executed. The carry-over information initialization process is a process of clearing the BB carry-over flag. That is, when the advantageous section information initialization process is performed in step S4005, the BB carry-over flag is also cleared. As a result, the event of shifting to the CZ mode immediately after the start of the game does not occur.

After executing the process of step S4006, the winning probability setting process is executed in step S4007. Since the processes of steps S4001 to S4003 and steps S4008 to S4016 are the same as the processes of steps S201 to S203 and steps S207 to S215, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Flow of the game>
The state in which the advantageous section shifts or ends in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In addition, in this specification, the timing number of the timing chart may be duplicated across the embodiments, but each of them is treated as a number peculiar to each embodiment.

When the set value of the slot machine 10 is changed (winning probability setting process) at the timing of t1, the information indicating that it is an advantageous section (advantageous section flag) and the BB carry-over information (BB carry-over flag) are deleted. .. It is assumed that, for example, the first BB with overlapping rips is won at the timing of t2 after the start of the game. In this case, since the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the game, the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, so that the normal mode is set.

When the AT mode is entered at the timing of t3, for example, by exhausting the number of ceiling games, the continuation flag is set, and then the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t4. If the continuation condition is satisfied (the continuation flag is set) when the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t5, the BB is won again at the timing of t6 after the end of the bonus AT state. However, the advantageous section does not end, and the bonus AT state is started from the timing of t7 for the BB won at the timing of t6.

When the bonus AT state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied at the timing of t8, if the BB is won at the timing of t9, the advantageous section ends in the winning game. After that, when the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t10, the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set, and the CZ mode is set.

When the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode and the AT mode shifts to the AT mode at the timing of t11, the continuation flag is set. After that, the bonus AT state starts from the timing of t12, and the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t13. When the BB is won again at the timing of t14, the continuation flag is not set, so the advantageous section ends at the timing of t14. Then, the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the timing of t15 immediately after that, and in this case, since the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set, the CZ mode is set as in the case of t10. ..

If the AT mode transition lottery is not won within the specified number of games (32 games) in the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at the timing of t16 and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, the number of ceiling games is set. After that, when the set value is changed (winning probability setting process) at the timing of t17, the information indicating that the section is advantageous (advantageous section flag) and the BB carry-over information (BB carry-over flag) are deleted.

Incidentally, also in the present embodiment, once the advantageous section ends at t9 to t10 and t14 to t15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator ends once. That is, t3 to t9, t10 to t14, and t15 to t16 are in the lit state, and t9 to t10 and t14 to t15 are in the lit state. On the other hand, a series of advantageous effects from the AT mode start effect to the CZ mode end effect continues from t3 to t16. That is, at the end of the bonus AT state of t8 or t13, the AT mode end effect is performed and the CZ mode start effect is performed, and the advantageous effect is continued across the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the shift to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set, the CZ mode is set. Further, in the present embodiment, the CZ mode to be set differs depending on the type of the BB carry-over flag set at the time of transition to the advantageous section (the type of the winning BB).

That is, in the timing chart of FIG. 82, it is assumed that in the advantageous section shifted at the timing of t21, the AT mode is shifted at the timing of t22, and the bonus AT state is executed at t23 to t24. If the first BB is won at the timing of t25, the continuation flag is not set, so the advantageous section ends at the timing of t25. When shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t26 immediately after that, the CZ mode set here is the first CZ mode because the transition is to the advantageous section in the situation where the first BB carry-over flag is set. Then, when the shift to the AT mode occurs at the timing of t27, such as by winning the AT mode transition lottery during the first CZ mode, the bonus AT state according to the first BB state is started from the timing of t28.

If the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied at the timing of t29 and the second BB is won at the timing of t30, the continuation flag is not set, so the advantageous section ends at the timing of t30. When shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t31 immediately after that, the CZ mode set here is the second CZ mode because the transition is to the advantageous section in the situation where the second BB carry-over flag is set. Then, when the shift to the AT mode occurs at the timing of t32, such as by winning the AT mode transition lottery during the second CZ mode, the bonus AT state according to the second BB state is started from the timing of t33.

If the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied at the timing of t34 and the second BB is won at the timing of t35, the continuation flag is not set, so the advantageous section ends at the timing of t35. When shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t36 immediately after that, the second CZ mode is set as in the case of t31.

If the AT mode transition lottery is not won within the specified number of games in the CZ mode, the second CZ mode ends at the timing of t37, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. In this case, the number of ceiling games is set. For example, if the second BB prize is established at the timing of t38, which is before the AT mode is won, the advantageous section ends as in the first embodiment. Then, the shift to the advantageous section is performed again at the timing of t39 in the second BB state, and in this case, the shift to the advantageous section is performed in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, so that the normal mode is set.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, after the bonus AT state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated based on the BB winning and the normal section is shifted to. , The configuration is such that the CZ mode is set on condition that the BB carry-over flag is set. By doing so, when the BB is won, the BB carry-over flag is set when the BB carry-over flag is set when the advantageous section is temporarily terminated and the BB carry-over flag is set again immediately afterwards, so that the CZ mode is set. , It is possible to set the CZ mode after the bonus AT state.

Then, if the BB carry-over flag is not set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the normal mode is set, and when the advantageous section information is initialized by changing the setting, the carry-over information is also initialized. Therefore, for example, if the game hall is closed during the AT mode, and then the information for the advantageous section is initialized by changing the setting, the information in the AT mode is deleted and the next day. It is possible not to carry over the information in the AT mode, and at that time, the BB carry-over flag is also cleared, so even if it is set in the normal section, the BB carry-over flag is set. The game will be started from a situation where it is not, and it is possible to avoid being set to the CZ mode in the morning.

Depending on the type of BB carry-over flag set when shifting to the advantageous section, it may be set to the first CZ mode or the second CZ mode with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery. Not only does it suffice if the BB carry-over flag is set, but the type of BB that wins also becomes involved in whether or not the AT mode can be pulled back, making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the winning BB more appropriately. Become.

In particular, the AT mode is the first CZ mode that shifts when the carry-over information of the first BB that is difficult to win is set, rather than the second CZ mode that shifts when the carry-over information of the second BB that is easy to win is set. By making it easy to win the transition lottery, it is possible to secure a balance between the rarity of winning the first BB and its benefits. Therefore, it is possible to set a so-called AT mode pullback zone such as CZ mode after the bonus AT state while not increasing the advantage for the player too much.

Even in this case, the advantage of the bonus AT state is the same regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won, and more specifically, it is the end condition between the first BB state and the second BB state. The maximum number of payouts is the same. By doing so, once the shift to AT mode is performed, the advantages in AT mode can be shared regardless of which CZ mode is used, and the chances of increasing medals are more evenly generated. Can be made to. In other words, even when re-shifting to AT mode via the second CZ mode, it is possible to enjoy the same level of benefits as when re-shifting to AT mode via the first CZ mode, and the second CZ. It is possible to suppress a decrease in playing motivation during the mode.

It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, after shifting to the AT mode, after the bonus AT state, and after the transition permission lottery, the carry-over BB prize may be allowed. In this case, the first BB The winning probability of the transfer permission lottery may be different depending on whether the case where the item is carried over or the case where the second BB is carried over. By doing so, the advantage of the bonus AT state itself can be shared between the case of re-shifting to the AT mode via the first CZ mode and the case of re-shifting to the AT mode via the second CZ mode. Also, the number of medals (number of games) required to shift to the bonus AT state can be changed at each stage (CZ mode, AT mode). Therefore, it can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Also in this embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, the rip overlapping first BB or the rip overlapping second BB, which is a duplicate winning with the first re-game, is used as an opportunity. When the advantageous section ends, it is restricted that the BB prize is established in the end game of the advantageous section. By doing so, the next game of the end game of the advantageous section can be made a game in which the BB carry-over flag is set more reliably. That is, if the advantageous section is terminated based on the BB winning and the BB prize is established in the game, the BB state is digested in the normal section, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed during the BB state. Will occur. Then, the normal mode is set as the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set. In that respect, as in the above configuration, at least the next game of the advantageous section end game is set so that the BB carry-over flag is set, so that if the role that triggers the advantageous section transition in the game is won, It is possible to set the CZ mode as an advantageous section transition with the BB carry-over flag.

By the way, as in the first embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag, when shifting to the advantageous section during the BB state, the mode is set to a predetermined mode (normal mode), and this embodiment Then, if it is in the BB state, it may be configured to be set to the CZ mode. However, in this case, there are cases where the advantageous section is ended based on the BB winning in the normal mode and the BB state is in the BB state, and cases where the advantageous section is ended and the BB winning is made in the BB winning game and the BB state is in the BB state. It is necessary to distinguish between and, and there is concern about the complexity of the configuration.

Further, the section display second process in the present embodiment includes a process of not ending the advantageous section unless the BB winning game is mainly in the normal mode, and a process of ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game. The process of not ending the advantageous section in the winning game is executed with priority over the process of ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game. Therefore, if the BB prize is established in the BB winning game, the advantageous section does not end because the BB prize is in the situation where the AT mode flag is set. However, as described above, it is guaranteed that the BB prize will not be established in the BB winning game by winning the first BB and the second BB in duplicate with the first re-game.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the relationship with the forced termination condition of the advantageous section will be described. As described above, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by exhausting the maximum number of games (1500 games) or increasing the maximum number of games (2400) (second process of section display). For example, when the forced termination condition is satisfied during the bonus AT state, the slot machine 10 terminates the advantageous section when the forced termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not it is in the BB state. In this case, there is a high possibility of shifting to the advantageous section again during the BB state, and then the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, so that the normal mode is set. .. In addition, when the forced termination condition is satisfied during the BB state, even if the configuration is such that the advantageous section is terminated after waiting for the end of the BB, the advantageous section shift is usually performed in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set. It will be set to the mode. Therefore, in this modification, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated before the forced termination condition is satisfied.

That is, in the section display second process in this modification, when it is determined in step S4112 that any BB winning game flag is set, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, the continuation flag is set in step S4113. Determine if it is set. If the BB is won when the continuation flag is not set, the processing for the end of the advantageous section is executed in steps S4107 to S4109 as in the second embodiment.

If the BB is won in a situation where the continuation flag is set, in step S4114, after grasping the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, the advantageous section game number AG is larger than the upper limit game number. Whether the predetermined number of games (1400 games), which is less than the specific number of games (100 games), has been reached, or whether the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY has reached the predetermined number (2200), which is smaller than the upper limit by the specific number (200). judge. If the predetermined number of games has not been reached and the predetermined number of games has not been reached, the second section display process is terminated as it is. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

On the other hand, in step S4114, if either the predetermined number of games has been reached or the predetermined number of games has been reached, it is determined in step S4115 whether or not the BB won this time is the first BB. To do. If the first BB is won, the process proceeds to step S4107, and the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4107 to S4109. When the BB won this time is the second BB (step S4115: NO), the section display second process is ended without ending the advantageous section.

As described above, when the pre-end condition such as whether the predetermined number of games has been reached or the predetermined number of games has been reached is satisfied, even if the AT mode is continued as it is, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated soon. It means that there is a high possibility that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated depending on the conditions. Therefore, in this modification, if such a pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is temporarily terminated on condition that the first BB is won. In this case, since the re-transition to the advantageous section occurs in the situation where the first BB winning is carried over, when re-shifting to the advantageous section, the first CZ mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is relatively high is set. Will be done.

Here, in this modification, when setting the pre-end condition, the number of medals increased (specific number of medals) that can be expected when the advantageous section is continued over a specific number of games is reverted to the AT mode via the first CZ mode. The specific number of games and the specific number of medals are set so that the number of medals that can be expected to increase by the transition will be larger. That is, as described above, the expected increase in the average number of medals is larger when the game is re-shifted to the first CZ mode when the number of games or the number of medals is predetermined. Moreover, if the mode is re-shifted to the first CZ mode, the number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number AG) and the increased number of games (advantageous section increase / decrease number MY) are reset once, and then the shift to the AT mode occurs again. The maximum number of medals that can be obtained is overwhelmingly large. Even when the mode is shifted to the first CZ mode as described above, the mode may be shifted to the normal mode without the AT mode transition occurring during the first CZ mode.

In this modification, even if the pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated when the second BB is won. When the second BB is won, when re-shifting to the advantageous section, the second CZ mode in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is relatively low is set. In this modification, the number of medals that can be expected to increase (specific number of medals) when the advantageous section is continued over a specific number of games is the number of medals that can be expected to increase by re-shifting to the AT mode via the second CZ mode. The specific number of games and the specific number of medals are set so as to be more than. That is, as described above, the expected increase in the average number of medals is larger when the AT mode is continued as it is than when the game is re-shifted to the second CZ mode when the number of games or the number of medals is predetermined. Therefore, as described above, even if the pre-end condition is satisfied, if the second BB is won, the advantageous section is not terminated, so that the advantageous section can be terminated in the middle. Care is taken not to be a disadvantage to the player.

In the above modified example, the advantageous section may be terminated when the pre-end condition is satisfied, but when the pre-end condition is satisfied, one of the excess flags is set. If there is, the advantageous section may be terminated.

That is, in the remaining game number management process in the section display second process, for example, the sum of the product of the stock counter value and the number of games required for digesting the bonus AT state and the current advantageous section game number AG is the upper limit game. If it is specified that the maximum number of games will be reached after the fact, such as when the number is exceeded, before the maximum number of games is reached, the first excess flag is set. Further, in the remaining number management process in the second section display process, for example, the total of the product of the value of the stock counter and the increased number of sheets in the BB state and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY exceeds the upper limit number of sheets. If it is specified that the maximum number of sheets will be reached after the fact before the maximum number of sheets is reached, the second excess flag is set.

When the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, for example, even if the stock lottery is won and the stock counter is increased, the profit of the increase cannot be enjoyed by the forced termination. Therefore, for example, when the stock lottery is won in the situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, in addition to or instead of increasing the stock counter, the player is forced to take an advantageous section as another privilege. It may be configured to end before the end condition is satisfied and to re-challenge from the CZ mode (first CZ mode). More specifically, for example, when the stock lottery is won in the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the special information of the winning is stored and the above pre-termination condition is satisfied. In such a situation, if the special information is stored, the advantageous section may be terminated based on the BB winning.

In the above modified example, when the pre-end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated based on the first BB winning, but when the pre-ending condition is satisfied, not only the first BB winning but also the first BB winning is performed. Even if the second BB is won, the advantageous section may be terminated. In this case, even if the continuation flag is set when the pre-end condition is satisfied, the AT mode end effect can be executed at the end of the first BB state or the second BB state by setting the configuration to clear it. Become.

Further, in the above modification, the advantageous section is terminated in the BB winning game in the situation where the pre-end condition is satisfied, but in the first embodiment, the BB in the situation where the pre-end condition is satisfied. It may be configured to end the advantageous section (based on the end) in the end game of the state. That is, in the section display second process of FIG. 48, after making an affirmative determination in step S2213, the process proceeds to the process of step S4114. In this case, even if the BB end game flag is set in step S2212 and the continuation flag is set in step S2213, if the pre-end condition is satisfied (step S4114: YES). ), The process shifts to the process for ending the advantageous section in steps S2207 to S2209. In this case, at the end of the advantageous section, since it is before the BB is won, it is preferable not to perform the process of step S4115. As described above, in the first embodiment, in the advantageous section transition game processing, if the advantageous section transition is performed in a situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set, the configuration is set to the CZ mode on the advantageous side. However, by doing the above, the BB state ends in the situation where the pre-end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set. Even when re-migrating to, there is a high possibility that the BB carry-over flag is not set, and it is possible to re-challenge from the CZ mode.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the present embodiment, if the BB is won in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated. However, in the second section display process, the presence or absence of the BB prize in the normal mode is determined before the determination process of the presence or absence of the BB winning. Further, in the present embodiment, when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT mode flag is not cleared. Therefore, in the AT mode at least until the next BB is won and the advantageous section ends. There will be. Then, if the BB is won after the end of the bonus AT, even if the continuation condition is not satisfied, if the BB prize is successfully established in the game, it is determined whether or not the BB is won. Since the second process of displaying the section is terminated (because it is determined that the BB prize is won in the AT mode), the advantageous section is not terminated. In this modified example, playability is created by utilizing such an event.

FIG. 84A shows a part of the lottery table for the normal gaming state in this modified example. As a change in this modification, as a chance of winning the first BB and the second BB, in addition to the rip duplication 1st BB and the rip duplication 2nd BB with the index value IV = 25,26, the index value IV = 28,29 alone. The point is that the first BB and the independent second BB are set. That is, in this modification, when the rip duplication 1st BB and the rip duplication 2nd BB are won, the 1st re-game winning flag is set in addition to the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag, and the single first When 1BB or the independent second BB is won, only the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set. Then, if the rip duplication 1st BB or the rip duplication 2nd BB is won, the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize cannot be established in the winning game as described above, but the single 1st BB or the single 2nd BB In the case of winning, it is possible to establish the first BB prize and the second BB prize in the winning game by aiming at the symbol corresponding to the winning and stopping the operation. By the way, in this modification, the winning probabilities of the single first BB and the single second BB are both about 1 / 32.8, which are the same probabilities.

FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing a bonus AT start process in this modification.

In step S4201, it is determined that the state is not in the BB state, in step S4202 it is determined that the BB has been won, and in step S4203 it is determined that the AT mode is in progress. These steps S4201 to S4203 are the same as the processes of steps S1501 to S1503.

In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S4205 that the game is capable of establishing a BB prize (a result of the loss), the transition permission flag is set in step S4206, and the step After setting the winning permission command in S4207, the process for starting the bonus AT ends. The processing of steps S4205 to S4207 is the same as the processing of steps S1504 to S1506.

The case where the BB is won in the situation where the continuation flag is not set in the AT mode means that it is the first BB winning game after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S4204, and a continuation chance flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in step S4208. The continuation chance flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the first BB winning game after the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied as described above. Then, in step S4209, a process of setting the continuation chance command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. In the display control device 81 that has received the continuation chance command, as a continuation chance effect, for example, FIG. 84 suggests that it would be advantageous if the BB prize could be established in the game (AT mode continues). As shown in (b), the combination of symbols for which the first BB and the second BB are awarded is displayed, and the characters such as "Aim for it !!" are displayed.

In this modification, the CPU 102 performs the continuation chance processing of FIG. 85 (b) within the winning result handling process or each time the winning result handling process is performed.

In the continuation chance processing, it is determined in step S4211 whether or not the above continuation chance flag is set, and if it is not set, the continuation chance processing is terminated as it is. If the continuation chance flag is set, it is determined in step S4212 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. When the BB winning game flag is set and the corresponding BB winning is successfully established in the BB winning game, the process for starting the bonus AT state is performed in steps S4213 to S4215. That is, in step S4213, the transition permission flag is set, and in step S4214, the continuation flag is set. Then, in step S4215, the AT continuation setting process is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4212, or after the process of step S4215 is executed, the continuation chance flag is cleared in step S4216, and then the continuation chance process is terminated.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 85 (c1) and 85 (c2), if the first BB prize is successfully established in the game in which the continuation chance effect is performed, the bonus AT state according to the first BB state is obtained. Is started, and if the second BB prize is successfully established, the bonus AT state according to the second BB state is started. Here, in the first BB and the second BB, the corresponding symbols for establishing the winning are common to the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R is different. Then, in the right reel 32R, the symbol corresponding to the first BB is the "cherry", and the symbol corresponding to the second BB is the "BAR" symbol. In the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at intervals of up to 4 symbols, and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at the effective line. If you do, you cannot stop the "BAR" symbol on the effective line, and if you perform the stop operation at the timing when you can stop the "BAR" symbol on the effective line, the "cherry" symbol will stop on the effective line. It is a relationship that cannot be made.

That is, when the continuation chance effect occurs, the player needs to perform the stop operation after selecting which BB to aim at by relying on intuition or the like. Then, if the selection is correct, the corresponding BB prize is established and the AT mode can be continued, but the selection is incorrect, or the BB winning game this time is the rip duplication first BB or In the case of the second BB with overlapping rips, as shown in FIG. 84 (c3), the symbol combinations corresponding to the first BB prize and the second BB prize do not stop at the effective line, and the symbols corresponding to the loss stop at the effective line. Or, the symbol combination corresponding to the first re-game winning will stop at the effective line.

As described above, according to this modification, the process of ending the advantageous section at the time of winning the BB and the process of ending the advantageous section at the time of winning the BB are set in the second section display processing. Innovative playability can be realized.

That is, when the BB is won, it overlaps with the transition trigger for the advantageous section such as the first re-game, and overlaps with the transition trigger for the first re-game, etc., in addition to the rip overlap 1st BB and the rip overlap 2nd BB for winning. By providing the independent 1st BB and the independent 2nd BB that do not win, it is possible to establish a BB prize in the BB winning game in the configuration where the advantageous section and the AT mode end in the BB winning game after the end of the bonus AT state. Become. In this case, the process of not ending the advantageous section if the AT mode flag is set when the BB prize is established, and the process of ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game in the situation where there is no continuation flag. In the configuration that has, since the process of not ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game is given priority, if the BB winning game succeeds in winning the BB, there is no continuation flag. It is possible to continue the AT mode (shift to the bonus AT state) without ending the advantageous section even if the BB is won in. In this way, it is possible to enhance the merits of the BB winning in a configuration in which the advantageous section can be completed based on the BB winning, which should be expected originally.

Comparing the first BB and the second BB, the corresponding symbols are common to the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the corresponding symbols of the right reel 32R are different. With such a configuration, when stopping operations aiming at the first BB prize or the second BB prize from the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, it is not possible to determine which BB is won, and the right By stopping the reel 32R, it is possible to determine which BB has been won, and the timing at which the determination is possible can be different depending on the mode of the stop operation. Therefore, the player can select the timing of answering whether or not the player's own selection is correct, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section shift is generated in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set, the advantageous section is set to the CZ mode. That is, even if the winning cannot be established in the single BB winning game and the advantageous section ends, the CZ mode is set when the game is re-shifted to the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the player's selection mistake at the time of winning the single BB from becoming too large, and the advantageous section ends based on each rip overlapping BB winning. In some cases, and in some cases, the advantageous section ends based on each individual BB winning, the advantages of both can be shared.

Further, by providing the independent BB as described above, also in the present embodiment, as a trigger for the transition to the advantageous section, other results other than the first BB and the second BB (first re-game to eleventh re-game, first Assuming that the trigger result is from 1 small combination to the 27th small combination), the configuration has a duplicate result of the trigger result and the BB, and a single result including the trigger result but not including the BB. Then, in the present embodiment, since it is more advantageous to shift to the advantageous section when the BB carry-over flag is set, for example, the setting is changed when the power is turned on, and the advantageous section information and the carry-over information are initialized. When the game is started from the normal section when the processing is performed, the normal mode is set when shifting to the advantageous section based on the overlapping result winning, and when shifting to the advantageous section based on the single result winning. Will be set to CZ mode if the above-mentioned single BB is won before that. That is, in the morning one state, it is possible to start the advantageous section from the CZ mode by winning the single BB before the trigger result. By doing so, it is possible to improve not only the playability at the end of the AT mode but also the playability in the normal section.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, a modification when an operation for changing the setting is performed will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the main processing in this modification.

In the main process in this modification, when it is determined in step S4304 that the setting key has been turned on, the advantageous section information initialization process is executed in step S4305, and then the BB is performed in step S4306. Executes the status information initialization process. In the BB state information initialization process, if the BB state flag is set, it is cleared, and various information for the BB state such as the JAC winning flag, the JAC carry-over flag, each JAC counter, and the BB counter is displayed. It is a process to clear. After that, the carry-over information initialization process is executed in step S4307, and then the winning probability setting process in step S4308 is executed.

Since the processes of steps S4301 to S4303 and steps S4309 to S4317 are the same as the processes of steps S201 to S203 and steps S207 to S215, the description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in this modified example, when the hall is closed during the BB state, it is possible to delete the information that the hall is in the BB state by performing the operation for changing the setting. When the hall is closed during the BB state, the game hall is closed during the bonus AT state, or when the transition permission flag is not set in the AT mode, CZ mode, or normal mode, the BB state is reached. It is conceivable that it was moved to.

In particular, when the store is closed during the bonus AT state, if the information for the advantageous section is deleted but the information indicating the BB state is not deleted, the bonus AT state is restored after the power is turned on. Instead, it will return as a BB state that is not a bonus AT state. The BB state is configured so that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed, and the BB state continues until the maximum number of payouts is reached. However, in the BB state that is not the bonus AT state, the maximum number of payouts is reached. It takes a large number of games to reach it, and it becomes necessary to consume the large number of games without executing the AT mode transition lottery. Then, for example, in the game hall, ending the BB state by the time the store opens becomes a factor that significantly lowers the work efficiency, and if the store is opened while maintaining the BB state, a great disadvantage is given to the player. It could be. In that respect, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience by erasing the information that the BB state is in progress with the erasure of the advantageous section information as described above.

The above modification is not limited to the second embodiment, but can be applied to the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the BB winning information is deleted when the advantageous section information is deleted. On the other hand, the information in the BB state may be deleted.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, a modification relating to the management of the number of ceiling games will be described.

As described above, the number of ceiling games is not counted during the BB state, and even if the BB prize is established in the normal mode, the games in the BB state do not contribute to the number of ceiling games. Then, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated based on the BB winning in the normal mode, and the number of ceiling games is reset by the BB winning in the normal mode ( It was configured (reset in the advantageous section to be transferred after that). In this modification, the number of ceiling games is not reset.

That is, in the section display second process in this modification, when it is determined in step S4406 that the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number of advantageous sections have not been reached, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, in step S4410, It is determined whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. In the case of the BB winning game, in step S4411, it is determined whether or not the completed flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The finished flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the advantageous section has been once finished based on the BB winning in the situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied. If the finished flag is not set, it is determined in step S4412 whether or not the continuation flag is set, and if the continuation flag is not set, the above finished flag is set in step S4413. , Step S4407 to step S4409 for ending the advantageous section are executed. It should be noted that the completed flag is not included in the advantageous section information and is not cleared by the advantageous section ending process. When the completed flag is set in step S4411 or the continuation flag is set in step S4412, the section display second process is terminated as it is without terminating the advantageous section.

In this modified example, the process for ending the advantageous section at the time of winning the BB is not provided.

In the winning result corresponding processing in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88A, the AT start flag is set (step S1702), and the AT mode start processing (steps S1702 to step S1708). At this time, after setting the continuation flag (step S1707), the process of clearing the above completed flag is executed in step S4501. After that, in step S1708, the process of setting the AT start command is executed.

Further, in the processing for the advantageous section transition game in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88 (b), when it is determined in step S3801 that one of the BB carry-over flags is not set, in step S4502. , Determine if the above finished flag is set. If it is not set, the process of setting the number of ceiling games in steps S2106 to S2108 is executed in steps S4503 to S4505. On the other hand, when the completed flag is set, the value of the storage counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is input to the ceiling counter in step S4506, and the value of the storage counter is cleared. After that, the processing for the advantageous section transition game is terminated.

Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, in this modification, the value of the ceiling counter is initialized (cleared to 0) in the initialization process of the advantageous section information in the main process (FIG. 80) when the power is turned on. In this case, the value of the ceiling counter is input to the storage counter. It should be noted that the storage counter is not included in the advantageous section information like the completed flag, and is not cleared by the initialization process of the advantageous section information.

That is, for example, even when the advantageous section information is initialized during the main process (FIG. 80) when the power is turned on and the advantageous section is set to the normal section, the end flag or the storage is used. Since the counter is not initialized, when the game is started and the section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games before the initialization is inherited by the completed flag and the storage counter.

The state in which the number of ceiling games is set will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 89.

It is assumed that the AT mode is entered at the timing of t41 and the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t42, and the bonus AT state is terminated at the timing of t43 without satisfying the continuation condition. In this case, if the BB is won at the timing of t44 immediately after, the advantageous section ends, and the finished flag is set as described above. Then, when re-shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t45, the CZ mode is set. When the CZ mode ends without the transition to the AT mode at the timing of t46, the transition to the normal mode occurs and the number of ceiling games is set.

In the normal mode, if the BB prize is established at the timing of t47 when the transition to the AT mode does not occur, the advantageous section does not end at the timing of BB prize in this modification, so the advantageous section does not end at the timing of t47. It is assumed that the BB state in which the prize is won at the timing of t47 ends at the timing of t48, and then the BB is won again at the timing of t49. In this case, since the completed flag is set as described above, the advantageous section does not end. Therefore, the advantageous section is not re-shifted, and the number of ceiling games is not reset. The number of ceiling games is not counted in the games in the BB state from t47 to t48. However, even in the games in the BB state from t47 to t48, the number of advantageous section games AG is counted.

When the number of ceiling games set at t46 is exhausted at the timing of t50, the shift to AT mode occurs. In this case, the end flag is cleared when the AT mode is started. Then, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t51. At the timing of t52 when the bonus AT state ends, the continuation condition is satisfied, and even if the BB is re-winned at the timing of t53, the advantageous section does not end. Furthermore, in this case, the finished flag is not set either.

If the bonus AT state starts at the timing of t54 and the bonus AT state ends without the continuation condition being satisfied at the timing of t55, the advantageous section ends when the BB is won at the subsequent timing of t56. In this case, the finished flag is set as described above. After that, when re-shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t57, the CZ mode is set.

As described above, according to this modification, when the BB is won after the bonus AT is finished, once the advantageous section is finished, it is advantageous even if a new BB is won by winning a BB in the normal mode. The section does not end and the number of ceiling games is maintained. Therefore, by repeating the BB winning in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent an event such as being unable to reach the ceiling endlessly.

In addition, the completed flag is managed separately from the advantageous section information, and the configuration is such that it is not cleared during the advantageous section information initialization process, so that the advantageous section information initialization process is performed due to setting changes and the like. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing whether or not the setting is changed (whether or not the initialization process is performed) depending on whether or not the advantageous section at the time of winning the BB is terminated before the AT mode is won. More specifically, since the ceiling counter value is saved in the storage counter when the advantageous section information is initialized, the advantageous section is even when the number of ceiling games is reset due to a setting change or the like. After the transition, the number of ceiling games before the reset will be taken over. Therefore, by shifting from the number of ceiling games to the AT mode, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing whether or not the setting has been changed.

As described above, even if the BB prize is established during the normal mode and the number of ceiling games is not reset, the number of ceiling games is not counted in the game in the BB state, and the AT mode No transition lottery will be held. On the other hand, since the number of games in the advantageous section AG is counted, if the AT mode is subsequently entered, the number of games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is the number of games in the BB state in which the prize is won in the middle. It will be reduced by the amount of. In other words, while keeping the premise that establishing a BB prize in the normal mode is basically an act that causes a disadvantageous situation for the player, do not only reset the number of ceiling games. ing. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the balance between the act of accidentally establishing a BB prize during the normal mode and the penalty thereof.

In the initialization process of the advantageous section information, the value of the ceiling counter is saved in the storage counter, but it may not be saved. In this case, in the processing for the advantageous section transition game, it is preferable that the processing for setting the number of ceiling games is performed even if the completed flag is set. In this configuration, if the information for the advantageous section is initialized when the setting is changed, the information about the advantageous section is deleted, and then the number of ceiling games is reset at the time of shifting to the advantageous section, while the completed flag is displayed. Is not cleared during the initialization process, so that if the BB is won after the transition to the advantageous section and before the transition to the AT mode, the end of the advantageous section in the BB winning game is avoided.

The above modification is also applicable to the first embodiment. In this case, the process of step S4410 is changed to a process of determining whether or not any BB end game flag is set, and the BB is changed. In the case of an end game, the end flag is set in step S4413 on the condition that the end flag is not set (step S4412: NO) and there is no continuation flag (step S4413: NO). Good. Even in this case, even if the BB prize is established in the normal mode and the BB end game as the end trigger of the advantageous section occurs again, the above-mentioned completed flag is set, so that the advantageous section is set. It is possible not to terminate it.

Further, the above-mentioned finished flag may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. More specifically, the end flag may be set in the processing for the advantageous section transition game. By doing so, it is possible to treat the completed flag as information for the advantageous section, and clear the completed flag at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section or at the time of initializing the advantageous section information at the time of setting change. It is also possible to clear the ceiling counter at the time of initializing the advantageous section information, and it is not necessary to save the value in the storage counter. In this case, the number of ceiling games is also cleared by initializing the advantageous section information along with the setting change.

In the above modification, when the advantageous section is once ended in the BB winning game, the finished flag is set and the end of the advantageous section is restricted in the subsequent BB winning game. As in the embodiment and the second embodiment, it is assumed that the advantageous section may be terminated in the BB winning game, and the advantageous section is terminated when the completed flag is set in the BB winning game. On the other hand, if the finished flag is not set in the BB winning game, the advantageous section may be terminated.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated when the BB is won in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the type of the BB that terminates the advantageous section is specified in advance. It is configured to be.

<AT continuation setting process>
FIG. 90A is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in the present embodiment. As described above, the AT continuation setting process is a process performed when the AT mode flag is set in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 43).

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4601 whether or not any BB end game flag is set. If it is not a BB end game, the AT continuation setting process is ended as it is. In the case of the BB end game, the next BB lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a in step S4602, and the next BB lottery is executed in step S4603. In the next BB lottery, specify the BB to be won next to the BB state that ends this time, continue the advantageous section if the winning BB is the specified BB, and if the winning BB is different from the specified BB This is a process for designating the next winning BB in the configuration for ending the advantageous section. In the following description, the BB designated in the next BB lottery will also be referred to as "next designated BB".

In the next BB lottery table, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the probability of being set as the next designated BB differs between the first BB and the second BB, and the first BB is set as the next designated BB rather than the second BB. It is easy to do. As shown collectively in FIG. 90 (c), in the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 19), the winning probability of the first BB is about 1 / 20.1, and the winning probability of the second BB is about 6.7. It is one-third, and the second BB is easier to win than the first BB. That is, when comparing the first BB and the second BB, the first BB is likely to be selected as the next designated BB, while the winning probability is low, and the second BB is difficult to be selected as the next designated BB, while the winning rate is high. It is set.

After the next BB lottery is executed in step S4603, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not the result of the next BB lottery is the first BB. When the next designated BB is the first BB, the first BB flag is set in step S4605, and the first BB command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4606. , End the AT continuation setting process. Further, in step S4604, when it is the second BB instead of the first BB, the flag for the second BB is set in the step S4607, and the command for the second BB is set as the output target to the display control device 81 in the step S4608. After executing the process to be performed, the AT continuation setting process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the command for the first BB has an effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB (for example, a character display such as "Aim to win the first BB !!" and a corresponding sound effect). The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the second BB command displays a character such as "Aim for winning the second BB !!" and an effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the sound effect) is performed. In this case, the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB and the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB are different so that the player can identify them.

However, it may not be possible to clearly distinguish between the effect corresponding to the setting of the next designated BB as the first BB and the effect corresponding to the setting of the next designated BB as the second BB. For example, after each effect is determined by lottery, the next designated BB is set as the first BB when the first BB command is received than when the second BB command is received. The effect corresponding to the above may be easily selected, and the effect option by the lottery may include a case where it is not possible to determine which BB is set as the next designated BB. Further, regardless of the lottery result or the next designated BB, an effect that cannot determine which BB is set as the next designated BB may be executed.

In addition, the lottery probability of whether to execute the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB or the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB is set next time. Regardless of the BB, the effect to be executed with a probability corresponding to the probability of the next BB lottery may be selected. That is, the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB is executed with a probability of about 70%, and the effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the second BB is executed with a probability of about 30%. It may be configured to be used. Further, the selection rate effect (specific effect) corresponding to the selection rate in the next BB lottery may be executed. That is, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 may be controlled so that a character display such as "a continuation chance for the first BB !! A continuation pinch for the second BB !!" or a sound effect for the character display is emitted. ..

<Second section display process>
Next, the section display second process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the present embodiment, after executing the remaining number management process in step S2205, it is determined in step S4701 whether or not the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section has been reached. If any of the upper limits has been reached, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704. If it is determined in step S4701 that none of the upper limits has been reached, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set, and if it is set, step S4706 is set. In the normal mode, it is determined whether or not the BB prize has been won before the AT mode is won. If the BB prize is won before the AT mode is won in the normal mode, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704. If the BB prize is won in a mode other than the normal mode, the second section display process is ended as it is without ending the advantageous section. The processes of steps S4701 to S4706 are the same as the processes of steps S2206 to S2211 described above.

If it is determined in step S4705 that the game is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. In the case of a BB winning game, it is determined in step S4708 whether or not the first BB winning game flag is set. In the case of the winning game of the first BB, the flag for the first BB is set in step S4709, and it is determined whether or not the next designated BB is the first BB. When the next designated BB is the first BB and the first BB is won, the section display second process ends after clearing the first BB flag in step S4710. In this case, the advantageous section does not end. On the other hand, if the flag for the second BB is set in step S4709 and the first BB is won even though the next designated BB is the second BB, the flag for the second BB is set in step S4711. After clearing the flag, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S4702 to S4704.

If the first BB winning flag is not set in step S4708 and the winning game is the second BB, the flag for the second BB is set in step S4712, and whether or not the next designated BB is the second BB is determined. judge. If the second BB flag is not set and the next designated BB is the first BB, but the second BB is won, in step S4713, after clearing the first BB flag, the step In steps S4702 to S4704, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed. When the next designated BB is the second BB and the second BB is won, the section display second process ends after clearing the second BB flag in step S4714. In this case, the advantageous section does not end.

<Flow of the game>
The flow of the game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

It is assumed that the AT mode is entered in the situation where the first BB winning is carried over at the timing of t1, and the bonus AT state by the first BB state is started at the timing of t2. When the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t3, the next BB lottery will be held. At t3, the next designated BB is set as the first BB, and the flag for the first BB is set. Then, when the first BB is won at the timing of t4, since the next designated BB and the winning BB match, the advantageous section does not end, and the bonus AT state according to the first BB state starts at the timing of t5. ..

When the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t6, the next BB lottery is similarly performed, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the second BB and the flag for the second BB is set. Then, when the second BB is won at the timing of t7, the advantageous section does not end because the next designated BB and the winning BB match, and the bonus AT state according to the second BB state starts at the timing of t8. ..

When the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t9, the next BB lottery is similarly performed, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the second BB and the flag for the second BB is set. Then, if the first BB is won at the timing of t10, the advantageous section ends because the next designated BB and the winning BB do not match. After that, when shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t11, the shifting to the advantageous section is performed in the situation where the first BB carry-over flag is set, so that the first CZ mode is set.

When the transition to the AT mode occurs at the timing of t12, the bonus AT state according to the first BB state is started from the timing of t13. When the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t14, the next BB lottery is similarly performed, and in this case, the next designated BB is set as the first BB and the flag for the first BB is set. Then, when the second BB is won at the timing of t15, the advantageous section ends because the next designated BB and the winning BB do not match. After that, when shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t16, the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the situation where the second BB carry-over flag is set, so that the second CZ mode is set.

After that, when the second CZ mode ends without shifting to the AT mode at the timing of t17, the mode shifts to the normal mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Set the continuation BB in the AT mode (set the 1st BB flag and the 2nd BB flag), and if the winning BB is the corresponding BB, continue the AT mode without ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, if the BB does not correspond, the advantageous section is terminated and the AT mode is terminated so that the benefit of the bonus AT state as the BB state in the AT mode can be enjoyed depending on the type of the winning BB. In some cases, the AT mode will end and you will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the bonus AT state, raising interest in which BB will be won and realizing an unprecedentedly interesting playability. Is possible.

In this case, the setting of the BB for continuation is performed from the winning of the BB to the end of the BB state, and more specifically, it is performed at the end of the BB state. Assuming that multiple BB wins do not overlap, if the BB for continuation is set between the BB win and the end of the BB state, the BB setting for continuation will be set before the BB win. Will be executed reliably. Then, by setting the continuation BB at the end of the BB, for example, in the case of producing the set continuation BB, the winning BB and the running BB state and the continuation It is less likely to be confused with the BB for use, and the above-mentioned game playability can be preferably enjoyed.

Here, as described above, there is no difference in the maximum number of payouts and the lottery table in the BB state between the first BB state and the second BB state, and the advantage as the BB state is the same. However, since the first BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB, it can be said that the first BB is more advantageous than the second BB as the BB to be elected after the end of the bonus AT state. Then, the set next designated BB is configured so that the player cannot clearly grasp the effect. For example, the above-mentioned selection rate effect ("Continuation chance for the first BB !! Continue pinch for the second BB !!") It is considered that after the end of the bonus AT, it is expected that the first BB will be won rather than the second BB.

On the other hand, even if the first BB is won after the bonus AT state, if the second BB is set as the next designated BB, the advantageous section will end. In this case, the degree of disappointment of the player can be immeasurable.

Therefore, in the above embodiment, when the advantageous section ends based on the first BB winning, the bonus AT is set to the first CZ mode in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is relatively high. After the end of the state, the decrease in game motivation due to the fact that the advantageous section ended even though the 1st BB was won as expected was successfully reduced by the high expectation of pulling back to the AT mode such as the 1st CZ mode. It will be possible to follow.

In terms of the winning probability of each game, the second BB is easier to win than the first BB. Therefore, after the end of the bonus AT state, the probability of winning the advantageous first BB is suppressed, the balance of the advantages is secured, and the joy of winning the first BB can be further improved. It becomes.

The next time, using the result information of the game that triggered the end of the advantageous section, assuming that the advantageous section information is initialized at the end of the advantageous section and the information is reset for each advantageous section. By setting the advantage of the advantageous section of, it is possible to associate continuous advantageous sections with each other.

In particular, by using the winning information of the first BB and the second BB as a carry-over bonus, it is possible to make good use of the existing configuration and associate the advantageous sections with each other without using a complicated configuration. It will be possible.

On the other hand, when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and the advantageous section is completed, if the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established before the advantageous section is re-shifted, the 1st BB carry-over flag or the 2nd BB carry-over flag is established. It becomes an advantageous section transition without a flag, and is set to the normal mode. In this case, the information of the previous advantageous section will not be carried over to the next advantageous section, and the next advantageous section will be in a more disadvantageous state than the case where the information of the previous advantageous section is taken over. Therefore, by preventing such an unfavorable event from occurring, it is possible to encourage the player not to establish the first BB prize or the second BB prize, and to successfully transfer information between advantageous sections. It becomes possible.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the type of the next designated BB selected in the next BB lottery may differ depending on the number of bonus AT states after the transition to the AT mode. FIG. 93A is a flowchart showing the AT continuation setting process in this modification.

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the game is a BB end game, and if it is not a BB end game, the AT continuation setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the BB end game, in step S4802, a process of adding 1 to the consecutive villa counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The consecutive villa counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times of the bonus AT state after the transition to the AT mode. After performing the addition processing of the consecutive villa counter, the next BB lottery table is acquired in step S4803, and then the next BB lottery is performed in step S4804.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the next BB lottery table in this modification is set so that the BB to be set as the next designated BB may differ depending on the value of the consecutive villa counter. For example, if the consecutive villa counters are 1 to 11, the first BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the second BB, and if the consecutive villa counters are 13 to 23, the second BB is more likely than the first BB. It is easy to be set as the next designated BB, and if the consecutive villa counter is 25 or more, it is set so that the ease of being set as the next designated BB is about the same for the first BB and the second BB. Further, in this modification, in addition to the case where either one of the first BB and the second BB is set as the next designated BB, both the first BB and the second BB may be set as the next designated BB. It is set to (ream villa counter = 12, 24).

After the next BB lottery was performed in step S4804, whether or not both the first BB and the second BB were selected as the next designated BB in step S4805 (whether or not the double winning was achieved at the consecutive villa counter = 12, 24). ) Is judged. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4805, the first BB flag is set in step S4806, the second BB flag is set in step S4807, and the common command is output to the display control device 81 in step S4808. After executing the process of setting as, the AT continuation setting process is terminated. In this case, in the section display second process, the AT mode is continued without ending the advantageous section regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won. At the end of the second section display process, not only the BB flag corresponding to the winning BB but also the other BB flag may be cleared. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the common command has an effect corresponding to the next designated BB being set as the first BB and the second BB (for example, character display such as "ream villa confirmed !!" and the corresponding effect. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the sound effect) is performed.

If it is determined in step S4805 that the double winning is not performed, it is determined in step S4809 whether or not the first BB is selected as the next designated BB, and if it is the first BB, the flag for the first BB is determined in step S4810. Is set, and in step S4811, the process of setting the first BB command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the AT continuation setting process ends. If it is the second BB, the second BB flag is set in step S4812, the second BB command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4813, and then the AT. End the continuation setting process.

By doing so, after the end of the bonus AT, which of the first BB and the second BB should be won changes depending on the number of consecutive villas in the bonus AT state, and the game can be diversified.

In particular, as the lottery process for each game, the second BB is easier to win than the first BB, so the second BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the first BB (consecutive villa counter = 13 ~). In 23), the continuation rate of the AT mode is higher than in the situation where the first BB is more likely to be set as the next designated BB than the second BB (ream villa counter = 1 to 11). In this way, it is possible to change the continuation rate of the AT mode simply by changing the selection rate of the next designated BB with the consecutive villa counter, and it is possible to easily improve the interest of the game in relation to the number of consecutive villas. ..

More specifically, in the above configuration, the points to be aimed at are clarified, such as that if the bonus AT state is set up to 11 times in a row, the continuation rate of the AT mode will increase after that. The fun of the game is enhanced, such as the fact that it can be continued up to 11 times, and after that, the game can be played while being immersed in a sense of superiority due to the high rate of consecutive villas.

<Modification 2>
A modified example of the next BB lottery table will be described with reference to the example of FIG.

FIG. 94 (a) shows an example in which the BB ending this time is also involved in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the first BB end game flag is set in the AT continuation setting process, and when the first BB state is ended, the first BB is more likely to be selected as the next designated BB than the second BB, and the second BB end game. When the flag is set and the second BB state is terminated, the second BB is set to be easier to be selected as the next designated BB than the first BB. By doing so, the next designated BB is set in relation to the BB that won the prize by its own stop operation, so even if the game machine is configured to set the next designated BB, the player will set that setting. It is possible to make people feel that they are involved, and it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the game well.

FIG. 94 (b) shows an example in which the set value set by the winning probability setting process is involved in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the higher the set value, the greater the proportion of the second BB selected as the next designated BB. As described above, since the winning probability of the second BB is higher than that of the first BB in the lottery process of each game, the AT mode is set when the second BB is set rather than the first BB is set as the next designated BB. It is likely to continue. That is, as described above, by making it easier for the second BB to be selected as the set value becomes higher, the AT mode continuation rate becomes higher as the set value becomes higher. In this way, even if the winning probability of the first BB or the second BB is not changed by the set value, the ball output rate depends on the set value while associating with the playability that the advantageous section may end based on the BB winning. Can be adjusted well.

FIG. 94 (c) shows an example in which the advantageous section game number AG is involved in the selection of the next designated BB. In this example, the larger the value of the advantageous section game number AG, the greater the ratio of the second BB being selected as the next designated BB. In this slot machine 10, the game playability is based on the premise that the player stays in an advantageous section, and the number of remaining games reaches the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of transition to AT mode so that the transition to AT mode does not occur. It is a configuration that can be reduced. In that respect, by doing the above, if the transition to the AT mode does not occur easily, the second BB can be easily selected as the next designated BB from the beginning of the AT mode, and the so-called fit until the transition to the AT mode is reached. It is possible to make up for.

<Modification example 3>
In the third embodiment described above, after the end of the bonus AT state, the AT mode transition lottery is performed as compensation for the fact that the advantageous section ends even though the advantageous BB that is easily selected as the next designated BB is won. The configuration is such that the transition to the CZ mode, which is easy to win, is generated, but in this modification, the configuration for compensation is changed. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game in this modified example. The advantageous section transition game process is a process executed at the start of the game that caused the transition to the advantageous section (section display first process).

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not any of the BB carry-over flags is set. In the case of the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4902, and it is determined whether or not the first BB carry-over flag is set. When the first BB carry-over flag is set, the process of setting the high-probability command of the setting suggestion effect as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4903. When the second BB carry-over flag is set instead of the first BB carry-over flag in step S4902, the process of setting the low-probability command of the setting suggestion effect as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4904. .. After executing the process of step S4903 or step S4904, the CZ mode flag is set in step S4905, 32 is input to the CZ counter in step S4906, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game ends. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the process for setting the number of ceiling games is performed in steps S4907 to S4909, and then the process for the advantageous section transition game is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the high-probability command of the setting suggestion effect is set to the high-probability state in which the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value occurs with a relatively high probability, and the display that receives the low-probability command of the setting suggestion effect is received. The control device 81 is set to a low probability state in which the setting suggestion effect occurs with a relatively low probability.

That is, in this modification, even if either the first BB or the second BB is won and the advantageous section ends, the same CZ mode is set when shifting to the advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, when the first BB is won and the advantageous section ends, the setting suggestion effect is in a high probability state, and when the second BB is won and the advantageous section ends, the setting suggestion effect is in a low probability state. Will be.

The setting suggestion process of the display control device 81 for executing the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96 (a). The setting suggestion process is, for example, a process performed in the other start effect setting process of step S2411 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 51).

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the lottery result that triggers the execution of the special effect A. The special effect A is one of the suggestion notification effects that suggests the set value, and the cherry A is set as the lottery result that triggers the execution of the special effect A in this modification. That is, in this modification, when the cherry A is won, a special effect A as a setting suggestion notification may occur.

If the lottery result of this game is Cherry A, the process proceeds to step S5002, and the lottery process of the setting suggestion effect for the special effect A is executed. In the lottery process of the setting suggestion effect for the special effect A, as shown in FIG. 96B, if the setting suggestion effect is in a high probability state, the settings 2, 4, and 6 are higher than the settings 1, 3, and 5. It is set to win with a probability. In addition, in the case of the low probability state of the setting suggestion effect, the settings 2, 4 and 6 are won with a higher probability than the settings 1, 3 and 5, but the difference is smaller than that in the high probability state. Is set to.

In step S5003, it is determined whether or not the suggestion lottery in step S5002 has been won, and if it is not won, the setting suggestion process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the special effect A as the setting suggestion effect is executed in step S5004. As the special effect A, for example, an effect is set in which a predetermined character (for example, a boy's character) appears on the auxiliary display unit 65 and a predetermined sound effect (for example, “yes !!”) is emitted.

If it is determined in step S5001 that the lottery result does not trigger the execution of the special effect A, whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the lottery result that triggers the execution of the special effect B in step S5005. Is determined. The special effect B is one of the suggestion notification effects that suggests the set value, and the effect content (display content, sound effect, at least one of the effect generation timings) is different from the special effect A. , Cherry B is set in this modified example as a lottery result that triggers the execution of the special effect B. That is, in this modification, when the cherry B is won, a special effect B as a setting suggestion notification may occur.

If the lottery result of this game is Cherry B, the process proceeds to step S5006, and the lottery process of the setting suggestion effect for the special effect B is executed. In the lottery process of the setting suggestion effect for the special effect B, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), if the setting suggestion effect is in a high probability state, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning. Further, even in the low probability state of the setting suggestion effect, the higher the setting, the more the winner is won, but the difference is set to be smaller than in the high probability state.

In step S5007, it is determined whether or not the suggestion lottery in step S5006 has been won, and if not, the setting suggestion process is terminated as it is. If it is won, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the special effect B as the setting suggestion effect is executed in step S5008. As the special effect B, for example, an effect is set in which a predetermined character (for example, a girl's character) appears on the auxiliary display unit 65 and a predetermined sound effect (for example, "Kyaha !!") is emitted. There is.

As described above, when the advantageous section ends when the first BB is won after the bonus AT state, it is easy to be set as the next designated BB by setting the high probability state of the setting suggestion effect, and the advantageous BB is won. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the advantageous section has ended despite the fact that the set value can be easily predicted and specified. By doing so, it is possible to make a configuration in which compensation is performed within a range that does not easily affect the ball output rate, and it is possible to avoid an event in which the ball output rate becomes too high due to an attempt to increase the compensation. be able to.

In addition, as described above, the configuration in which the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the setting suggestion effect is different depending on the type of the carry-over flag set at the time of transition to the advantageous section is different in other embodiments. May be applied. In addition, when the first BB carry-over flag is set and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the setting suggestion effect is set to the low probability state, and when the second BB carry-over flag is set and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the setting is set. The relationship between the carry-over flag set such as setting to the high probability state of the suggestion effect and the high or low state of the set suggestion effect may be reversed from the above.

Furthermore, depending on the type of carry-over flag set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the configuration is set to either the high probability state or the low probability state of the setting suggestion effect, and then the normal mode is set instead of the CZ mode. May be. That is, in FIG. 95, the normal mode is set regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag, and when the first BB carry-over flag is set, it is set to the high probability state of the setting suggestion effect. When the 2BB carry-over flag is set, it may be set to a low probability state of the setting suggestion effect, and further, regardless of which state is set, the setting process of the number of ceiling games may be performed. In this case, if neither the first BB carry-over flag nor the second BB carry-over flag is set, the configuration is set to a state with a lower probability than the low-probability state when the second BB carry-over flag is set. It may be set to the same state as the low probability state when the second BB carryover flag is set, and the state has a higher probability than the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set. It may be set to the same state as the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set, and it is lower than the high probability state when the first BB carryover flag is set. The configuration may be such that the probability is set to a higher probability than the low probability state when the second BB carry-over flag is set.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, after the bonus AT state, if the second BB is won after the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section can be completed. FIG. 97A shows a part of the lottery table for the normal gaming state in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the index value IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set, and when the index value IV = 26, the second BB winning flag is set, and these index values IV = If a winner is won at the time of 25 or 26, the winning flags other than the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. That is, both the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are configured to be single winnings, not duplicate winnings with other roles.

Regarding the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB, in the present embodiment, the first BB is won with a probability of about 1 in 6.7, and the second BB is won with a probability of about 1 in 20.1. The first BB is set so that it is easier to win than the second BB.

Further, the upper limit payout number set in the present embodiment is different between the first BB state and the second BB state, and the upper limit payout number is set as 140 in the first BB state, while the upper limit payout number is 20 in the second BB state. It is set as a sheet, and the first BB state is set as a state more advantageous to the player than the second BB state.

Further, the reel control of each game is different depending on whether the first BB is won or the second BB is won, and in particular, in a game in which each BB winning flag is set, a BB prize is established. The reel control is different when it is not possible and the winning of other roles cannot be established.

More specifically, it is possible to establish the first BB prize in a game in which the first BB winning flag is set, that is, a game in which the first BB winning game and the subsequent games are carried over, and the result is further lost. When the stop operation is performed at a timing that cannot be achieved, as shown in FIG. 97 (b1), the "bell" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 and the game is stopped. In the present embodiment, the stop mode in which the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2 (the "bell" symbol, the "replay" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol are stopped on the effective line from the left) is a prize. It is not set as a stop mode for use, no transition of game state or re-game is given, and no medal is paid out. That is, the stop mode in which the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2 functions as a so-called reach eye for notifying the first BB winning in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, in the game in which the second BB winning flag is set, that is, the second BB winning game and the game in the carry-over state after that, and the game in which the result is further missed, the second BB winning is established. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the game cannot be performed, as shown in FIG. 97 (b2), the so-called missed stitch that can be stopped even when the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set is stopped.

That is, on the premise that in the normal game state, a stop operation is performed so as not to establish the first BB prize or the second BB prize before the prize permission notification is performed, when the first BB is won. Can grasp that the first BB has been won by stopping the reach, but cannot know that the second BB has been won because the reach does not stop when the second BB is won. .. In other words, in the normal game state, it is predicted that the player has already won the second BB by digesting the number of games equal to or greater than the denominator of the winning probability of the first BB, and the above reach does not stop even after playing for a while. It is also possible to do.

FIG. 97 (c) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous section transition game in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the normal mode is uniformly set regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag at the time of transition to the advantageous section. That is, in the processing for the advantageous section transition game, regardless of the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag, the ceiling game number table is acquired in step S5101, the ceiling game number lottery process is performed in step S5102, and the ceiling game is performed in step S5103. Executes the process of inputting the number to the ceiling counter.

<Second section display process>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the second section display process in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S5201 that the advantageous section is in progress, none of the BB winning flag, each BB carry-over flag, and each BB state flag is set in step S5202, and the current state of affairs. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state, in step S5203, a process of adding 1 to the post-BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-BB counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games after the setting is changed or after the BB state ends, and is cleared by winning any BB.

When a negative determination is made in step S5202, or after the process of step S5203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5204, and a process for managing the number of games and the number of increased / decreased numbers in the advantageous section of steps S5204 to S5207 is executed. The processes of steps S5204 to S5207 are the same as the processes of steps S2202 to S2205.

In step S5208, it is determined whether or not the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section has been reached. If any of the upper limits has been reached, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211. If it is determined in step S5208 that none of the upper limits has been reached, it is determined in steps S5212 and S5213 whether or not the game is a BB winning game before the AT mode is won in the normal mode. In this embodiment, the CZ mode is not provided, and in step S5213, when neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, it is determined that the AT mode is not won in the normal mode. .. In the case of the BB winning game before the AT mode is won in the normal mode, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211. The processes of steps S5208 to S5213 are the same as the processes of steps S2206 to S2211.

If it is determined in step S5212 that the game is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5214 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. In the case of a BB winning game, in step S5215, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned post-BB counter has a value larger than 20. That is, the process of step S5215 is a process of determining whether or not the next BB winning has occurred within 20 games as the predetermined number of games after the end of the BB state.

If the post-BB counter is a value larger than 20, and the BB is won in excess of the predetermined number of games after the end of the BB state, the process of clearing the post-BB counter to 0 is executed in step S5216, and then step S5217. At, it is determined whether or not the BB won this time is the second BB. When the second BB winning game flag is set and the game is the winning game of the second BB, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed in steps S5209 to S5211, and then the second section display process is ended. On the other hand, when the first BB winning game flag is set in step S5217 and the first BB winning game is used, the section display second process is terminated without ending the advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5215 that the BB has been won within 20 games, the process of clearing the counter after BB to 0 is executed in step S5218, and then the section without ending the advantageous section The second display process is terminated. That is, if the BB is won within a predetermined number of games after the end of the BB state, the advantageous section is not ended. That is, after the end of the BB state, when the BB is won beyond the predetermined game, the advantageous section is not ended if the first BB is won, while the advantageous section is ended if the second BB is won.

<Flow of the game>
The flow of the game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

If the AT mode is entered at the timing of t1 which is the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the bonus AT state by the second BB state is started at the timing of t2. As described above, in the second BB state in the present embodiment, the upper limit payout number is 20, and the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t3 when the payout number becomes 20 or more.

When the BB state ends at the timing of t3, the measurement of the counter after BB is started. Then, when the first BB is won at the timing of t4, which is before the counter reaches 20 after BB and within 20 games after the end of the BB state of t3, the first BB is won by stopping the above reach. The player can grasp that. Then, in this case, the advantageous section does not end at the timing of t4, and the bonus AT state according to the first BB state is started from the timing of t5. The maximum number of payouts in the first BB state is 140, and the bonus AT state ends at the timing of t6 when the number of payouts becomes 140 or more.

If the first BB is won at the timing of t7, which exceeds 20 games after the BB state ends at t6, the reach is stopped. And in this case, the advantageous section does not end. Since the reach can appear in the game from winning the first BB to transitioning to the first BB state (t7, t8), it is difficult for the player to overlook the first BB winning. Then, from the timing of t9, the bonus AT state according to the first BB state is started.

If the second BB is won at the timing of t11, which is within 20 games after the BB state ends at the timing of t10, the reach is not stopped. However, in this case, since the BB is won within 20 games after the end of the BB, the advantageous section does not end. Then, the bonus AT state according to the second BB state is started from the timing of t12.

Even if the second BB is won at the timing of t14, which exceeds 20 games, after the BB state ends at the timing of t13, the reach is not stopped. However, in this case, after the end of BB, since the second BB is won over 20 games, the advantageous section ends. In this way, the AT mode is entered at the timing of t1, and the bonus AT state (t2 to t3) due to the second BB state is set as the start of the consecutive villa, and after the BB ends at t13, the second BB is won over 20 games. Up to t14, which is a group of advantageous states due to the consecutive villas in the bonus AT state.

Then, when shifting to the advantageous section at the timing of t15, the setting process of the number of ceiling games is performed as the normal mode. For example, when the AT mode is entered at the timing of t16 when the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the above-mentioned collective advantageous state starts again from the bonus AT state due to the second BB state at the timing of t17.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the first BB is won after the end of the BB state, the advantageous section may not be ended, while if the second BB is won, the advantageous section may be ended, and if the first BB is won, the reach is stopped. By preventing the reach from stopping when the second BB is won, it is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous section will continue depending on the presence or absence of the appearance of the reach after the end of the BB state.

Even if the second BB is won, if the winning is within 20 games after the BB state, the advantageous section is not terminated, so that the AT mode continues regardless of the BB winning within 20 games after the BB state. After 20 games are exceeded, the AT mode continues only for the first BB winning, which is a game playability. By doing so, after the BB state, one of the BBs is expected to be won within 20 games, and if the player does not win within 20 games, the second BB will not be won thereafter, that is, the first BB is won. It is possible to realize a playability that can provide a strong feeling of excitement in each situation according to the number of games after the end of the BB state, such as expecting that.

However, when comparing the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, the 1st BB state has a larger number of medals to be paid out as the end condition, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, the winning is within 20 games after the BB state. However, it is possible to expect the first BB on the advantageous side to be elected, and by increasing the difference in the advantages of both BBs, it is possible to draw greater interest in which BB is to be elected.

Also in this embodiment, if the BB prize is established in the advantageous section as the normal mode that has been re-shifted after the end of the AT mode, the advantageous section ends again. In this case, the normal mode is set again at the time of transition to the advantageous section in the BB state, and the ceiling game number setting process is performed. By doing so, after the AT mode ends in the second BB winning, the gameability of maintaining the second BB winning until the transition to the AT mode is realized is realized. In this case, since the reach eye does not appear as described above in the situation where the second BB is won, the BB prize may be established by the appearance of the reach eye in the game until the transition to the AT mode. It is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the situation has occurred, and preferably realize the game playability of waiting for the second BB prize until the transition to the AT mode.

<Modification example>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of games after the end of the BB state is grasped by the counter after the BB state, but in this modification, it is grasped by the RT state set at the end of the BB state.

FIG. 100A is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game state is the RT state by confirming the presence or absence of the RT state flag in the state information storage area 106c. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the fixed RT state of 20 games is set at the end of the first BB, and the RT state flag is a bonus state process executed in the end game of the first BB state (FIG. When the first BB end game flag is set in 23), it is also set. In addition, when the RT state flag is set, the lottery process for each game uses the lottery table for the RT state to draw a winning combination. Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, the lottery table for the RT state in this modified example is basically the same as the lottery table for the normal game state, for example, the normal rip A to the normal rip B individually. While the winning probabilities of the normal game state and the RT state are different, the total probability of the winning probabilities of the normal lip A to the normal lip B is the same in the normal game state and the RT state. In addition, the total probability of the normal rip A to the normal rip B may be different between the normal game state and the RT state, and the winning probabilities of other re-games may be different. Then, at the end of the second BB state, the RT state is not set.

When it is determined in step S5301 that the RT status flag is set, in step S5302, a process of subtracting 1 from the RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the RT state, and 20 corresponding to the number of games in the fixed RT state is input when setting the RT state at the end of the first BB. In step S5303, it is determined whether or not the RT counter becomes 0 and the number of remaining games in the RT state becomes 0. If the number of remaining games is 0, the process of clearing the RT status flag is executed in step S5304.

If the RT status flag is not set in step S5301, the RT counter is not 0 in step S5303, or after clearing the RT status flag in step S5304, the process proceeds to step S5305. The process of steps S5305-step S5313 is the same as the process of steps S2201 to S2209.

If the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied in step S5310, it is determined in step S5314 whether or not the game is a BB winning game. In the case of a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5315 whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If none of them is set, the process proceeds to step S5311 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section. When any of the flags is set, in this modification, it is determined in step S5316 whether or not the first BB winning game flag is set. When the first BB winning game flag is set and a prize is established in the first BB winning game, the process proceeds to step S5311 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section. If the first BB winning game flag is not set, the section display second process is terminated as it is without ending the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step S5314 that the game is not a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5317 whether or not any of the BB winning game flags is set. If it is a BB winning game, it is determined in step S5318 whether or not it is in the RT state, and if it is not in the RT state, it is determined in step S5319 whether or not it is a second BB winning game. If the game is not in the RT state and is the second BB winning game, the process proceeds to step S5311 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, if it is not a BB winning game, if it is a BB winning game in the RT state, or if it is the first BB winning game in a state that is not in the RT state, the section as it is without ending the advantageous section. The second display process is terminated.

In this modification, the reel control in the RT state is different from the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), in the RT state, even if the first BB is won, if the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the first BB prize cannot be established, The stop mode is not such that the "bell" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 to stop, and the reach stitches do not stop and become missed stitches. That is, in the RT state, regardless of whether the first BB or the second BB is won, it is not possible to determine the presence or absence of the winning from the reach. Then, after the RT state, as in the fourth embodiment, the reach eye can be stopped when the first BB is won, while the reach eye is stopped when the second BB is won. do not do.

Even if the RT state that can shift after the BB state is used as described above, even if the BB winning is within the predetermined number of games or the BB winning exceeds the predetermined number of games after the BB state is completed, if the first BB is won, the advantageous section is selected. While not ending, it is possible to create the same playability as in the fourth embodiment, such as ending the advantageous section when the second BB is won among the BB winnings exceeding the predetermined number of games.

In particular, in this modification, the RT state is set after the first BB state, but the RT state is not set after the second BB state, so that the second BB is won twice in a row during the AT mode. The AT mode (advantageous section) ends at. By successfully applying the existing configuration such as the RT state to the end condition of the advantageous section in this way, it is possible to specify the consecutive villa performance in the bonus AT state with a relatively simple configuration.

Further, in this modification, even if the first BB is won, if the first BB prize is established in the winning game, the advantageous section ends. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably secure the opportunity for the reach eye to appear based on the first BB winning, and it is possible to preferably realize the playability in which the presence or absence of the advantageous section continuation is determined by the presence or absence of the reach eye appearance. be able to.

Then, in this modification, by preventing the reach eye from stopping even if the first BB is won during the RT state, it is expected that one of the BBs will be won during the RT state, and the RT state. In order to make the player expect to win the 1st BB in the middle, in the RT state, regardless of the presence or absence of the BB type, the advantageous section due to the appearance of the reach eye within the range that does not eliminate the playability expected to win the BB It is possible to perform a game that determines whether or not to continue. In other words, if the reach eye can be stopped in the RT state, it is more advantageous to win the first BB, so it is expected that the reach eye will be stopped even in the RT state. This is because the difference in playability after the RT state becomes small, and the playability in the RT state may decrease.

Moreover, even if the first BB has a structure that makes it easier to win than the second BB, there are more opportunities to prevent the reach from appearing when the first BB is won during the RT state, and the BB is won by directing or the like. After the detection, it is possible to keep the interest in the BB type until the end.

<Other Embodiments>
The description is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration composed of a combination of embodiments and modifications, and some or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) Although the number of ceiling games is determined by lottery, a predetermined number of games (999 games) may be uniformly set. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the act of repeating the BB winning in the normal mode in the expectation that a relatively short number of ceiling games will be set.

(2) The set number of ceiling games may be suggested by an effect or the like by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The number of ceiling games is reset by winning a BB prize before winning the AT mode. By doing so, the player can predict and grasp the number of ceiling games by such an effect, and win the AT mode. It is possible to determine whether or not to establish a BB prize and reset the number of ceiling games before.

(3) When shifting to the normal mode, the number of ceiling games is set, but when shifting to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games is set regardless of the mode to be set. May be good. In this case, the ceiling counter may be subtracted even in the CZ mode, and the subtraction speed of the ceiling counter per game in the CZ mode may be faster than that in the normal mode. Further, the number of ceiling games to be set may differ depending on the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag, or the number of ceiling games to be acquired (used) during the setting process of the number of ceiling games may be different. It may be configured to be set as an advantageous section because the number of ceiling games can be easily set.

Further, in the configuration in which the number of ceiling games is set when shifting from the CZ mode to the normal mode, the number of ceiling games may be set by subtracting the number of games (32) in the CZ mode.

(4) By carrying over the JAC winning while in the BB state, the push order bell is won and the first small winning combination is generated when the push order is correct, but the push order bell is won regardless of whether or not the JAC is carried over. As long as the pushing order matches the first small winning combination, the first small winning combination may be established. Also, when the push order bell is won, in addition to the small role group that pays out 1 card and the small role group that pays out 15 cards, the small role that pays out 3 cards more than 1 and less than 15 cards. If a group is set up and the JAC winning is carried over and the pushing order matches the first small winning combination, the first small winning combination will be paid out, and the JAC winning will not be carried over and the pushing order will be established. If is the one that matches the first small winning combination prize or the one that matches the above three small winning combination winnings, the small winning combination winning three cards will be established, and the JAC winning will be pushed in order regardless of whether or not it is carried over. However, if it does not match the first small winning combination prize or the small winning combination winning of the above three cards, the small winning combination winning of one card may be established or may be missed.

(5) By shifting to the BB state, the winning probability of the push order bell may be higher than in the previous state (normal game state or carry-over state).

(6) Among the triggers for the AT mode transition lottery, the specific roles are set as Cherry A to Cherry C, Chance A to Chance C, and Watermelon, and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can avoid BB winning is used. If there is, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine the type of these specific combinations, but for example, a missing result may be provided in which a prize may occur or a miss may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The BB winning may be avoided if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the winning result can be established.

In addition, among the specific roles, the difference in the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery between Cherry A or Cherry B and Cherry C is motivated to determine the type of the specific role (operate in the operation mode for avoiding BB winning). However, the fact that the presence or absence of the AT mode transition lottery is different may be the motivation for determining the type of the specific combination. In addition, it is also a motivation to operate in the operation mode for avoiding the BB prize by configuring a specific role so that the privilege obtained differs depending on the result of winning and obtaining an advantageous privilege as such a privilege. Good.

(7) When the state is shifted to the BB state during the normal mode or the CZ mode in the advantageous section, the push order notification is not generated in the BB state, but it may be configured to occur. In this case, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the occurrence rate of push order notification is lower than that when shifting to the BB state during AT mode. More specifically, when shifting to the BB state during AT mode, the push order notification is most likely to occur. Is likely to occur, and it is preferable to make the push order notification less likely to occur when the state is changed to the BB state during the normal mode.

(8) The winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 100%, but the winning probability may be lower than that. In particular, the advantageous section transition lottery triggered by the first re-game and the 28th small role, which are duplicate winnings with the first BB and the second BB (triggered by the rip overlapping first BB, the rip overlapping second BB, and the reach overlapping BB). In the case of, by making it possible that the winner is not won, the transition to the advantageous section may not occur as a result of these. Then, for example, in the first embodiment, after the advantageous section ends at the end of the bonus AT state, when the first BB with overlapping rips is won, the advantageous section shift occurs in the situation where the first BB carry-over flag is not set. In some cases, the advantageous section transition does not occur in the situation where the first BB carry-over flag is not set. In other words, in the latter case, when shifting to the advantageous section triggered by another small role after that, the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the situation where the first BB carry-over flag is set, and the normal mode is set instead of the CZ mode. Will be done. By doing so, the pullback zone after the bonus AT state is not 100% granted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(9) In the BB carry-over state, the index values IV = 25 and 26 may also be won. In this case, if the index values IV = 25 and 26 are won, the first re-game winning flag is set. On the other hand, it is preferable that the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. In this case, the probability of winning at index values IV = 25, 26 in the BB carry-over state and the probability of winning at index values IV = 25, 26 in another gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) are the same probability. It is preferable that Further, in this case, in order to enable the BB prize in the carry-over state, it is preferable to set so that the result may be missed even in the normal game state.

(10) When the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, the setting is set to the normal mode on the disadvantageous side, but when the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, the CZ on the advantageous side It may be configured to be set to the mode. In this case, even if the transition to the advantageous section occurs during the BB state, the advantageous section may be terminated at the end of the BB. Even with such a configuration, the benefits of the CZ mode cannot be substantially enjoyed because the AT mode transition lottery is not performed and the number of ceiling games is not counted at least during the BB state.

(11) Advantageous section transition In the game processing, the advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred is set by grasping the presence / absence of the BB carry-over flag, but the transition is made by grasping the presence / absence of the BB winning flag. It may be configured to set the advantage of the advantageous section. In this case, in order to distinguish between the BB winning game and the BB carry-over state, if the BB winning flag is set and the BB winning game flag is set, it is determined that the game is a BB winning game and the BB winning game is won. When the flag is set and the BB winning game flag is not set, it may be determined that the BB carry-over state is set.

(12) Advantageous section transition In the game processing, the advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred is set by grasping the presence or absence of the winning information (BB carry-over flag) for the BB whose game state shifts to the BB state. However, the configuration may be such that the advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred is set by grasping the presence / absence of the winning information regarding other lottery results instead of the winning information regarding BB. For example, as a result of the transition of the gaming state not occurring, the cherry winning can be carried over, and when the cherry is moved to the advantageous section in the situation where the information corresponding to the winning of the cherry is stored, the cherry is won. The advantage of the advantageous section to be set may be different depending on the case of shifting to the advantageous section in the situation where the information corresponding to the above is stored.

(13) In the processing for the advantageous section transition game, the advantage of the advantageous section was different depending on whether the BB carry-over flag was set or not, but the advantageous section in the processing for the advantageous section transition game The lottery may be configured to have an advantage of the above, and the lottery result may differ depending on the presence or absence of the BB carry-over flag. For example, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set is set to the CZ mode rather than the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set. The configuration may be such that the probability is high. Further, in the second embodiment, the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set is set to the CZ mode rather than the advantageous section transition in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set. The configuration may be such that the probability is high.

(14) In the processing for the advantageous section transition game, not only the presence / absence of the BB carry-over flag but also other parameters may be used, or other parameters may be used to set the advantage of the advantageous section. As other parameters, for example, a set value, a game result that triggered a transition to an advantageous section, and the like can be considered. More specifically, for example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the CZ mode will be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and for example, the higher the winning probability, the higher the probability that the CZ mode will be set to the advantageous section. It may be configured to increase the probability of

(15) Although the first BB and the second BB are provided as the types of BB, one type of BB may be used, and three or more types may be set. By setting 3 or more types of BB, the advantageous section is ended by winning the BB, winning the BB, or ending the BB state, or the advantageous section is ended by winning the BB different from the next designated BB, while matching with the next designated BB. In a configuration that does not end the advantageous section by winning the BB, the game can be further diversified. In the configuration for setting the next designated BB, the next designated BB may be configured to set two or more types of BBs, or the next designated BB may be configured to set only one type. By increasing the types of BBs to be set as the next designated BB, the probability that the winning BB will match the next designated BB will be increased, and by reducing the types of BBs to be set as the next designated BB, the winning BB will be the next time. The probability of matching the designated BB is low.

(16) Even in the normal mode or the CZ mode, if the AT mode is won, the advantageous section is not ended even if the BB prize is won, but the advantageous section may be ended. By doing so, a more careful BB prize will be required.

(17) Although the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the BB prize is established, the advantageous section may be terminated in the game that shifts to the BB state (the game following the BB prize). In addition, although the configuration is such that the advantageous section ends in the end game of the BB state, the advantageous section is set in the game in which the BB state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state or the RT state (the game following the BB state end game). It may be configured to be terminated. In these cases, the BB winning game flag and the BB ending game flag may be maintained at least until the processing for ending the advantageous section of the next game (the second processing of the section display). More specifically, after the BB winning game. It is preferable that the game is configured to use a flag or the like that allows the CPU 102 to identify that the game is the next game after the BB end game.

(18) Although the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery is configured to shift to the advantageous section, it may be configured to shift to the advantageous section in the next game of the game that wins the advantageous section transition lottery. In this case, if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won with the first BB or the like overlapping the rips as an opportunity, the transition to the advantageous section occurs in the game in which the first BB carry-over flag of the next game is set.

(19) The configuration is such that the transition of the advantageous section can occur during the BB state, but the transition of the advantageous section may not occur during the BB state, and the configuration does not win the transition trigger of the advantageous section during the BB state. May be.

(20) In the operation of the reset switch 72, the operation for canceling the error and the operation for clearing the RAM may be distinguishable, and the reset switch for clearing the error and the reset switch for clearing the RAM are separately provided. May be. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of advantageous section information, carry-over information, and BB state information from being performed by operating the reset switch for canceling an error during business of the game hall. Can be done.

(21) In the transition permission lottery table, it is more difficult to win the transition permission lottery when the number of stocks is 1 or more than when the number of stocks is 0, but the winning probability of the transition permission lottery according to the number of stocks. However, the number of stocks serving as a boundary thereof is not limited to the above, and the boundary may be not one but may have a plurality of stages. For example, the winning probability of the transfer permission lottery may differ depending on whether the number of stocks is 4 or less and 5 or more. Further, the winning probability of the transfer permission lottery may be different depending on whether the number of stocks is 4 or less, 5 or more and 10 or less, and 11 or more. The larger the number of stocks, the easier it is to win the transfer permission lottery. The probability of winning the transition permission lottery may be higher before the BB is won than after the BB is won, or the first BB, which is difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, is easier to win than the second BB. The structure may be such that it is easy to win the lottery.

(22) The eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is configured to be lit not only in the AT mode but also in the CZ mode, but may not be lit in the CZ mode. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that a group of advantageous states is continuing across the advantageous sections by a series of advantageous effects by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

(23) In the configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is turned on even during the CZ mode, the light is turned off when the mode is changed to the normal mode, but the light is kept on even when the mode is changed to the normal mode. May be.

(24) When starting the display of the section display at the time of transition to the CZ mode, when starting the display of the section display at the time of transition to the AT mode, and when the section display and / or other notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) Etc.) may be configured to have different notification modes. More specifically, when the display of the section display is started at the time of transition to the CZ mode, the display is started in a manner that is more difficult for the player to identify than when the display of the section display is started at the time of transition to the AT mode. Alternatively, it is preferable that the display is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to identify.

(25) A configuration in which the presence or absence of the end of the advantageous section at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of BB may be applied to the configuration in which the advantageous section ends at the time of winning or at the end of the BB state. More specifically, for example, if the first BB prize is won, the advantageous section may be terminated, but if the second BB prize is won, the advantageous section may not be terminated, or vice versa. Further, the advantageous section may be terminated at the end of the first BB state, while the advantageous section may not be terminated at the end of the second BB state, or vice versa.

Further, these configurations may be combined, and the relation between the time of winning, the time of winning, and the time of ending the state may be different depending on whether or not the advantageous section ends. More specifically, for example, the advantageous section is not ended in the first BB winning game while the advantageous section is not ended in the second BB winning game, and the advantageous section is not ended in the first BB winning game, while the advantageous section is not ended in the second BB winning game. May be configured to terminate. Further, the advantageous section is not ended in the first BB winning game, the advantageous section is ended in the second BB winning game, the advantageous section is ended in the ending game in the first BB state, and the advantageous section is ended in the ending game in the second BB state. It may be configured not to terminate.

(26) After the end of BB, the end of the advantageous section of the second BB winning game is restricted over a predetermined number of games. For example, the second BB is restricted over a predetermined number of games from the game in which Cherry A is won as a specific result. The end of the advantageous section of the winning game may be restricted, or the end of the advantageous section of the second BB winning game may be restricted for a predetermined number of games after the end of the RT state.

(27) The trigger of the advantageous section transition lottery is all the results that can be won in the normal gaming state, etc., but this may be changed. For example, while the push order bell serves as a trigger for the advantageous section transition lottery, various replays may not be a trigger, and the watermelon serves as a trigger, while the push order bell and various replays do not serve as a trigger. It may be configured. In these cases, a combination in which the winning probability does not change in various gaming states or a combination in which the winning probability is common regardless of the set value may be used as a trigger for the advantageous section transition lottery.

(28) Although the description has been made on the premise of a gaming machine capable of executing only a 3-bet game, a 2-bet game or a 1-bet game may also be executed. In this case, for example, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game can be executed, and the 1st BB and the 2nd BB can be won in the 2-bet game, and the 1st BB and the 2nd BB cannot be won in the 3-bet game. In addition, the first BB prize and the second BB prize can be established in the 2-bet game, and the first BB prize and the second BB prize cannot be established in the 3-bet game. In addition, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the 3-bet game than in the 2-bet game. In this way, the AT mode transition lottery is won in the 3-bet game, and after the AT mode transition, the game is switched to the 2-bet game to play the bonus AT state according to the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state. Can be done. In this case, it is possible to avoid unintentionally establishing the first BB prize or the second BB prize (ending the advantageous section) in the 3-bet game.

(29) The next BB lottery is executed at the end of the BB state, but at least between the BB winning game and the end of the BB state, it is possible to complete the setting of the next designated BB before the next BB winning. Is.

(30) The next BB lottery may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, for example, if the second BB on the side that is easy to win in the lottery process of each game is set as the next designated BB, the possibility that the advantageous section will continue is higher, but in the previous next BB lottery, the first If the first BB is set as the next designated BB instead of the 2BB, a lottery will be held to determine whether to set the second BB as the next designated BB again in the next BB lottery, while the second BB will be set in the previous next BB lottery. When is set as the next designated BB, the next BB lottery may not be performed later, or the lottery for whether or not the double winning may be performed may be executed.

(31) In the configuration in which the next designated BB is set using the consecutive villa counter, both the first BB state and the second BB state in the AT mode are not limited to the configuration to be measured by the consecutive villa counter, for example. The number of times in the first BB state may be added to the consecutive villa counter, while the number of times in the second BB state may not be added to the consecutive villa counter.

(32) When starting the AT mode, the AT mode is started after waiting for the normal rip A to the normal rip C to be won, but the AT mode may be started regardless of the lottery result. In this case, for example, in the AT mode start game, based on the operation of the start lever 41, a predetermined symbol combination is temporarily stopped during the invalid period before the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective. It may be configured. The predetermined symbol combination includes, for example, a "BAR" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol that are stopped at the upward-sloping line L5 when the second re-game winning is established in each of the above embodiments. A symbol combination, a symbol combination such as a "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, or a "BAR" symbol (Fig. 12) may be applied, and which symbol combination is temporarily stopped depends on the continuation rate. It may be configured to be used.

(33) The section display first process that causes the transition to the advantageous section is executed in the lottery process as the start of the game, and the section display second process that ends the advantageous section is set as the end of the game. Although the description has been made on the premise that the execution is performed within the reel control process, the transition timing to the advantageous section and the end timing of the advantageous section may be different from the above. For example, the process of causing the transition to the advantageous section may be executed at the end of the game, and the process of ending the advantageous section may be executed at the start of the game, and both processes are executed at the start of the game. It may be a configuration, or any process may be executed at the end of the game. In these cases, various processes are performed within the range in which the above-described effects can be obtained when the advantageous section is terminated when the BB is won, the advantageous section is terminated when the BB is won, or the advantageous section is terminated when the BB is completed. You should change it.

(34) In the second section display process, a process of determining whether or not the game is a BB winning game that triggers the end of the advantageous section, and a process of determining whether or not the game is a BB winning game that triggers the end of the advantageous section. In the configuration having BB winning game, the judgment processing on the BB winning game side is prioritized (first) on the judgment processing on the BB winning game side, so that the advantageous section ends if the BB winning game is won. Although it is possible to avoid it, the determination process on the BB winning game side may be prioritized (first) over the determination process on the BB winning game side.

(35) Although the push order notification is generated when the AT mode flag is not set, the push order notification may be generated even if the AT mode flag is not set if it is an advantageous section. .. In this case, for example, the AT mode may be configured to generate push order notification more easily than the normal mode, and the AT mode may be configured to generate push order notification more easily than the CZ mode. Further, the CZ mode may be configured in which the push order notification is more likely to occur than in the normal mode, and the push order notification occurrence rate may be about the same in the normal mode and the CZ mode. In these cases, when the push order notification occurs in the normal mode or the CZ mode, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display may be started.

(36) By executing the first BB state and the second BB state during the AT mode, it is possible to expect an increase in medals as a bonus AT state, but the push order is notified without causing a transition to the BB state. A so-called pseudo-bonus state in which a medal increase can be expected depending on the presence or absence may be set, and a configuration in which a medal increase can be expected depending on the bonus AT state due to these BB states and the pseudo-bonus state may be used. As the pseudo-bonus state, for example, a configuration in which push order notification is likely to occur over a predetermined number of games and a configuration in which push order notification is generated a predetermined number of times can be considered. Then, in this case, regardless of whether or not the JAC winning is carried over, the first small winning combination may be established by operating in the pushing order corresponding to the first small winning combination when the push order bell is won.

(37) In a game in which a first BB prize or a second BB prize is possible, a freeze effect may be generated in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period of time. In this case, for example, the freeze effect may be generated when a predetermined number (two) of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the freeze effect may be generated before the stop. May be good. By generating such a freeze effect, it is preferable that the transition permission condition is not satisfied and the BB prize is established even though the bonus AT state is not started when the BB prize is established. Can be avoided. In this case, a common freeze effect may be generated regardless of the success or failure of the transition permission condition, or if the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the freeze effect is generated while the transition permission condition is satisfied. If so, the configuration may be such that the freeze effect is not generated. The predetermined period in which the freeze effect is performed is preferably a period that does not interfere with the smooth operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R make a constant speed orbit (a predetermined period) The operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be invalidated with a period of 2 laps) as a predetermined period.

(38) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate and setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. However, depending on the set value, the ball ejection rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the ball output rates of some set values may be the same, such as the ball output rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the ball output rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, a predetermined amount of balls is ejected in a short time and a predetermined amount is decreased in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than in settings 1 and 5 to increase a predetermined amount. It may take less time than the settings 1 and 5 to reduce the predetermined amount, and the setting 6 may have a configuration in which the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(39) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(40) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using rotating game machine, the ball ejection may be adjusted, and the above inventions may be applied. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and entry into a predetermined ball entry portion. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball ratio is high or low, the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 as the high ball entry state.

In a pachinko machine, for example, the actual increase / decrease number of balls, which is the difference between the number of game balls launched from the launcher and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into a predetermined entry portion, is calculated in a predetermined time. The number of increase / decrease in the number of game balls per unit time divided may be used for the above-mentioned ball ejection adjustment. Then, a plurality of predetermined times may be provided, and the number of increase / decrease in the number of game balls per unit time may be calculated for each of a long predetermined time and a shorter predetermined time, and these may be used for ball ejection adjustment.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of predetermined lottery conditions. It is known that a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet on a slot machine. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. When the result corresponds to the above-mentioned result, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). "Here, in the gaming machine illustrated above. It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
It has a specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur.
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode or CZ mode in the advantageous section), a second specific state (AT mode in the advantageous section), and a third specific state (bonus AT state) are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB winning or second BB winning) in the first specific state, and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. In addition, the first transition means (function of executing the process of terminating the advantageous section in the BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101) for terminating the specific state and shifting to the normal state.
In the second specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (first BB winning or second BB winning) and the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the third specific state is reached. A second migration means (a function of executing AT continuation setting processing by the main controller 101) that can be migrated, and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, if the special result winning is in the first specific state, the specific state itself including the first specific state ends and shifts to the normal state, while the special result winning is in the second specific state. If there is, it shifts to the third specific state. Since these first specific state, second specific state, and third specific state are states in which a specific event that is advantageous to the player can occur, the special result winning depends on whether the special result prize is the first specific state or the second specific state. Whether or not the state in which a specific event can occur continues or not will differ. By doing so, the lottery of each game is performed based on the operation of the start operation means, and the combination of patterns corresponding to the lottery result is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means to obtain the privilege corresponding to the winning. While assuming the game of a slot machine, it is possible to change not only the benefits corresponding to the prize but also the advantage regarding the presence or absence of the occurrence of a specific event, depending on the timing (state) at which the prize is established. Become.

More specifically, as a player who desires the occurrence of a specific event, he / she wants not to win a special result in the first specific state, and even if he / she wins a special result, he / she stops so as not to win a special result. It is considered that the operating means is operated, and by establishing the special result prize in the second specific state, it becomes possible to continue the specific state in which the specific event can occur while enjoying the benefits of the special result prize. ..

Moreover, by operating so as to establish the special result prize in the second specific state, although it is a specific state in which a specific event can occur, a transition from the second specific state up to that point to the third specific state occurs. Therefore, depending on the difference in the advantage between the second specific state and the third specific state, it is possible to enjoy a benefit different from the benefit of winning the special result.

That is, the special result prize is a trigger for the end of the specific state and a trigger for the transition to the state inside the specific state, and the player's advantage greatly differs depending on which trigger is used. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention when establishing the special result prize, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game using such a configuration.

Feature A2. The configuration is such that the specific event is more likely to occur in the third specific state than the second specific state, or the trigger event (push order bell winning) that triggers the occurrence of the specific event is more likely to occur. The gaming machine according to the feature A1.

According to the above configuration, by establishing the special result prize in the second specific state, it is possible to bring about the merit of not only continuing the specific state but also improving the occurrence rate of the specific event. Therefore, the difference in advantage between the case where the special result prize is established in the first specific state and the case where the special result prize is established in the second specific state becomes more remarkable, and the special result prize is established. It is possible to enhance the effect of improving the degree of attention.

It should be noted that the above configuration can also be expressed as "the third specific state is more advantageous to the player than the second specific state".

Feature A3. It is provided with a third transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state.
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the third transition means can shift to the first specific state when shifting from the normal state to the specific state.

According to the above configuration, if a special result prize is established during the first specific state, the normal state is entered, but when the normal state is re-shifted to the specific state, the first specific state is set and the first specific state → The normal state → the first specific state will loop. In other words, when the goal of the game is to shift to the third specific state, if a special result is awarded during the first specific state, the transition to the third specific state will not occur, but the transition to the third specific state will occur. Even the second specific state that can be made cannot be transferred. By doing so, it is possible to make the person more interested in whether or not the special result prize should be established, and to make it difficult to establish the special result prize during the first specific state.

Feature A4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
The specific event is a feature A1 to A3 characterized in that at least the lottery result by the lottery means is the aspect result and the aspect notification is performed by the aspect notification means. The game machine according to any one of.

As in the above configuration, the difference in profits such as whether the first operation result winning or the second operation result winning is established when the aspect result is won is applied to a specific event with a configuration that can be realized depending on the presence or absence of the aspect notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the advantage different without changing the lottery probability (particularly the probability of winning the mode result) by the lottery means. That is, it is possible to change the occurrence rate of a specific event simply by changing the presence or absence of mode notification, and the gaming machine of feature A1 that changes whether or not a specific state in which a specific event can occur is terminated by winning a special result. Can be realized without the need for major changes from the existing configuration.

Feature A5. The lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (main) that can shift to a special state in which the probability of becoming a role (JAC) is higher than the previous state, and terminate the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition. It is equipped with a function to execute bonus state processing by the control device 101).
The third specific state is the second specific state and the special state.
The specific event is more likely to occur in the second specific state and the special state than in the first specific state and the special state. A1 The gaming machine according to any one of A4.

According to the above configuration, when the special result winning is established, the transition to the special state in which the probability of winning the special combination is high, and the third specific state is the second specific state and the special state. Since the specific event is more likely to occur in the second specific state and the special state than in the first specific state and the special state, the special state is assumed to be the first specific state. Even if it is executed, it will only make it easier to win a special role. That is, by adopting the above configuration, the difference in advantage between the case where the special state is executed in the first specific state and the case where the special state is executed in the second specific state can be determined by the specific event in the special state. It can be realized by utilizing the difference in the occurrence rate. Therefore, the playability of feature A1 can be realized by using a relatively simple configuration such as a change in the winning probability during a special state as a so-called bonus state.

Feature A6. In the game in which the special role is won, if the pattern combination corresponding to the special role does not stop at the effective position, the special role information corresponding to the winning of the special role can be stored. It is equipped with a storage means (a function of executing a process of setting a JAC carry-over flag by the main control device 101).
The specific event does not occur in a situation where the special role information is stored by the special role storage means, but does not occur in a situation where the special role information is not stored by the special role storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature A5.

According to the above configuration, in the case of shifting to the special state and winning the special role, if the special role winning is established, the specific event does not occur. That is, even if the player shifts to the special state in the second specific state, if the special role prize is established when the special role is won, the benefit of the specific event cannot be enjoyed. By doing this, how to prevent the winning of a specific role is the key to the game, and conversely, if you do not want to enjoy the benefits of a specific event, you can allow it. Therefore, it is possible to make the game playability that makes the best use of the so-called slot machine, such as establishing a prize corresponding to the lottery result based on its own operation.

Feature A7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
The specific event occurs in a situation where the special role information is stored by the special role storage means and the mode result is won, while the special role information is stored by the special role storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the gaming machine does not occur in the situation where the above-mentioned aspect result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of a specific event by utilizing a specific combination that makes it easier to win by shifting to a special state. In this case, since it is not necessary to change the winning probability of the mode result between the special state and the non-special state, it is possible to simplify the lottery system of each game. For example, the winning is performed according to the gaming state. In a configuration in which a predetermined lottery is performed using a result with no difference in probability, it is possible to use such a mode result as a lottery trigger for the predetermined lottery.

Feature A8. In the game in which the special result is won, if the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result information (BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the winning of the special result can be stored. It is equipped with special result storage means (a function to execute the process of setting the corresponding BB carry-over flag by the main control device 101).
In the transition lottery from the first specific state to the second specific state and the transition process from the first specific state to the second specific state, the special result information is stored by the special result storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that it can be executed in.

According to the above configuration, when the special result winning is established in the first specific state, the specific state ends, and when the special result winning is established in the second specific state, the game shifts to the third specific state. The transition lottery and the transition process from the first specific state to the second specific state, which are the key points, are executed in a situation where the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result is stored. In other words, even if a special result is won in the normal state or the first specific state, the prize is not immediately won, and the special result prize is established after the transition from the first specific state to the second specific state occurs. Become a sex. By doing so, it is possible to cause the transition to the third specific state more smoothly than waiting for the special result winning after the transition to the second specific state.

Feature A9. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result that enables the next game to be executed without using a new game medium is set.
At least in the normal gaming state including the situation of the second specific state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the re-game result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the special result in the normal game state is set to be higher than the probability of winning the re-game result, and it is relatively easy to win. By doing so, it is possible to promptly shift to the third specific state in the second specific state.

Feature A10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific combination (cherry C), when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the first pattern combination stops at the effective position. When the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination stops at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specific combination (cherry A) different from the first specific combination, when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the effective position is reached. The first pattern combination and the third pattern combination different from the second pattern combination are stopped, and when the operation is performed at the second timing, the second pattern combination is stopped.
The description according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in order to determine whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific combination or the second specific combination in the stop mode, it is necessary to operate at the first timing. It is possible to avoid winning a special result by operating at one timing. By doing so, in the playability where the timing of establishing the special result prize is important, the operation for discriminating the specific role can be performed without forcing the operation only for avoiding the special result prize. If this is the case, it is possible to avoid an event in which a special result prize is unintentionally established.

It should be noted that the above configuration is as follows: "When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specific combination, when the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the first timing, the third specific combination is set to the effective position. While it is possible to stop the corresponding third pattern combination, when the operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the third pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. It may be a configuration such as "cannot be done", or a configuration having the configuration in combination with the above configuration.

Further, the above configuration includes "a second specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the second specific state based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The probability of winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means or the presence or absence of execution of the transition lottery is determined by the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific combination and the second specific combination. By having a configuration such as "it differs depending on the case", the significance of operating at the first timing can be further enhanced, and accordingly, the possibility of avoiding an unintended special result winning can be increased. Can be done.

Feature A11. When the state shifts to the normal state via the second specific state and then shifts to the first specific state, the special pattern combination stops at the effective position until at least the transition to the second specific state. Also characterized in that it is provided with end limiting means (a function of executing a process of setting a completed flag in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101) for restricting the transition to the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of A10.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the second specific state, the transition to the normal state, and the transition to the first specific state, even if the special result prize is established until the transition to the second specific state occurs again. The transition to the normal state is restricted. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the number of ceiling games until the transition to the second specific state is set when transitioning from the normal state to the first specific state, before the transition to the second specific state It is possible to prevent the event that the number of ceiling games is reset by mistakenly establishing a special result prize.

Feature A12. The second specific lottery means (a function of executing the AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing the transition lottery to the second specific state, and
When the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means is won, the second specific transition means (function for executing the process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101) to shift to the second specific state and
With
In the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, the special pattern combination is placed at the effective position before the transition to the second specific state by the second specific transition means. When stopped, it is equipped with a means for restricting the transition to the normal state (a function of executing a process that does not end the advantageous section when a BB prize is won in a situation where the AT mode winning flag is set by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, if the special result prize is established before the transition, the transition to the normal state is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally establishing a special result prize even though he / she has won the transition lottery, and the disadvantage suffered by the player becomes too large.

Feature A13. In the first specific state, after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, the special pattern combination is placed at the effective position before the transition to the second specific state by the second specific transition means. When stopped, a means for restricting the transition to the third specific state (execution of a process for preventing the bonus AT state from being started when a BB prize is won in a situation where the AT mode flag by the main control device 101 is not set. The gaming machine according to feature A12, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, if a special result prize is established before the transition after winning the transition lottery by the second specific lottery means, the transition to the normal state does not occur, but the transition to the third specific state does not occur. In this way, it is possible to equalize the interests of the player who can detect the transition to the second specific state at an early stage and the player who does not.

Feature A14. A third transition means for shifting from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main controller 101) and
Special result storage means (a function of executing the process of setting the corresponding BB carry-over flag by the main control device 101) capable of storing the special result information (BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the winning of the special result, and
With
The third specific result means is a case where the special result information is stored by the special result storage means and a case where the special result information is not stored, and a case where the normal state is changed to the first specific state. The game according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that it is provided with means (a function of executing a process for an advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101) capable of differently different advantages of the state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, assuming that the special result winning is established based on the special result winning, the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result is deleted, it is usually based on the special result winning. After the transition to the state, the advantage of the first specific state differs depending on whether or not the special result is won again before the transition to the first specific state and whether or not the special result information is stored. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the special result winning, and the special result information corresponding to the special result winning is stored or stored at the time of transition to the first specific state. It is possible to realize playability by using a configuration that prevents the memory from being played.

Feature A15. A special state in which the game state is shifted to a special state (bonus state) based on the stop of the special pattern combination at the effective position, and the special state is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined special end condition. It is equipped with a state means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101).
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the third transition means shifts to the first specific state before the special end condition is satisfied in the special state.

According to the above configuration, when the state shifts to the special state and the normal state based on the special result winning, the state shifts to the first specific state before the end of the special state. Then, assuming that the special result will not be won again during the special state, when shifting to the first specific state during the special state, the transition will be in a situation where the special result information corresponding to the special result winning is not stored. Become. For example, assuming that the configuration is disadvantageous in the first specific state transition in a situation where the special result information is not stored, if the special result prize is established during the first specific state, the normal state is entered and then the special state is established. If you move to the first specific state again during the process, you will always move to the disadvantageous first specific state, and conversely, it will be advantageous in the situation where the special result information is not stored. With the configuration, when the player shifts to the first specific state again during the special state, the player always shifts to the advantageous first specific state, and the advantage when the special result prize is established during the first specific state. Can be made constant.

Feature A16. A special state in which the game state is shifted to a special state (bonus state) based on the fact that the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, and the special state is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined special end condition. State means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main control device 101),
When the special state ends and a predetermined specific end condition is satisfied, the fourth transition means (the second section display by the main control device 101) that terminates the specific state and shifts to the normal state. (A function to execute the process to end the advantageous section in the BB end game) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A14 or the feature A15, which comprises the feature A14 or the feature A15.

According to the above configuration, it is clear that the case where the special state ends is a situation in which the special result information of winning the special result is not stored, and the specific state ends in such a situation. By doing so, it is highly possible that the special result information is not stored in the situation when the transition to a specific state is performed after that. That is, when the specific state is terminated by the fourth transition means and then re-transitioned to the specific state, it is possible to facilitate a situation in which the special result information is not stored. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the configuration of the feature A14 whose advantage changes depending on the presence or absence of the special result information at the time of transition to the specific state, the first specific state in the situation where the special result information is not stored is successfully set. It becomes possible.

Feature A17. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the fifth transition means for terminating the specific state and shifting to the normal state based on the condition that the predetermined specific end condition is satisfied ( The gaming machine according to feature A14 or feature A15, which comprises a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in a BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if the specific state is terminated when the special result is won, and then the special result prize is not established by the time of re-transition to the specific state, the special result is won at the time of the re-transition. The special result information of what you are doing remains memorized. That is, when the specific state is terminated by the fifth transition means and then re-transitioned to the specific state, it is possible to facilitate the situation where the special result information is stored. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the configuration of feature A14 whose advantage changes depending on the presence or absence of special result information at the time of transition to the specific state, the transition to the first specific state in the situation where the special result information is stored can be performed. It will be possible to set it well.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
When a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state is provided. Prepare,
The specific transition means
When shifting to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, the first specific transition means for shifting to the first specific state (normal mode) (process for advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of setting the normal mode in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is set) and
When shifting to the specific state in the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, the second specific transition means for shifting to the second specific state (CZ mode) which is more advantageous for the player than the first specific state. (A function to execute the process of setting the CZ mode in the situation where the BB carry-over flag is not set in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101).
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a so-called slot machine game in which a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means and a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the special result as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state as a privilege, a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur are set, so the special state, the specific state, and the normal state are set. Diversification of games using states can be achieved.

In addition, there are specific states in the first special situation in which the special result information of winning the special result is stored and the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored and the special result is not won. The advantage of the specific state when shifting to is different, and when the transition to the specific state occurs in the first special situation, it shifts to the first specific state, while the transition to the specific state occurs in the second special situation. When it occurs, it shifts to the second specific state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, it is necessary to shift to the specific state in the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, and whether or not the special result information is stored and the transition timing to the specific state. It is possible to realize a new playability by utilizing the relationship with. In this case, for example, if the transition to the specific state can be generated before the special result information is stored, the second specific state is set, and the special result winning and the transition to the specific state are triggered. It is also possible to realize playability by utilizing the relationship with the result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention of the game.

In particular, by making the specific state that shifts in the first special situation where the transition to the special state can occur disadvantageous, the advantage increases due to the overlap between the special state as the so-called bonus state and the occurrence of the specific event. It is possible to suppress passing, and it is possible to improve the soundness of the game. Moreover, by making it advantageous to shift to a specific state in the second special situation where the transition to the special state cannot occur, the transition to the specific state occurs before the special result is won. Letting it play is the heart of the game, and it will be possible to realize a novel gameplay that has never been seen before.

Feature B2. A front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the game machine body,
A first operating means (setting key insertion hole 73) that can be operated by opening the front door and can perform a predetermined first setting of the game machine by operating the door.
With
When the predetermined first setting is performed based on the operation of the first operating means, the information of the specific state is deleted.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein when the information of the specific state is deleted based on the operation of the first operating means, the special result information is not deleted.

According to the above configuration, when the manager or the like of the game hall opens the front door and makes a predetermined first setting of the game machine, the information that the game machine is in the specific state is deleted. In this case, if the special result information that the special result has been won is also deleted, the state after the predetermined first setting is the normal state and the special result information is not stored in the second specific state. It becomes a situation, and then, when it shifts from the normal state to the specific state, it shifts to the second specific state which is advantageous. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the special result information that the special result has been won is retained without being deleted, the state shifts to the second specific state after a predetermined setting such as the morning one state is made. It is possible to avoid a second specific situation that is easy to do.

Feature B3. A setting means (by the main control device 101) that has a setting value of a plurality of stages capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and sets a set value of one of the set values of the plurality of stages. Equipped with a function to execute the winning probability setting process)
The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the setting value can be set by the setting means as the predetermined first setting based on the operation of the first operating means.

According to the above configuration, when the manager of the game hall performs the operation of changing the set value every day, the information of the specific state is deleted, but the special result information is not deleted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first state in the morning from becoming the second specific situation in which it is easy to shift to the second specific state due to daily work.

Feature B4. Equipped with a power switching means (power switch 71) for switching between the power-on state and the power-off state of the game machine.
When the power supply switching means switches between the power-on state and the power-off state, and when the operation of the first operating means is not performed, the information that the specific state is obtained and the special result. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the information is not erased.

According to the above configuration, the information that the specific state is in the specific state is not erased only by turning the power of the game machine on / off. That is, when the first operating means is operated when the power is turned on / off, the information indicating that the specific state is deleted and the special result information is not erased, while when the first operating means is not operated when the power is turned on / off, the specific state is deleted. The information that is and the special result information are not deleted. By doing so, the manager of the game hall can adjust which information is to be deleted or retained.

Feature B5. A front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the game machine body,
A second operating means (reset switch 72) that can be operated by opening the front door and can perform a predetermined second setting of the game machine by operating the door.
With
When the predetermined second setting is performed based on the operation of the second operating means, the information of the specific state is deleted.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein when the information of the specific state is deleted based on the operation of the second operating means, the special result information is deleted.

According to the above configuration, when the manager or the like of the game hall opens the front door and makes a predetermined second setting of the game machine, the information that the game machine is in the specific state is deleted. In this case, since the special result information that the special result has been won is also deleted, the state after the predetermined second setting is the normal state and the special result information is not stored in the second specific situation. After that, it will shift to the second specific state, which is advantageous when shifting from the normal state to the specific state. The above configuration allows such an event to occur, and by providing the above configuration, it is possible to meet various needs, and information on a specific state or special result information. It is also possible to initialize to the factory default state in which none of them is stored.

Feature B6. When the special state ends in a situation where a predetermined specific end condition (without a continuation flag) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific end means (main control device 101) capable of terminating the specific state. Any one of features B1 to B5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section when the BB state ends in a situation where the continuation flag is not set in the section display second process). The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the special state ends in the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state also ends and shifts to the normal state. In this case, when shifting to a specific state immediately after the end of the special state, there is a high possibility that it is before winning the special result, which is advantageous as a transition to the specific state in the second specific situation in which the special result information is not stored. It shifts to the second specific state on the other side. That is, although the specific state ends once, it then shifts to the advantageous second specific state, so that the specific state ends with a lingering finish, and it is possible to create playability using such a configuration. It can be used as a boost to the decision-making to continue the game, as compared with the configuration in which the game ends easily.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the probability that the specific transition condition is satisfied in the normal state is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result.

According to the above configuration, when the state shifts to the normal state at the end of the special state, there is a high possibility that the transition to the specific state will occur before the special result is won. By doing so, as a specific state transition in the second specific situation in which the special result information is not stored, it becomes easy to shift to the second specific state on the advantageous side.

Feature B8. It is provided with a specific effect executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an effect in AT mode and CZ mode) capable of executing a specific effect in the specific state by a predetermined effect means.
When the specific state is terminated by the specific end means, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect at least in the next game of the game in which the special state ends (CZ following the AT mode end notification effect). The game machine according to feature B6 or feature B7, wherein a mode start effect is performed).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state ends at the end of the special state, the specific effect in the specific state is continued in the next game as well. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to realize that the specific state is once ended, and it is possible to strongly recognize the impression that the specific state before and after the end is a series of states.

Feature B9. At least the first control device (main control device 101) having the lottery means and
A second control device (display control device 81) having the specific effect executing means,
With
In the case of the specific state, the first control device starts the specific state notification when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and ends the specific state notification when the specific state ends. Equipped with a specific state notification means (eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator) capable of
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein when the specific state is terminated by the specific end means, the specific state notification by the specific state notification means is terminated.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp that the specific state has ended by confirming the specific state notification by the specific state notification means. By doing so, it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent acts utilizing the continuity of the specific state, while expecting the effect of the effect as if the specific state is continued by the specific effect.

Feature B10. When the special state ends in a situation where the specific end condition (without the continuation flag) is not satisfied in the specific state, the specific state continues without ending the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of B9.

According to the above configuration, if the specific end condition is not satisfied, the specific state continues, and the special state in the specific state can be implemented again. By doing so, the game property of repeating the special state in the specific state is realized until the specific end condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature B11. When the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, a means capable of terminating the specific state (execution of a process of terminating an advantageous section in the BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to do) and
When the specific state ends based on the stop of the special pattern combination at the effective position, the means for limiting the termination of the specific state by the specific end means when the special state ends ( (Function to execute the process of setting the migrated flag by the main controller 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific state can be terminated even when the special result prize is won, if the specific state is to be further terminated at the end of the special state based on the special result prize, the specific state is temporarily entered during the specific state. Even if migration occurs, it will be troublesome twice, and if it has not transitioned to a specific state, it can cause a processing error. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the specific state is terminated at the time of transition to the special state, the termination of the specific state at the end of the special state is restricted so as to be inconvenient as described above. Will not occur.

Feature B12. The special result storage means is configured to store the special result information based on the fact that the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the special result is won.
In the game in which the special result is won, the specific transition means shifts to the specific state before the special result information is stored (the first process of displaying the section for the advantageous section transition is at the start of the game. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, characterized in that (there is a set of carry-over flags at the end of the game).

According to the above configuration, when shifting to a specific state in a game in which a special result is won, the game shifts to a specific state before the special result information is stored, which is advantageous as a transition to a specific state in the second specific situation. It is set to the second specific state on the side. In other words, not only the situation where the game before the special result is won in the normal state causes the transition to the specific state, but also the situation where the game where the special result is won causes the transition to the specific state is the first. 2 It will be included in a specific situation. If the specific state transition in the special result winning game is set as the first specific situation, the probability of winning the special result is set low in each game in order to facilitate the specific state transition in the second specific situation. There is a need. In that respect, if the transition to the specific state in the special result winning game is set as the second specific situation as in the above configuration, the probability of winning the special result in each game can be relatively high, and it is based on the special result winning. It is possible to eliminate the barriers in realizing the playability using the special state and the specific state.

Feature B13. A specific lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition lottery from the normal state to the specific state based on the lottery result by the lottery means is provided.
The specific transition means is configured to shift from the normal state to the specific state in the game based on the result of the shift lottery by the specific lottery means corresponding to the shift to the specific state. And
As the lottery result by the lottery means, an opportunity result that triggers the transition lottery by the specific lottery means and a non-trigger result that does not trigger the transition lottery by the specific lottery means are set.
The gaming machine according to feature B12, wherein the lottery result by the lottery means is set to be the special result, the trigger result, or the non-trigger result.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where a transition to a specific state can occur in a game that wins a special result, and there are cases where a transition to a specific state cannot occur in a game that wins a special result. Become. More specifically, in the special result winning that is the trigger result, the game is set to the second specific state as the transition to the specific state in the second specific situation because the transition to the specific state may occur. On the other hand, in the case of winning a special result, which is a non-triggered result, the game does not shift to a specific state, so that the special result information is stored without establishing a special result prize in the game. After that, when the transition to the specific state occurs, the first specific state is set as the specific state transition in the first specific situation. By doing so, the subsequent playability will differ greatly depending on whether the special result is won as a trigger result or the special result is won as a non-trigger result, and the degree of attention to the special result winning will be dramatically increased. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
When a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state is provided. Prepare,
The specific transition means
When shifting to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, the first specific transition means (processing for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101) for shifting to the first specific state (CZ mode). (A function to execute the process of setting to CZ mode when the BB carry-over flag is set in) and
When shifting to the specific state in the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, the second specific transition means for shifting to the second specific state (normal mode) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state. (A function to execute the process of setting the normal mode when the BB carry-over flag is not set in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101).
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a so-called slot machine game in which a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means and a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the special result as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state as a privilege, a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur are set, so the special state, the specific state, and the normal state are set. Diversification of games using states can be achieved.

In addition, the first special situation in which the special result information of winning the special result is stored and the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored and the special result is not won are specified. The advantage of the specific state when shifting to the state is different, and when the transition to the specific state occurs in the first special situation, the transition to the first specific state occurs, while the transition to the specific state in the second special situation occurs. When this occurs, the player shifts to the second specific state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, it is necessary to shift to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information winning the special result is stored, and whether or not the special result information is stored. It is possible to realize a new playability by utilizing the relationship between the player and the timing of transition to a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention of the game.

In particular, by making the specific state that shifts in the first special situation where the transition to the special state can occur advantageous, the advantage is increased by overlapping the special state as the so-called bonus state and the occurrence of the specific event. This is possible, and the degree of attention to the first specific state can be suitably increased. As a result, it is hoped that the special result will be won by the time the transition to the specific state occurs, and the degree of attention to the special result as the lottery result of each game can be increased.

Feature C2. A front door (front door 12) that opens toward the front of the game machine body,
An operating means (setting key insertion hole 73) that can be operated by opening the front door and can perform a predetermined setting of the game machine by operating the door.
With
When the predetermined setting is made based on the operation of the operation means, the information of the specific state is deleted.
When the information of the specific state is deleted based on the operation of the operating means, the erasing means capable of erasing the special result information (a function of executing the initialization process of the carry-over information by the main control device 101). ), The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, when the manager or the like of the game hall opens the front door and makes a predetermined setting of the game machine, the information of the specific state is deleted. In this case, if the special result information of winning the special result is still stored, the state after the predetermined setting is the normal state and the special result information is stored in the first specific situation. After that, it will shift to the first specific state, which is advantageous when shifting from the normal state to the specific state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the special result information that the special result has been won is also deleted, it is easy to shift to the first specific state after a predetermined setting such as the morning one state is made. It is possible to avoid a specific situation.

Feature C3. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) are set.
The case where the first special result information corresponding to the winning of the first special result is stored by the special result storage means and the second special corresponding to the winning of the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the advantage of the first specific state to be shifted is different between the case where the result information is stored and the case where the result information is stored.

According to the above configuration, when shifting to a specific state, not only whether or not the special result information of winning the special result is stored, but also the type of the stored special result information, that is, winning. The advantage of the first specific state to be transferred differs depending on the type of special result, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the winning special result.

Feature C4. The first special state that shifts when the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position, and the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the special end condition is common to the second special state that shifts when the game is stopped.

According to the above configuration, since the special termination condition is common between the first special state that shifts based on the first special result winning and the second special state that shifts based on the second special result winning. The first specification when shifting to a specific state depending on whether the first special result information corresponding to the first special result is stored or the second special result information corresponding to the second special result is stored. Although the advantages of the states are different, it is possible to make the advantages of the first special state and the second special state (special termination conditions) equivalent. By doing so, the difference in the advantage on the first specific state side can be highlighted, and the degree of attention to the transitioning first specific state can be suitably increased.

Feature C5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result that enables the next game to be played without the need for a new game medium is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means wins the special result, the special result and the re-game result are set as overlapping results so that the re-game result also wins.
When the special result and the re-game result are won, the drive control means drives and controls the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result so as to stop (priority setting process by the main control device 101). Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the transition condition is satisfied at least by winning the re-gaming result.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won in the normal state, the re-game result is also won, so that the re-game result prize is established in the game, and the special result is stored as special result information by the special result storage means. Will be done. Furthermore, since the game shifts from the normal state to the specific state based on the winning of the replay result, in this case, the game shifts to the specific state in the game in which the special result is won, and the special result information is not stored. As a transition, it will shift to the second specific state, which is more disadvantageous than the first specific state. By doing so, for example, the information that the game is in a specific state and the special result information that has won the special result are deleted, so that the game can be played from the normal state and the initial state in which the special result is not won. When started, it is possible to avoid transitioning to an advantageous first specific state based on the winning of a special result.

Feature C6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result that enables the next game to be played without the need for a new game medium is set.
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result that wins the special result and the replay result is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and the special result and the re-game result are won, the drive control means is driven so that the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result is stopped. Priority means to control (function to execute priority setting processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the special result in the situation where the predetermined specific end condition (without the continuation flag) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state can be terminated. Specific termination means (a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won in a specific state, the re-game result is also won, so that the re-game result prize is established in the game, and the special result is stored as special result information by the special result storage means. Will be done. Furthermore, if the special conditions are met, the specific state ends based on the special result winning and shifts to the normal state. Therefore, in this case, when the transition to the specific state is subsequently performed, the special result is won. There is a high possibility of shifting to a specific state with the special result information of the fact stored, and as a transition in a situation where the special result information is stored, the transition to the first specific state is performed. By doing so, even if the specific state is terminated at the time of winning the special result based on the establishment of the special condition, it can be expected to shift to the advantageous first specific state after that, which is an advantageous first. 1 It is possible to realize a continuous villa property in a specific state through a specific state.

Feature C7. In the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied, the specific end means sets the special pattern at the effective position in the game when the lottery result by the lottery means wins the predetermined special result. The characteristic C6 is characterized in that the specific state can be terminated if the specific state is not stopped, but the specific state is not terminated when the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position in the game. Described game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won in the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied, the specific state does not end if the special result prize can be established in the game. By doing so, it is possible to determine the game in which the special result is won in the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied, and to operate the stop operation means so as to establish the special result prize in the game. And the interest of the game is improved.

Feature C8. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set.
When the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position, the special transition means shifts to the first special state corresponding to the first special result, and the special transition means shifts to the effective position. When the second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped, the process shifts to the second special state corresponding to the second special result.
In the predetermined orbiting body, the first special symbol (“cherry” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination corresponds to the first timing at which the effective position can be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (“BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, and the second special symbol cannot be stopped. When the corresponding stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the effective position, the first special symbol cannot be stopped at the effective position. Feature The gaming machine described in C7.

According to the above configuration, the special result is won in the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied, and the first special result and the second special result are obtained in the configuration in which the specific state does not end if the prize can be established in the game. The corresponding first special pattern and the second special pattern cannot be stopped at the same time. Therefore, if the winning game is the first special result and the first special symbol is operated at a timing that can be stopped, the end of the specific state can be avoided, but the second special symbol is operated at a timing that can be stopped. If this happens, the specific state will end, and conversely, if the second special pattern is stopped in the second special result winning game, the specific state will not end, but if the first special pattern is aimed at, the specific state will end. By doing so, it is possible to realize playability such as which special result is to be stopped in the special result winning game in relation to the presence or absence of the end of the specific state, and the game is interesting. It will improve dramatically.

Moreover, even if the special result is won, if the result is duplicated, the special result prize will not be established even if the stop operation is aimed at these and the aim is achieved. By doing so, the player can completely avoid the probability that the specific state will end when the special result is won in the situation where the specific end condition is satisfied. It is possible to adjust well by the winning probability of duplicate results, not by the intuition of.

Feature C9. It is provided with an event lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an event lottery (AT mode transition lottery) for causing the specific event.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the first specific state has a higher probability of winning the event lottery by the event lottery means than the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, since the first specific state is easier to win the event lottery for causing a specific event than the second specific state, the first specific state has a specific event more than the second specific state. It becomes a state that is likely to occur. By doing so, it is possible to realize the difference in advantage between the first specific state and the second specific state.

Feature C10. The specific event occurs in the special state and
The special state that shifts in the situation where the event lottery is won by the event lottery means is more than the special state that shifts in the situation where the event lottery by the event lottery means is not won. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the specific event is likely to occur.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that a specific event occurs during the special state, it is better to shift to the special state when the event lottery is won, and to shift to the special state when the event lottery is not won. Since the specific event is more likely to occur than the above, the difference in the advantage between the first specific state and the second specific state is exhibited in the special state. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the significance of setting the difference in the advantage of the specific state to be transferred as in the feature C1 depending on whether or not the transition to the special state is carried over.

Feature C11. In the situation where the event lottery by the event lottery means is won, the transition to the special state is performed in the situation where the predetermined transition permission condition (the transition permission flag is set) is satisfied. When it occurs, the specific event can occur in the special state, while when the transition to the special state occurs in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the specific event occurs in the special state. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the occurrence of is limited.

According to the above configuration, in order to generate a specific event in a special state and enjoy the benefits thereof, it is necessary not only to win the event lottery but also to satisfy the transition permission condition. Therefore, the ease of enjoying the benefits of a specific event can be adjusted not only by the winning probability of the event lottery, but also by the probability of establishment of the transition permission condition, and it is possible to adjust the ball output rate more closely. Become.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein a plurality of states having different probability of establishing the transition permission condition are set (the winning probability of the transfer permission lottery differs between the first BB carry-over and the second BB carry-over). ..

According to the above configuration, the special result is won and the event lottery is won, and in the situation of waiting for the establishment of the transition permission condition, the more easily the transition permission condition is satisfied, the earlier the special result prize is won. Is possible and advantageous. In that respect, if there are multiple states with different probability of establishing the transition permission condition, the advantage will differ depending on which state is waiting for the transition permission condition to be satisfied, and attention should be paid to that state. The degree can be suitably increased.

Feature C13. Means for shifting from the first specific state to the second specific state (main control device) based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (CZ mode ends without winning the AT) in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a function of setting the number of ceiling games at the end of the CZ mode according to 101).

According to the above configuration, after shifting to the first specific state in a situation where the special result information of winning the special result is stored, the transition to the second specific state is performed when the transition condition is satisfied. That is, even if the transition to the first specific state is performed in the situation where the special result information is stored, the transition to the second specific state is performed thereafter. With such a configuration, in the first specific state, it is possible to realize an interesting playability such as aiming to be in a situation where the benefits of a specific event can be enjoyed before the transition condition is satisfied. Is possible.

Feature C14. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
When a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state is provided. Prepare,
The specific transition means
When shifting to the specific state in the first special situation in which the special result information is stored, the first specific transition means (processing for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101) for shifting to the first specific state (CZ mode). (A function to execute the process of setting to CZ mode when the BB carry-over flag is set in) and
When shifting to the specific state in the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored, a second shift to the second specific state (normal mode) in which the advantage for the player is different from the first specific state. Specific transition means (a function to execute the process of setting the normal mode when the BB carry-over flag is not set in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101)
A game machine characterized by having a configuration capable of being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a so-called slot machine game in which a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means and a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. In addition to the special result as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state as a privilege, a specific state in which a specific event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur are set, so the special state, the specific state, and the normal state are set. Diversification of games using states can be achieved.

In addition, the first special situation in which the special result information of winning the special result is stored and the second special situation in which the special result information is not stored and the special result is not won are specified. The advantage of the specific state when shifting to the state is different, and when the transition to the specific state occurs in the first special situation, the transition to the first specific state occurs, while the transition to the specific state in the second special situation occurs. When occurs, it shifts to the second specific state. Therefore, in order to advance the specific state advantageously, it is necessary to shift to the specific state in the special situation on the advantageous side depending on whether or not the special result information that has won the special result is stored, and the special result information is stored. It is possible to realize a new game playability by utilizing the relationship between the presence / absence of and the timing of transition to a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and increase the attention of the game.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
When a predetermined specific transition condition is satisfied, a specific transition means for shifting from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section in the section display first process by the main control device 101). ,
When a predetermined specific end condition is satisfied, a specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101). ,
With
The specific termination means
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result, the first specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (in the section display second process by the main control device 101, the BB winning game is entered. Function to execute the process to end the advantageous section)
When the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position, the second specific end means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, a lottery is performed for each game based on the operation of the start operation means, and a so-called slot machine game in which a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means is specified. Since a specific state in which an event can occur and a normal state in which a specific event does not occur are set, diversification of games using the privilege that can be given in relation to the lottery result of each game and the specific state and the normal state. Is planned.

On top of that, the specific state in which a specific event can occur may end when the lottery result of the game becomes a predetermined special result, or it may end when the special result winning is established. The specific state ends just by winning the result, or even if the special result is won, the special result winning is avoided by avoiding the special result winning, or the special result winning is established even if the special result is won. By letting it, it is possible to prevent the specific state from ending, and so on. That is, in the case of ending the specific state or avoiding the end as compared with a game machine having only one of the first specific end means to end at the time of winning and the second specific end means to end at the time of winning. The pattern of is overwhelmingly diversified, and even if it is a means to generate a seemingly similar event (a means to end a specific state), by intentionally providing both means, the interest of the game can be improved. It is possible to make a suitable attempt. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability by utilizing not only the continuity of the specific state and the lottery result of each game but also the lottery result of each game and the presence or absence of the winning.

Feature D2. When the predetermined first avoidance condition (with continuation flag) is satisfied, even if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result, the end of the specific state by the first specific end means. Is a configuration that avoids
When a predetermined second avoidance condition (one of the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, and the CZ mode flag is set) is satisfied, the special pattern combination is placed at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the end of the specific state is avoided by the second specific end means even when the game is stopped.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won, the specific state does not end if the first avoidance condition is satisfied, and even if the special result winning is established, it is specified if the second avoidance condition is satisfied. The state does not end. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific state from being terminated even if the special result winning or the special result winning is established in relation to both avoidance conditions.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the first avoidance condition and the second avoidance condition are different conditions.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature D2 can be expected more clearly.

Feature D4. When the first avoidance condition is not satisfied and the second avoidance condition is satisfied, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the effective position in the game. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or feature D3, wherein the specific state is not terminated by stopping the special pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, if the first avoidance condition is not satisfied and the special result is won, the second avoidance condition is originally where the specific state is terminated by the first specific termination means. If it is established, the end of the specific state can be avoided by establishing a special result prize in the game. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability in the special result winning game in a specific state.

Feature D5. The specific termination means
In the end determination process of whether or not to end the specific state,
The first determination process that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the situation where the first avoidance condition is not satisfied, and
The second determination process of whether or not the special pattern combination has stopped at the effective position in the situation where the second avoidance condition is not satisfied, and
Is set,
When it is determined in the first determination process that the first avoidance condition is satisfied and the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special result, the specific state is terminated. The end determination process is terminated without
When it is determined in the second determination process that the second avoidance condition is satisfied and that the special pattern combination is not stopped, the specific state is not terminated. The end determination process is terminated.
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the second determination process is set to be executed before the first determination process.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature D4, and if the above configuration is used, the effect of the feature D4 can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration such as setting the context of each process.

Feature D6. A special transition that can shift the gaming state to the special state based on the stop of the special pattern combination at the effective position, and end the special state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined special end condition. Means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein in a game in which the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. ..

According to the above configuration, the game in which the special result is won and the game in which the special result winning is established can be different games. With such a configuration, when the specific state is terminated when the special result is won and then the specific state is transferred again, the specific state may be terminated based on the special result winning. Therefore, the significance of providing a means for ending a specific state at the time of winning a special result and at the time of winning is further enhanced.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the specific transition condition can be satisfied in a situation where the special result information is stored by the special result storage means.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific state may be terminated by winning the special result, and then the state may be re-shifted to the specific state in the situation where the special result information is stored.

Feature D8. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result that enables the next game to be played without the need for a new game medium is set.
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result of the special result and the replay result and a single result of the special result are set.
When the special result and the re-game result are won, the drive control means drives and controls the pattern combination corresponding to the re-game result so as to stop (priority setting process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, if a special result is won due to duplicate results, a replay result prize is established instead of a special result in the game, and if a special result is won as a single result, the game is special. As a result, a prize can be established. That is, if the duplicate result is won in the specific state, the specific state may be terminated by the first specific end means in the game, but the specific state may not be terminated by the second specific end means. If the single result is won in the specific state, the specific state can be terminated by either the first specific termination means or the second specific termination means in the game. By using such a configuration, the timing at which the specific state can be ended can be changed depending on the winning opportunity of the special result, which can be useful for the design of novel game playability.

Feature D9. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set.
When the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position, the process shifts to the first special state corresponding to the first special result, and the effective position corresponds to the second special result. Then, when the second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination is stopped, the special transition means (bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to the second special state corresponding to the second special result is performed. Has a function to execute)
In the predetermined orbiting body, the first special symbol (“cherry” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination is supported at the first timing at which the effective position can be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (“BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, and the second special symbol cannot be stopped. When the corresponding stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the effective position, the first special symbol cannot be stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8.

According to the above configuration, since the first special pattern and the second special pattern corresponding to the first special result and the second special result cannot be stopped at the same time, they are special in the special result winning game. In order to win the result prize, it is necessary to operate the winning game at the timing when the winning game is the first special result and the first special symbol can be stopped, and when the second special symbol is operated at the timing when it can be stopped. The first special result prize is not established. On the contrary, if the second special result winning game is stopped, the second special result winning is established, but if the first special result is aimed at, the second special result winning is not established. In this way, although any special result triggers the end of the first specific end means as a winning game, the end trigger of the second specific end means in the winning game is only when the timing of the stop operation matches. is there. Therefore, it is possible to make the end trigger of the specific state different in relation to the timing of the stop operation, and it is possible to use it for the construction of game playability.

Feature D10. As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set.
When the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result stops at the effective position, the process shifts to the first special state corresponding to the first special result, and the effective position corresponds to the second special result. Then, when the second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination is stopped, the special transition means (bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting to the second special state corresponding to the second special result is performed. Has a function to execute)
The first specific end means terminates the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result (second BB).
The second specific end means according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that the specific state is terminated when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result (first BB). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, depending on the type of special result, there are those that trigger the end of the specific state at the time of winning and those that trigger the end of the specific state at the time of winning, and the end timing of the specific state depends on which special result. different. By providing such a configuration, it becomes possible to judge whether or not to avoid winning a prize based on the special result of winning, and it becomes possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Feature D11. The first specific end means does not end the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result (first BB), while the first specific end means does not end the specific state.
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the second specific end means terminates the specific state even when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result (second BB).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific state ends regardless of whether the first special result or the second special result is won, but when the special result is won, the specific state ends when the second special result is won. On the other hand, the specific state does not end when the first special result is won. By doing so, it is assumed that the specific state will end regardless of the special result winning, but if the first special result is won, the end of the specific state will be avoided, so in the second special result It is possible to realize playability such as wishing to win the first special result without winning the prize and not winning the prize after winning.

Feature D12. When the number of games from a predetermined start trigger is within a specific number, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the means (main control device 101) capable of preventing the specific state from ending. The game according to any one of features D1 to D11, which comprises a function of executing a process of not ending an advantageous section in a BB winning game if the counter after BB is 20 or less. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the number of games from a predetermined start trigger is within a specific number, the specific state does not end even if a special result is won. That is, if a special result is won, it is required to be within a specific number, and the degree of attention of the game within the specific number is preferably increased.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means at least in a situation where the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, a specific pattern combination in which the special pattern combination and a part of the patterns are different from the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. As a result, specific results (first BB tempai lip, second BB tempai lip) to which the benefit is granted by the privilege granting means are set.
When the transition to the special state is established in the situation where the predetermined transition permission condition (AT mode transition or the direct transition lottery is won) is satisfied, the transition to the special state is performed in the situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied. This is a configuration in which the special condition is more advantageous than the case where
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the special notification execution means (pseudo-winning by the display control device 81) capable of executing the special notification by the predetermined notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function (function to execute processing for performing a suggestion notification effect).

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a so-called slot machine game in which a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means and a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. As a privilege, a special result as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state is set, and if a specific result prize is established in a situation where the transition permission condition is satisfied, a specific result is established in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied. It will be a special condition that is more advantageous than if a prize is won. Therefore, in order to enjoy the benefits of the special state that is advantageous even if the special result is won, the playability such that the special result winning is established after waiting for the transition permission condition to be established is realized. In this case, in the situation where the special result information corresponding to the special result winning is stored, the special result winning is established in the special pattern combination in which the special result winning is established and the specific pattern combination in which some of the symbols are different. Is set, and if a specific result is won in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, special notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is looking forward to the establishment of the transition permission condition expect that the transition permission condition has been established by the special notification and the stop result in the middle, and also to win the special result. Even if the stop operation means is operated so as to establish the above, the special result winning is established even though the transition permission condition is not satisfied because the specific result winning can be established instead of the special result. You can also prevent it from happening. In this way, it is possible to improve the playability in the situation of waiting for the transition permission condition to be satisfied without increasing the probability of the transition permission condition being satisfied.

Feature E2. The special notification executing means sends the special notification by the predetermined notification means in a game in which the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a situation where the transition permission condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by being feasible.

According to the above configuration, when the operation is aimed at the special result winning according to the special notification, the special result winning may be established under the transition permission condition, so that the special result is special in the situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied. It is possible to increase the credibility of the notification and dramatically increase the degree of attention and expectation for the special notification.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the transition permission condition can be satisfied in a situation where the special result information is stored by the special result storage means.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won, the game can be played while carrying over the winning information until the transition permission condition is satisfied. As a result, the significance of giving special notification at the time of winning a specific result during the carry-over is enhanced, and the playability during the carry-over can be improved.

Feature E4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
When the special pattern combination stops at the effective position in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the specific termination means (main control device) capable of terminating the specific state and shifting to the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it includes a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section at the time of winning a BB in the section display second process by 101).

According to the above configuration, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means, and depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. Playability with different advantages is realized. In addition, although the mode notification can be executed in the specific state, it is not executed in the normal state. Therefore, it is considered that the specific state is more advantageous and the player wants to stay in the specific state. Then, in the above configuration, if the special result prize is established in the situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the transition from the specific state to the normal state may occur, so that the transition special state is advantageous. From the viewpoint of not only proceeding as a thing but also not ending a specific state, the significance of not establishing a special result prize in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied is enhanced. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize the playability described in the feature E1.

Feature E5. In a situation where the special notification can be performed by the special notification executing means, a means capable of limiting the end of the specific state by the specific end means (in the second process of section display by the main control device 101, during the CZ mode. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which is provided with a function of executing a process of not ending an advantageous section when a BB prize is generated in the game.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific state can be terminated by shifting to a special state when the transition permission condition is not satisfied, in a situation where special notification is performed, the end of the specific state even if the transition permission condition is not satisfied. Is restricted. In this way, for example, if the special result prize is not established, it is misunderstood that it was caused by the failure of the own stop operation, and the transition permission condition is not satisfied. Instead, it is possible to preferably avoid an attempt to establish a special result prize in the next game or later, and thereby ending a specific state.

Feature E6. A first state (CZ mode) in which the transition permission condition is easily satisfied and a second state (normal mode) in which the transition permission condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first state are set.
The special notification executing means executes the special notification in the first state in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, and even in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the special notification is not executed in the two states or is more difficult to execute than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is executed in the first state in which the transition permission condition is easily satisfied, it is possible to increase the expectation when the special notification is performed. In other words, in the second state where the transition permission condition is difficult to be satisfied, the special notification is not executed or is difficult to be executed. Therefore, the rarity of the special notification can be increased, and the occurrence rate of the special notification and the transition permission condition can be increased. It is possible to make it easy to predict that the transition permission condition is satisfied when the special notification is given by linking with the ease of establishment.

Feature E7. Features E1 to feature E1 to feature in which the number of common patterns (2) is set to be larger than the number of different patterns (1) in the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

According to the above configuration, the similarity between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination is enhanced. Therefore, when the special notification is given, it is thought that the special result prize will be established from the stop result halfway. The effect of making it can be enhanced.

Feature E8. The special notification executing means can execute the instruction notification that the stop operating means corresponding to the orbiting body having the same pattern in the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination is operated by the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7.

According to the above configuration, even though the special notification has been made, the special result winning is not established because the orbiting body whose pattern is different between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination is stopped. Can be suppressed from being grasped early.

Feature E9. The special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position regardless of the operation order of the stop operation means, and the special transition means is the special at the effective position regardless of the operation order of the stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, which is characterized in that when the pattern combination of the above is stopped, the combination is shifted to the special state.

According to the above configuration, even when the stop operation is performed from the orbiting body in which the patterns are different between the special pattern combination and the specific pattern combination, the state shifts to the special state as long as the special pattern combination is stopped. In this case, for example, by first stopping the orbiting bodies having different patterns, it is possible to confirm that the special result is won or not the special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature E1 within a range that does not eliminate the real thrill of the so-called slot machine, such as operating the stop operation means at the player's will to stop the orbiting body and obtain a privilege. Can be done.

Feature E10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, while the stop operation means. E1 to E9 are characterized in that, when is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the chance that a specific pattern combination is stopped without changing the winning probability of winning a specific result. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the special notification.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( (Function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101) and
With
As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
The special transition means sets the gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The first special state is shifted to one special state, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and is in the effective position. The game state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped, and the second special end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined second special end condition is satisfied. It is possible to end a special state,
The special result storage means corresponds to winning the first special result when the first special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the first special result is won. In the game in which the first special result information is stored and the second special result is won, if the second special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the second special result is won. It is possible to store the second special result information corresponding to the fact that
When the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (disappearance result). It is a composition,
When shifting to the special state in a situation where a predetermined advantageous condition (AT mode transition or winning a direct transition lottery) is satisfied, or when shifting to the special state in a situation where the advantageous condition is not satisfied This is a configuration in which the special condition is more advantageous than
When the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is such that the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. If the lottery result by the lottery means has the same or substantially the same probability as the specific result, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means. The probability is different from the probability that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, or is a probability difference larger than the probability difference that results in the specific result. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, on the premise of a so-called slot machine game in which a lottery is performed based on the operation of the start operation means and a privilege is obtained as a stop result according to the lottery result based on the operation of the stop operation means. As a privilege, a special result as a so-called bonus that causes a transition to a special state is set, and if a special result prize is established in a situation where advantageous conditions are satisfied, a special result prize is awarded in a situation where the advantageous condition is not established. It is a special state that is more advantageous than when it is established. Therefore, in order to enjoy the benefits of the advantageous special state even if the special result is won, the playability of waiting for the advantageous conditions to be established and then establishing the special result prize is realized. In this case, the first special result and the second special result are set as special results, and regardless of the special result, the game in which the special result information is stored in addition to the game in which the special result is stored. The probability that a specific result will be obtained is that the first special result information is stored and the first special result is being carried over, and the second special result information is stored and the second special result is stored. The probability of establishing the advantageous condition is different between the first special result carry-over and the second special result carry-over, while the probability is the same or substantially the same as that during the carry-over. By doing so, even if there is no difference in the rate of increase / decrease (base) of medals in the situation where each special result is carried over, the transition rate of the advantageous special state can be obtained simply by adjusting the probability of establishment of the advantageous condition. It is possible to make a difference. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability by using the first special result and the second special result.

In addition, "the same or substantially the same probability" may be expressed as "the same probability to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference", and more specifically, "within 5%". It may be "probability of difference", preferably "probability of difference within 1%", or more preferably "probability of difference within 0.1%". .. The expressions may be changed in the same manner for other features using such expressions such as "substantially the same probability" and features in other feature groups.

Feature F2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As a gaming state, a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed or is less likely to be executed than the specific state. And are set,
A transition determination means (by the main control device 101) that executes a transition determination as to whether or not a transition condition corresponding to the transition from the normal state to the specific state is satisfied based on a predetermined first determination trigger. Function to execute AT lottery processing) and
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the transition condition is satisfied, the specific transition means (AT mode by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state. (A function to execute the process to move to) and
A permission determination means (execution of a transition permission lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a permission determination as to whether or not a permission condition corresponding to permitting an advantageous transition to the special state is satisfied in the specific state. Function to do) and
Based on the result of the permission determination by the permission determination means being the result that the permission condition is satisfied, the advantageous establishment means for establishing the advantageous condition (the transition permission flag by the main control device 101 is set). Function to execute processing) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F1, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means, and depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. Playability with different advantages is realized. On top of that, although the mode notification can be executed during the specific state, it may not be executed or is difficult to be executed in the normal state. Therefore, it is advantageous to be in the specific state, and the player stays in the specific state. It is considered to be what you want. In such a configuration, after the transition condition to the specific state is satisfied and the transition to the specific state is established, the permission condition is further satisfied, so that the advantageous condition that the special state can be executed as an advantageous special state is established. .. In other words, it is not possible to make it an advantageous special state simply by shifting to a specific state, but it is necessary that the permission conditions are further satisfied in the specific state, and by doing so, it is advantageous. The difficulty of enjoying the benefits of a special condition increases, and this difficulty makes it possible to increase interest in a favorable special condition. In addition, even after shifting to a specific state, it is possible to play a game in a specific state and not a special state and a situation in a specific state and a special state while carrying over the special result winning. , Special result It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the situation where the winning is carried over.

Feature F3. When the transition to the special state occurs in the situation where the permission condition is not satisfied, the special state becomes a special state which is more disadvantageous than the situation where the advantageous condition is satisfied. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific state, it is possible to shift to the special state in the situation where the permission condition is not satisfied, and the advantageous condition is established even if the transition to the special state is made in the situation. It is clarified that it will be a disadvantageous special situation because it is not. By stipulating in this way, in order to enjoy the benefits of the advantageous special state, it is possible to realize the playability that requires waiting until the permission condition is satisfied during the specific state.

Feature F4. The transition determination means can execute the transition determination in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means.
The permission determination means is characterized in that the permission determination can be executed in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature F3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive a transition determination and a permission determination in a situation where the winning information of various special results is carried over. Therefore, even if the special result is won before the transition conditions are satisfied and the permission conditions are satisfied, wait for the special result prize until the advantageous conditions based on these transition conditions and permission conditions are satisfied. It will be better. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the success or failure of the advantageous condition rather than the success or failure of the special result without causing the inconvenience that the benefit of the advantageous special state cannot be enjoyed because the winning of the special result is until the establishment of the advantageous condition.

Feature F5. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means and the special result storage means In the situation where the second special result information is stored, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means is different (the first BB carry-over flag is set). The gaming machine according to feature F4, which is characterized by (difference in AT mode lottery table and difference in CZ mode to be transferred) when the second BB carry-over flag is set and when the second BB carry-over flag is set.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of establishing the transition condition differs depending on which special result information is stored, the transition rate to an advantageous special state without adjusting the winning probability of the special result that triggers the special state. Can be adjusted according to the probability of establishment of the transition condition.

Feature F6. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the permission condition is satisfied by the permission determination by the permission determination means and the special result storage means The probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored is different from the probability that the permission condition is satisfied (the first BB winning flag is set). The gaming machine according to feature F4 or feature F5, wherein the winning probability of the transition permission lottery differs depending on whether the game is set to the second BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of establishment of the permission condition differs depending on which special result information is stored, the transition rate to an advantageous special state without adjusting the winning probability of the special result that triggers the special state. Can be adjusted by the probability of establishment of the permission condition.

Feature F7. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means is determined in the special result storage means. While the probability is higher than the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored, the special result storage means The probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in the situation where the first special result information is stored is determined by the second special result information in the special result storage means. Is stored in any one of the features F4 to F6, which is characterized in that the probability is lower than the probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the situation in which the first special result is won is easier to satisfy the transition condition and the permission condition is less likely to be satisfied than the situation in which the second special result is won. In this case, the situation in which the first special result is won is easier to shift to the specific state, and the situation of waiting for permission to shift to the special state which is advantageous in the specific state becomes longer. On the contrary, in the situation where the second special result is won, it is difficult to shift to the specific state, but in the specific state, the permission condition for the advantageous special state is established relatively early. In this way, the progress of the game greatly differs between when the first special result is won and when the second special result is won depending on the combination of the transition condition and the permission condition, and the player's viewpoint is which is more advantageous to proceed. It will be possible to attract interest and improve the interest of the game.

Feature F8. When the permission determination is executed in a situation where neither the first special result information nor the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the result is that the permission condition is satisfied. When the permission determination is executed in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the permission condition is satisfied. It is characterized by a higher probability that the result will be (the probability of winning the transition permission lottery is higher in the situation where the BB winning flag is set than in the situation where the BB winning flag is not set). The gaming machine according to any one of the features F2 to F7.

According to the above configuration, the permission condition is more likely to be established after the special result is won than before the special result is won, and the permission condition is established relatively quickly after the special result is won in a specific state, which is an advantageous special state. You can enjoy the benefits of In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for an event such as the permission condition to be satisfied even though the special result is won, and the smooth progress of the game is realized.

Feature F9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second special result are different (difference in winning probability between the first BB and the second BB). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8.

According to the above configuration, the transition rate to the advantageous special state due to the first special state and the transition rate to the advantageous special state due to the second special state are determined not only by the advantageous conditions but also by the winning probability of each special result. Can be adjusted. Here, in order to enjoy the benefits of the advantageous special condition, it is necessary that the advantageous conditions are finally established, and the difference in the winning probability between the first special result and the second special result is in each special result. It can be said that it contributes to the balance between the period of waiting for the establishment of advantageous conditions in the situation where no winner is won and the period of waiting for the establishment of advantageous conditions in the situation where each special result is won. In other words, the ratio of the period of waiting for the establishment of the advantageous condition in the situation where the first special result is won to the period of waiting for the establishment of the advantageous condition in the situation where the first special result is not won is the ratio of the period of waiting for the establishment of the advantageous condition. It tends to be larger than the ratio of the period of waiting for the establishment of the advantageous condition to the period of waiting for the establishment of the advantageous condition in the situation where the second special result is won. Therefore, by utilizing such a relationship, it is possible to realize game playability that utilizes the difference in advantage between the situation where each special result is won and the situation where it is not, and the interest of the game is improved. It will be possible to use it for.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. It is equipped with a special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition.
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined trigger result (for example, the first replay), the specific transition means (section display by the main control device 101) for shifting from the normal state to the specific state is performed. Function to execute the process to shift to the advantageous section in one process) and
With
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (lip overlap 1st BB, lip overlap 2nd BB) including at least the special result and the trigger result, and a single result including the trigger result but not including the special result ( Normally, Lip A) and are set,
The specific transition means
When shifting to the specific state triggered by the duplication result, the BB carry-over flag is set in the processing for the advantageous section shift game by the first specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the first specific state (CZ mode). (A function to execute the process to set to CZ mode when not) and
When shifting to the specific state triggered by the single result, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the second specific state (normal mode) having a different advantage for the player from the first specific state. (A function to execute the process of setting the normal mode when the BB carry-over flag is set in the process for the advantageous section transition game)
A game machine characterized by having a configuration capable of being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the specific state that shifts based on the overlapping result of the trigger result that triggers the transition to the specific state in which a specific event can occur and the so-called bonus as a special result, and the trigger result are included. On the other hand, the advantage is different from the specific state in which the transition is based on the single result that does not include the special result. In other words, although it is only the trigger result that triggers the transition to the specific state, the advantage of the specific state to be transitioned differs depending on the presence or absence of duplication with the special result. Here, for example, it is possible to consider a configuration in which the advantage of the specific state to be shifted differs depending on the type of the trigger result, but in that case, it is necessary to significantly increase the types of the trigger result, or the process when shifting to the specific state. May be complicated. On the other hand, by using the presence or absence of duplication as described above, it is possible to diversify the specific state without causing an enormous number of types of trigger results and complicated processing.

Feature G2. As the trigger result, the first trigger result (for example, the first replay) and the second trigger result (28th small role) are set.
The first specific state that shifts with the result including the first trigger result and the special result as an opportunity, and the first specific state that shifts with the result including the second trigger result and the special result as a trigger. Same advantage,
The second specific state that includes the first trigger result and does not include the special result, and the second specific state that shifts with the result that includes the second trigger result and does not include the special result. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized by having the same advantage as.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific state differs depending on the presence or absence of duplication with the special result, but the advantage of the specific state does not change depending on the type of the overlapping trigger result. By doing so, the points that the player should pay attention to are concentrated on the presence or absence of duplication with the special result, and the comprehensibility of the game is improved, so that the game can be enjoyed more easily.

Feature G3. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) are set.
As the duplication result, a first duplication result (lip duplication first BB) including at least the trigger result and the first special result, and a second duplication result (rip duplication) including at least the trigger result and the second special result. 2nd BB) and are set,
Feature G1 or feature characterized in that the advantages of the first specific state that shifts with the first duplication result as an opportunity and the first specific state that shifts with the second duplication result as a trigger are different. The gaming machine described in G2.

According to the above configuration, there are a plurality of special results, and the advantage of the first specific state differs depending on the type of special results included in the duplicated results. That is, the advantage of the specific state differs depending on not only whether or not the trigger result and the special result overlap, but also the type of the special result, and it becomes possible to more preferably diversify the specific state.

Feature G4. In the game in which the special result is won, when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means that can store the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result ( It has a function to execute the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main controller 101).
When the specific result storage means does not store the special result information and the specific result is used as an opportunity to shift to the specific state, the specific transition means shifts to the first specific state. Any of the features G1 to G3 characterized by having (a function of executing a process of setting the CZ mode when the BB carry-over flag is not set in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101). The game machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the above configuration, even if a single result is used as an opportunity to shift to a specific state, if the special result information before the special result is won is not stored, the specific state is changed to a duplicate result as a trigger. It shifts to the same first specific state. In this case, for example, if the first specific state is more advantageous than the second specific state, even if the state shifts to the specific state based on the single result, it is before the special result is won. The player will want, and conversely, if the second specific state is more advantageous than the first specific state, the player will shift to the specific state based on the single result after winning the special result. I think I want it. By doing so, it is possible to create an interesting playability that attracts the player's mind by utilizing the relationship between the transition timing of the specific state based on the single result and the special result winning timing.

In the above configuration, the "third specific transition means" may be referred to as the "first specific transition means".

Feature G5. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the special result, the specific end means for ending the specific state and shifting to the normal state (process of ending the advantageous section in the BB winning game by the main control device 101). The game machine according to the feature G4, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific state may end based on the fact that the special result is won during the specific state. Therefore, if the special result prize is not established at the time of winning the special result, the special result is obtained. It will shift to the normal state with the information stored. Then, after that, when the transition to the specific state is performed based on the winning of the single result, the first specific state is not the second specific state as the transition to the specific state triggered by the single result in the situation where the special result information is stored. It will shift to a specific state. That is, by adopting the above configuration, for example, a special result is won in the normal state, and in a situation where the special result information is stored, a transition to a specific state occurs with a single result as an opportunity. Instead, the special result winning may be in the specific state, and it is possible to facilitate the transition to the first specific state triggered by the single result in the situation where the special result information is stored.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the special result is not included in the trigger result.

According to the above configuration, for example, since a single winning of a special result does not trigger a transition to a specific state, in a gaming machine that sets a duplicate result including the trigger result and the special result and a single result not including the special result. , The playability of the feature G1 can be realized without inviting the complexity of the configuration. In other words, if the configuration is such that the transition to the specific state occurs triggered by the special result, it is inconvenient that the duplicate result needs to be configured to determine whether the transition to the specific state is triggered by the trigger result or the special result. Is possible.

Feature G7. The game according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the trigger result is set as a result that the probability of winning as a lottery result by the lottery means is the same regardless of the game state. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the trigger result does not change regardless of the gaming state, the transition probability to the specific state is less likely to change depending on the gaming state. By doing so, in a configuration having a plurality of gaming states, it is possible to ensure the fairness between the player who started the game from one gaming state and the player who started the game from another gaming state. it can.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"As a game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the winning probability (JAC winning probability) in a predetermined lottery process is different are set.
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the trigger result in the first game state and the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the trigger result in the second game state are common. "

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As a gaming state, a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed or is less likely to be executed than the specific state. And are set,
With a specific transition determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing and counting the number of ceiling games by the main control device 101) that executes a transition determination from the normal state to the specific state based on a predetermined determination opportunity. ,
Based on the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means being the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific state (winning in the AT mode transition lottery or reaching the number of ceiling games). Specific transition means for transitioning from the normal state to the specific state (a function of executing a process for shifting to the AT mode when the AT mode winning flag is set by the main control device 101) and
With
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The transition to the first special state is performed, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second special result (second BB). ), And the gaming state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, and the predetermined second special end condition is set. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment, and
In the game in which the first special result is won, if the first special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the first special result information corresponding to the winning of the first special result is displayed. In a game that is memorable and won the second special result, if the second special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, it corresponds to winning the second special result. 2 Special result storage means that can store special result information (a function that executes a process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main control device 101) and
With
In the first special situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, it is easy to become the transition correspondence result, and the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. 2 The AT mode lottery to be acquired differs depending on whether the transition response result is likely to be obtained in a special situation (the first BB carry-over flag is set and the second BB carry-over flag is set). If the table is configured differently or the 1st BB carry-over flag is set and the advantageous section shifts, the 1st CZ mode is set. If the 2nd BB carry-over flag is set and the advantageous section shifts, the 2nd CZ mode is set. A game machine characterized by (configuration set to).

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, so-called bonuses such as a first special result that shifts to the first special state by winning a prize and a second special result that shifts to the second special state by winning a prize are set. In addition, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning the mode result, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by the predetermined notification means, which is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. Therefore, for example, when the state shifts to the special state during the specific state, the specific notification is performed in the special state, while when the state shifts to the special state during the normal state, the specific notification is not performed. It is possible to realize playability that combines a special state and a specific notification.

Moreover, in this game machine, either the first special result information of winning the first special result or the second special result information of winning the second special result is obtained. When the transition to a specific state is determined in the situation where the above is stored, the probability of the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific state differs depending on which result information is stored. By doing so, not only the fusion of the specific state and the special state, but also the situation before the transition to the special state can be used to improve the interest while associating with the specific state.

Feature H2. When the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means is shifted to the first special state before the result of the transition correspondence in the first special situation, the situation after the end of the first special state. Is less likely to result in the transition response than in the first special situation.
In the second special situation, when the result of the transition determination by the specific transition determination means is shifted to the second special state before the result of the transition correspondence is obtained, the situation after the end of the second special state. Is less likely to be the result of the transition than in the second special situation (because the advantageous section ends by winning the BB prize before the AT mode transition is won in the normal mode, and the ceiling game number setting process is performed. , AT mode winning flag is less likely to be set) The gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to the above configuration, the probability that the transition determination by the specific migration determination means in the situation where the first special result information and the second special result information are stored will result in the transition correspondence result is the first special state or the second special state. Since it is higher than the probability that a transition response result will be obtained in the transition judgment in the situation after the end, as a gameplay aiming to shift to a specific state (transition correspondence result), even if each special result is won, a prize will be awarded. It is advantageous to receive a transition judgment without establishing it. By doing so, it is possible to realize an unprecedented novel playability such as carrying over the special result winning, that is, receiving the judgment of transition to a specific state while avoiding winning.

Feature H3. When either the first special end condition or the second special end condition is satisfied, the means for ending the specific state and shifting to the normal state (BB end in the AT continuation setting process by the main control device 101). The game according to feature H1 or feature H2, which is characterized by having a process of clearing the AT mode flag in the game and a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in the BB end game in the section display second process). Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the first special result information and the second special result information are stored, the transition to the specific state is determined with the probability corresponding to the stored special result information, and the state is changed to the specific state. Even in the case of transition, the specific state ends after the special result winning is established and the special state is played. With such a configuration, it is suppressed that the specific state continues endlessly even after the special state, and the special result is won → the judgment of transition to the specific state → the transition to the specific state → the special state → the normal state → It is possible to realize the playability of a cycle such as winning a special result.

Feature H4. When either the first special end condition or the second special end condition is satisfied, the means for maintaining the specific state without terminating the specific state (BB in the AT continuation setting process by the main control device 101). Described in feature H3, which is characterized by having a process of not clearing the AT mode flag in the end game and a function of executing a process of not ending the advantageous section even in the BB end game in the section display second process). Game machine.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific state may end at the end of the special state, and by allowing the specific state to continue, the special state in the specific state can be in a row. can do. Therefore, it is possible to create a wave of increased ball output due to the continuous villa nature of such a special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature H5. A means (main control device) that restricts the transition determination by the specific transition determination means in the first special state and restricts the transition determination by the specific transition determination means in the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, characterized in that it includes a function of executing a process of limiting the AT mode transition lottery in the BB state and the subtraction process of the ceiling counter by 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to each special state is performed before the transition correspondence result is obtained by the transition determination by the specific transition determination means, the execution of the transition determination is restricted during the special state, so that the transition to the specific state is performed. In terms of playability aiming for a transition, it can be said that there is little merit in shifting to a special state before the transition response result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to facilitate the playability of receiving the transition determination to the specific state in the situation where the special result information is stored.

Feature H6. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is lower than the probability that the second special result will be obtained.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the first special situation is more likely to result in the transition response result than the second special situation.

According to the above configuration, the first special situation in which the first special result information corresponding to the first special result on the side with the lower winning probability is stored corresponds to the second special result on the side with the higher winning probability. The transition response result is more likely to be obtained than in the second special situation in which the second special result information is stored. By doing so, the merit of winning the first special result on the side with the lower winning probability is enhanced, and the joy of the player when the first special result is won is embodied by the ease of becoming a transition response result. It becomes possible to do.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the first special termination condition and the second special termination condition are the same conditions.

According to the above configuration, although it is assumed that the first special result and the second special result have different winning probabilities and transition correspondence results, the end conditions in the transition special state are the same. The difference in advantage between the 1 special state and the 2nd special state is less likely to occur. By doing so, the difference in the advantages of the two special results can be aggregated into the difference such as the ease of the transition response result, and the degree of attention to the difference in the transition response result can be increased. ..

Feature H8. The specific migration determination means uses a predetermined migration information group (AT lottery table) and a determination random number to determine whether or not the determination random number this time corresponds to the migration correspondence result. It is a composition,
The migration information group acquired in the first special situation is different from the migration information group acquired in the second special situation, so that the migration response result is likely to be different. The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to H7.

According to the above configuration, the so-called lottery table as the migration information group to be acquired differs depending on which special result information is stored, and the ease of obtaining the migration response result differs depending on the migration information group. Become. By doing so, when trying to adjust the susceptibility of the migration correspondence result, it is only necessary to change the setting of the migration information group, and the game design can be performed with a relatively simple configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
Upper limit ending means for terminating the specific state regardless of the rest of the specific state based on the establishment of the predetermined upper limit condition in the specific state (the upper limit number of games in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit increase number),
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the gaming state is changed to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting and terminating the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special termination condition, and
In the specific situation (the number of advantageous section games AG is 1400 or more or the number of advantageous section increase / decrease MY is 2200 or more) before the upper limit condition is satisfied in the specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. When the special state is terminated, or when the specific state is terminated, the specific termination means (value in which the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY in the BB winning game by the main control device 101 satisfy the termination condition. If so, the function to execute the process to end the advantageous section) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, the result of winning a prize differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means. There is, and gameability such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence of mode notification is realized. Where the mode notification can be executed in a specific state, the specific state may end when a predetermined upper limit condition is satisfied, and the advantage of the specific state is set so as not to become too high.

In this case, assuming that the specific state is terminated by the upper limit condition, for example, if an event such as so-called addition or stock that enables the specific state to be continued occurs but the specific state is terminated by the upper limit condition, the player Feels as if their additions and stock have been exploited, which can reduce their willingness to continue the game. Therefore, in the above configuration, in a specific situation before the upper limit condition is satisfied, a special result is won that enables a transition to a special state as a so-called bonus, or a special result is completed after the special state ends. By configuring the configuration to end the specific state when it is clear that the player has not won the prize, for example, it is possible to shift to the specific state again during the bonus, or the specific state depends on the presence or absence of the bonus winning information. It is possible to expect a re-transition to a specific state by using a configuration in which the ease of transition to a state in which mode notification is performed changes. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the decrease in motivation for playing due to the end under the upper limit condition.

Feature I2. It is a feature that the specific state that shifts thereafter becomes more advantageous to the player after the specific state is completed by the specific end means than after the specific state is ended by the upper limit end means. The gaming machine according to the feature I1.

According to the above configuration, the case where the specific state is terminated by the specific end means before the upper limit condition is satisfied shifts to the specific state after that, rather than the case where the specific state is terminated by the upper limit end means based on the establishment of the upper limit condition. It will be advantageous when you do. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly bring about the merit of terminating the specific state by the specific terminating means without waiting for the establishment of the upper limit condition.

Feature I3. The profit obtained when the specific state is terminated by the specific termination means and then shifted to the specific state is until the specific termination means does not terminate the specific state and the upper limit condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein the specific situation is set so that the profit can be more favorable to the player than the profit obtained.

According to the above configuration, the merit of terminating the specific state by the specific terminating means is further clarified. That is, if the specific state is not terminated by the specific termination means, the specific state could be continued until the upper limit condition is satisfied, and the merit of intentionally terminating the specific state that could still be continued in this way is By making it possible to obtain more profit than the profit that would be obtained by the time the upper limit condition is satisfied, it becomes easier for the player to accept that the specific state is terminated by the specific termination means.

Feature I4. The specific end means is configured to end the specific state when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the specific situation.
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode) and a second specific state (CZ mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state are set.
When the special result information (BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is not stored and the state shifts to the specific state, the state shifts to the first specific state and the special The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the configuration shifts to the second specific state when the result information is stored in the specific state.

As in the above configuration, after the configuration is such that the advantage is different at the time of transition to the specific state depending on the presence or absence of special result information corresponding to winning the special result, the specific state is terminated by winning the special result. By doing so, it is possible to shift to the second specific state on the advantageous side by shifting to the specific state after that without establishing the special result prize. On the other hand, when the specific state ends based on the establishment of the upper limit condition, the special result may not be won when re-shifting to the specific state after the end of the specific state, and the user moves to the first specific state on the disadvantageous side. Can be migrated. By doing so, it becomes possible to further clarify the merit of terminating the specific state based on the winning of the special result in the specific situation.

Feature I5. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
The case where the lottery result by the lottery means shifts to the specific state in a situation where the first special result information (first BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the first special result is stored is the lottery means. The second special result information (second BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special result is stored, which is more advantageous in the second specific state than in the case of shifting to the specific state. It ’s a high degree,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result in the specific situation, the specific end means terminates the specific state, while the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result in the specific situation. If the game machine according to the feature I4, the specific state is not terminated.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the transition is made in a situation where the information corresponding to the winning of the first special result is stored, and a case where the transition is made when the information corresponding to the winning of the second special result is stored. , The advantage of the second specific state is different, and the first special result is more advantageous than the second special result in the second specific state. In such a configuration, in a specific situation, if the first special result is the end of the specific state, and if the second special result is the case, the specific state is not ended, so that the second specific state on the more advantageous side is prevented. Only in situations where a shift to can occur, the specific state is terminated before the upper limit condition is satisfied. By doing so, the effectiveness of terminating the specific state before the upper limit condition is satisfied can be further enhanced. In other words, the game is played even though the specific state is terminated before the upper limit condition is satisfied. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as not being able to enjoy the benefits as expected by a person to occur.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is lower than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result.

According to the above configuration, the rarity of the first special result can be used to secure the balance of the advantage of the situation in which the situation can shift to the advantageous second specific state by the rarity of the first special result. .. Therefore, it is possible to realize playability such as ending the specific state in the middle and re-shifting to the advantageous second specific state within a range not contrary to the significance of setting the upper limit condition.

Feature I7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the winning of the special result, the overlapping result of the other game result and the special result is set so that the other game result is also won.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result, the priority means (mainly) so that the pattern combination corresponding to the other game result can be stopped at the effective position with priority over the special pattern combination. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6, which comprises a function of executing priority setting processing by the control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the other game result is also won, so that the special result prize is not established in the game and the prize of the other game result is established. Therefore, when the special result is won in the specific situation and the specific state ends in the game, the normal state is started in the situation where the special result information is stored. In this way, when the normal state is changed to the specific state again, the special result information is likely to be stored, and the transition to the advantageous second specific state is easy.

Feature I8. The specific end means is configured to end the specific state when the special end condition of the special state is satisfied in the specific situation.
As the specific state, a first specific state (normal mode) and a second specific state (CZ mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state are set.
When the state shifts to the specific state in a situation where the special result information (BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is not stored, the process shifts to the second specific state and the special The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the configuration shifts to the first specific state when the result information is stored in the specific state.

As in the above configuration, after the configuration is such that the advantage is different at the time of transition to the specific state depending on the presence or absence of the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result, the special state ends and the special result is obtained. If you end the specific state in a situation where it is clear that you have not won, that is, the situation where the special result information is not stored, then you can move to the specific state without winning the special result. It is possible to shift to the second specific state on the advantageous side. On the other hand, when the specific state ends based on the establishment of the upper limit condition, it is possible that after the special result is won, before the transition to the special state or before the end, in this case, after the end of the specific state, the transition to the specific state is performed again. In some cases, it is possible to shift to the first specific state on the disadvantaged side. By doing so, it becomes possible to further clarify the merit of terminating the specific state based on the end of the special state in the specific situation.

Feature I9. In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the normal state, the means (main control device) capable of shifting to the specific state before the special result information is stored. The gaming machine according to feature I8, which comprises a function of executing a process of shifting to an advantageous section based on the winning of the first BB of overlapping rips and the second BB of overlapping rips according to 101).

According to the above configuration, in the game machine of feature I8, after the specific state ends in the situation where the special result information is not stored, before the special result information is stored in the game in which the special result is won. Will cause a transition to a specific state. As a result, when shifting to the specific state based on the winning of the special result, it will shift to the second specific state on the advantageous side, and the significance of ending the specific state based on the end of the special state in the specific situation will be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature I10. In the specific state, the continuation determination means capable of executing the continuation determination as to whether or not the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied (the continuation flag in the BB winning game in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Has a function to execute a process to determine whether or not is set)
In the specific end means, in a situation before the specific situation is reached in the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the result of the continuation determination by the continuation determination means is the continuation condition. If the result is that the specific state is satisfied, the specific state is not terminated, while if the result of the continuation determination by the continuation determination means is that the continuation condition is not satisfied, the specific state is terminated. There is, in the specific situation in the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the result of the continuation determination by the continuation determination means is the result that the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, characterized in that the specific state is terminated.

According to the above configuration, when a special result is won in a specific state, the specific state does not end if the continuation condition is satisfied before the specific situation, and the specific state ends if the continuation condition is not satisfied. Before the specific situation, the success or failure of the continuation condition is used to manage the continuation of the specific state at the time of winning the special result, and the degree of attention to the success or failure of the continuation condition can be increased. On top of that, in the case of a specific situation, even if the continuation condition is satisfied, if the special result is won, the specific state ends, so it is possible to raise the degree of attention to whether or not the special result is won. That is, before and after a specific situation, the points that the player should pay attention to change according to the progress of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved while suppressing the monotony of the game.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The transition to the first special state is performed, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second special result (second BB). ), And the gaming state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, and the predetermined second special end condition is set. A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment, and
In the specific state, in the game in which the first special result is won, when the first special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the specific state is terminated and the normal state is shifted to. In the game in which the first special result is won, when the first special symbol combination stops at the effective position, the first specific end means (section by the main control device 101) maintains the specific state without terminating it. In the second display process, when the AT mode flag is set and the continuation flag is not set, the advantageous section is terminated in the first BB winning game, while the advantageous section is not terminated in the first BB winning game. Function to execute) and
In the specific state, in the game in which the second special result is won, when the second special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the specific state is terminated and the normal state is shifted to. In the game in which the second special result is won, when the second special symbol combination stops at the effective position, the second specific end means (section by the main control device 101) maintains the specific state without terminating it. In the second display process, when the AT mode flag is set and the continuation flag is not set, the advantageous section is terminated in the second BB winning game, while the advantageous section is not terminated in the second BB winning game. Function to execute) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, so-called bonuses such as a first special result that shifts to the first special state by winning a prize and a second special result that shifts to the second special state by winning a prize are set. In addition, the winning result differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning the mode result, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by the predetermined notification means, which is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. Therefore, for example, when the state shifts to the special state during the specific state, the specific notification is performed in the special state, while when the state shifts to the special state during the normal state, the specific notification is not performed. It is possible to realize playability that combines a special state and a specific notification.
Moreover, in this game machine, if the first special result or the second special result that allows the transition to the first special state or the second special state is won during the specific state in which the mode notification can be performed, the winning is achieved. If the winning game is successful, the specific state is maintained, but if the winning game fails to be successful, the specific state ends. In other words, if you can win a prize in the winning game, you can enjoy the benefits as a special state in the above specific state, but if you can not win in the winning game, you will not be able to enjoy the benefits. , The success or failure of winning in the winning game will have a great influence on the profits that can be obtained after that, which will improve the fun of determining the winning game of the first special result or the second special result in a specific state. .. Moreover, the first special result and the second special result are won by the first special pattern combination and the second special pattern combination, respectively, and the pattern combinations to be aimed at in order to win the prize are different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the game of determining the winning game as described above, and it is possible to suitably suppress the event that the specific state continues endlessly.

Feature J2. In the situation of the special state and the situation of not the special state, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the aspect result.
In the specific state and the special state, the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode corresponding to the first operation result. In this case, while the first operation result wins a prize, the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result in the specific state and not the special state, and the first operation result corresponds to the first operation result. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first operation result does not win a prize when the stop operation means is operated in the operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the mode result is won and the operation is performed in the first operation mode corresponding to the first operation result, if the first operation result is in the special state, the prize of the first operation result is established, while in the special state. Otherwise, the winning of the first operation result will not be established. That is, when the first operation mode is notified by the mode notification, it is possible to establish a prize for the first operation result, and it is necessary to be in a special state to enjoy the benefits of the mode notification. By doing so, the difference between the profit in the specific state and the special state and the profit in the specific state and the non-special state is clarified, and when each special result is won in the specific state, a prize is awarded. It is possible to bring about the merits of this.

Features J3. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result (first small winning combination to 27th small winning combination, etc.) in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out as the privilege is set by the privilege giving means.
In the first special state and the second special state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result can be changed as compared with the state before the transition (particularly, the normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the probability of winning an unquestioned bell changes depending on the third state of BB.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the first special state and the second special state are bonus states in which the winning probability of a predetermined payout result changes. In other words, if you succeed in establishing a bonus prize in the bonus winning game during the specific state, you can continue the specific state and enjoy the benefits of the bonus state, while establishing the bonus prize in the bonus winning game. If you fail, you can enjoy the benefits of the bonus state itself by winning the bonus after that, but you can not enjoy the benefits of the fusion of the specific state and the bonus state by ending the specific state like feature J2. It can be realized.

Features J4. In the predetermined orbiting body, the first special symbol (“cherry” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the first special symbol combination corresponds to the first timing at which the effective position can be stopped. When the stop operation of the stop operation means is performed, the second special symbol (“BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R) forming the second special symbol combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, and the second special symbol cannot be stopped. When the corresponding stop operation of the stop operation means is performed at the second timing at which the symbol can be stopped at the effective position, the first special symbol cannot be stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J3.

According to the above configuration, since the first special pattern and the second special pattern corresponding to the first special result and the second special result cannot be stopped at the same time, the winning game is the first special. As a result, if the first special pattern is operated at a timing that can be stopped, the end of the specific state can be avoided, but if the second special pattern is operated at a timing that can be stopped, the specific state ends, and vice versa. In the second special result winning game, if the second special pattern is stopped, the specific state does not end, but if the first special pattern is aimed at, the specific state ends. By doing so, it is possible to realize playability such as which special result is to be stopped in the special result winning game in relation to the presence or absence of the end of the specific state, and the specific state can be set. The function of not continuing endlessly is more preferably exhibited.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J4, wherein the number of the first special pattern and the number of the second special pattern arranged on the predetermined orbiting body are different from each other.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature J4, in which the winning is not established unless the aims are matched, the number of corresponding patterns is different, so that the difficulty of establishing the winning is the first special result and the second. It will be different from the special result. In this case, for example, a player who is not accustomed to the game operation will aim for a special result prize on the side with a large number of patterns, and a player who is accustomed to the game will aim for a special result by guessing regardless of the number of patterns. Is considered to be selected. By doing so, even a player who is not accustomed to the game operation can preferably enjoy the game at the time of winning the special result.

Features J6. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (lip overlap 1st BB, lip overlap 2nd BB) including at least one of the first special result and the second special result and another game result, and the first special result. And a single result (single first BB, single second BB) including any of the second special results but not including the other game results are set.
When any one of the first special result and the second special result and the other game result are won, the drive control means preferentially stops the pattern combination corresponding to the other game result. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that it is provided with a priority means for driving and controlling (a function of executing a priority setting process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if each special result is won due to overlapping results, other game result prizes are established instead of each special result in the game, and if each special result is won by a single result, aim. If the patterns match, each special result prize can be established in the game. In other words, if a duplicate result is won in a specific state, the game cannot be won, so the specific state is terminated, and if a single result is won in the specific state, the end is avoided in the game. There can be room. By using such duplicated results, it is possible to terminate a specific state regardless of the player's operation, and by simply adjusting the winning probability between the duplicated result and the single result, the forced termination rate of the specific state can be successfully adjusted. It becomes possible to adjust.

Feature J7. While the lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability of the duplicated result including the first special result and the probability of the duplicated result including the second special result can be different. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the single result including the first special result and the probability of the single result including the second special result are set to be the same or substantially the same probability. The gaming machine according to the feature J6.

According to the above configuration, the first special result and the second special result have the same or substantially the same probability as the single result in which the prize is established if the aim is matched with the aim of the pattern. There is no circumstance that it is easier to win a prize, and it can be decided by the player's intuition. On top of that, for duplicate results where winning is not established even if the aims match, the probabilities of the first special result and the second special result can be different, so that the player can choose which one to aim for. It is possible to make a difference in the winning probability between the first special result and the second special result within the range that does not eliminate the sex.

Features J8. In the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is either the first special result or the second special result in the specific state, the special game to the effect that the special game is the special game by the predetermined notification means. The description according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the special notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a continuation chance effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing notification is provided. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is executed in the winning game of the first special result and the second special result, the special result winning game which is the heart of the game of this game machine is overlooked, and the prize is won. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as the failure to establish. In addition, by assuming that special notification is performed, it is not necessary to play a game aiming at winning a special result for each game in a specific state, and it is possible to play the game smoothly.

Features J9. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (lip overlap 1st BB, lip overlap 2nd BB) including at least one of the first special result and the second special result and another game result, and the first special result. And a single result (single first BB, single second BB) including any of the second special results but not including the other game results are set.
When any one of the first special result and the second special result and the other game result are won, the drive control means preferentially stops the pattern combination corresponding to the other game result. It is equipped with a priority means (a function of executing priority setting processing by the main control device 101) for drive control.
The special notification means can execute the special notification in the special game triggered by the single result, and can execute the special notification in the special game triggered by the duplicated result. The gaming machine according to the feature J8.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the result is a duplicate result or a single result, a special notification is given in the winning game in which the special result is won. Therefore, the duplicate result and the single result are used to aim at the pattern. In some cases, there are cases where you win a prize if you do, a case where you do not win if you aim at the pattern and the aim does not match, and a case where you do not win even if you aim at the pattern and the aim matches. Even so, it is possible to use it as an opportunity to aim for a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
As the specific state, a first specific state (AT mode) and a second specific state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be executed than the first specific state are set.
When a predetermined specific transition condition (AT mode winning flag is set) is satisfied, the specific transition means (AT mode by the main control device 101) for shifting from the second specific state to the first specific state is established. Function to execute the process for migration) and
When a predetermined specific end condition (BB winning) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific end means for ending the specific state and shifting to the normal state (BB winning in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section in the game) and
In the specific state, when the specific end condition is satisfied before the specific transition condition is satisfied, the end limiting means (by the main control device 101) that restricts the end of the specific state by the specific end means. (Function to execute the process that does not end the advantageous section when the completed flag is set in the section display second process),
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, the result of winning a prize differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means. Yes, game playability in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of mode notification is realized.

While the mode notification is executed in the specific state, it is not executed in the normal state, and further, in the specific state, the first specific state is more easily executed than the second specific state. Therefore, the flow of the game is such that the benefits of the above-mentioned mode notification can be enjoyed by shifting from the normal state to the second specific state as a specific state and then shifting to the first specific state.

In such a configuration, if the specific end condition as the end condition of the specific state is satisfied before the transition from the second specific state to the first specific state occurs, the specific state is not terminated. It is restricted that the specific state ends without enjoying the benefits of the first specific state even though the specific state has been transferred. Therefore, the playability of shifting to the specific state and aiming at the first specific state from the second specific state is clarified, which can be used as a boost for the decision-making to continue the game.

Feature K2. When the state shifts to the second specific state, the specific setting means (main control device 101 sets the number of ceiling games) for setting the specific number (number of games) until the specific transition condition is satisfied as the number for establishment. Function) and
The AT mode is won based on the establishment means (the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becomes 0) that establishes the specific transition condition based on the fact that the specific number in the second specific state reaches the number for establishment. Function to execute the process of setting the flag) and
The gaming machine according to the feature K1, which is characterized by having.

As described above, even if the specific end condition is satisfied before the transition from the second specific state to the first specific state, the specific state does not end. Therefore, by applying this configuration to the game machine of the feature K1, The opportunity to set the number of ceilings to be established is limited to the case of transition from the first specific state to the second specific state or the transition from the normal state to the second specific state. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific transition condition is not reached endlessly due to the number of establishments being reset many times.

Feature K3. It is provided with a continuation determination means (a function of executing a process of determining the presence / absence of a continuation flag in the second section display process by the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the continuation condition of the second specific state is satisfied.
The specific end means terminates the specific state when the specific end condition is satisfied in a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second specific state, while the continuation condition is satisfied in the second specific state. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that the specific state is not terminated when the specific end condition is satisfied in the established situation.

According to the above configuration, if the specific end condition is satisfied in the situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second specific state, the specific state ends, while if the continuation condition is satisfied in the second specific state, it is specified. It is possible to prevent the specific state from being terminated even when the termination condition is satisfied. By doing so, for example, the specific end condition can be used not only for terminating the specific state but also for other purposes (for example, a transition condition that allows the transition to an advantageous state in the second specific state). It is also possible to improve the interest of the game while consolidating the functions.

Features K4. When the specific state is terminated by the specific termination means and the state is shifted to the normal state, the termination information storage means for storing the termination information corresponding to the termination (the process of setting the termination flag by the main control device 101). Function to execute) and
When shifting to the second specific state, a means for erasing the end information stored in the end information storage means (a function of executing a process of clearing the end flag at the start of the AT mode by the main control device 101). ,
An initialization means (a function of executing the initialization process of advantageous section information by the main control device 101) capable of executing the initialization process of the information related to the specific state based on a predetermined opportunity, and
With
The end limiting means is configured to limit the end of the specific state by the specific end means when the end information is stored in the end information storage means when the specific end condition is satisfied.
Described in any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the end information stored in the end information storage means is not erased even when the initialization process is performed by the initialization means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific state is terminated by the specific termination means, the termination information is stored, and whether or not to limit the termination of the specific state when the subsequent specific termination condition is satisfied depends on the presence or absence of the termination information. It is determined. In this case, since the end information is not the target of the information initialization process related to the specific state, for example, when the manager of the game hall or the like executes the initialization process of the information related to the specific state when setting the game machine. Even so, the end information is not deleted. Then, even if the normal state is changed to the specific state after that, the end information is maintained. Therefore, even if the specific end condition is satisfied after that, the end of the specific state is before the transition to the second specific state. Is avoided. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the initialization process has been performed, depending on whether or not the specific state has ended.

Feature K5. When shifting from the normal state to the specific state, a function of executing a process of setting a completed flag in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the end information storage means (main control device 101) for storing predetermined end information. )When,
When shifting to the second specific state, a means for erasing the end information stored in the end information storage means (a function of executing a process of clearing the end flag at the start of the AT mode by the main control device 101). ,
An initialization means (a function of executing the initialization process of advantageous section information by the main control device 101) capable of executing the initialization process of the information related to the specific state based on a predetermined opportunity, and
With
The end limiting means is configured to limit the end of the specific state by the specific end means when the end information is stored in the end information storage means when the specific end condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein when the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, the end information stored in the end information storage means is also deleted.

According to the above configuration, when a transition from the normal state to the specific state occurs, the end information is stored, and whether or not to limit the end of the specific state when the subsequent specific end condition is satisfied depends on the presence or absence of the end information. Is determined. In this case, since the end information is the target of the information initialization process related to the specific state, for example, when the manager of the game hall or the like executes the initialization process of the information related to the specific state when setting the game machine. , The end information is deleted along with the information that it is in a specific state. Even in this case, since the end information is stored again when the normal state is changed to the specific state after the initialization process, the specific end condition is satisfied before the transition to the second specific state. , It is possible to avoid the end of the specific state.

Feature K6. When the state shifts to the second specific state, the specific setting means (main control device 101 sets the number of ceiling games) for setting the specific number (number of games) until the specific transition condition is satisfied as the number for establishment. Function) and
The AT mode is won based on the establishment means (the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becomes 0) that establishes the specific transition condition based on the fact that the specific number in the second specific state reaches the number for establishment. Function to execute the process of setting the flag) and
A predetermined number grasping means for grasping a predetermined number until the forced termination condition in the specific state is satisfied (a function of executing a process of managing the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY by the main control device 101). ,
When the predetermined number in the specific state becomes a number corresponding to the establishment of the forced termination condition, it is advantageous based on the establishment of the forced termination condition in the means for terminating the specific state (second processing of section display by the main control device 101). Function to execute the process to end the section) and
With
When the specific end condition is satisfied, a transition to a predetermined special state (first BB state, second BB state) occurs or the transition is possible.
The special state based on the specific end condition, which is the target of restriction of the end of the specific state by the specific end means by the end limiting means, is not subject to the specific number by the establishment means, while the said forced end condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, which is characterized by being subject to a predetermined number of objects.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the termination of the specific state is avoided based on the establishment of the specific end condition before the transition to the second specific state, even if the transition to the special state is performed based on the establishment of the specific end condition. , During the special state, it does not contribute to the number of games up to the ceiling because it is not the target of a specific number, but it contributes to the number of games etc. up to the forced termination condition of the specific state because it is the target of a predetermined number. It becomes. That is, even if the end of the specific state is avoided based on the establishment of the specific end condition, the number of games up to the ceiling cannot be subtracted in the special state, but the number of remaining games in the specific state is small. Even if the player shifts to the second specific state after that, the profit that can be enjoyed is reduced by the amount of the special state. Therefore, even if the player shifts to the special state based on the establishment of the specific end condition, there is no merit for the player due to the special state, and even if the specific end condition is also used as the transition to the special state, the specific state is not terminated. It is possible to prevent the player from gaining an advantage.

Feature K7. The end limiting means allows the specific end means to end the specific state when the specific end condition is satisfied in the second specific state, while the specific end condition is set in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, which, when established, limits the termination of the specific state by the specific termination means.

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends when the specific end condition is satisfied in the second specific state, while the specific state does not end when the specific end condition is satisfied in the first specific state. By defining the specific end condition in this way, the configuration in which the specific end condition is not terminated even if the specific end condition is satisfied during the first specific state without shifting to the second specific state becomes a relatively simple configuration. Can be realized.

Feature K8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (first BB, second BB), and the special transition condition is satisfied that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. A special transition means (execution of bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting the state to a special state advantageous to the player and ending the special state based on the establishment of a predetermined special end condition. Function to do)
The specific end condition is characterized in that at least the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special transition condition is satisfied, and the special end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K7.

According to the above configuration, the specific end condition includes winning a special result as a so-called bonus, winning a special result, or ending the special state, which is a transition to a special state by winning a prize. By applying the configuration of the above feature K1 to the configuration in which the specific state may end when the bonus is won, won, or ended, the scene where the specific state triggered by the bonus ends is limited. Can be.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to the feature K7, the specific state can be terminated or not terminated with a bonus in the second specific state. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the advantage by fusing a bonus that is advantageous for the player and a second specific state in which the mode notification is easily performed, and it is also possible to use the bonus as an opportunity to end the specific state. Therefore, the functions can be integrated, and the expectation for the bonus can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the continuation condition.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
A specific state (advantageous section) in which a specific event (pushing order notification and 15 bell winning) that is advantageous to the player can occur, and a normal state (normal section) in which the specific event does not occur are set.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first special result (first BB), and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The transition to the first special state is performed, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined second special result (second BB). ), And the gaming state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, and the predetermined second special end condition is set. It is provided with a special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) capable of terminating the second special state based on the establishment.
When the specific state shifts to either the first special state or the second special state, the specific event can occur in the shifted first special state or the second special state, while the specific event can occur. When the state shifts to either the first special state or the second special state in the normal state, the specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur in the shifted first special state or the second special state. Yes,
In the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is either the first special result or the second special result, the specific end means (main control device) for ending the specific state and shifting to the normal state. (Function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section when a BB different from the corresponding BB flag is won in the section display second process by 101) and
In the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the first end limiting means (main control device) capable of restricting the end of the specific state by the specific end means. A function to execute a process of not ending the advantageous section when the first BB is won in the situation where the flag for the first BB is set in the section display second process by 101).
In the specific state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the second end limiting means (main control device) capable of restricting the end of the specific state by the specific end means. A function to execute a process of not ending the advantageous section when the second BB is won in the situation where the flag for the second BB is set in the section display second process by 101).
A first restricted state (a state in which the flag for the first BB is set) in which the end of the specific state is restricted by the first end limiting means and the second end limiting means based on a predetermined setting trigger. A restriction setting means (main control device) that can be set to any specific restricted state including a second restricted state (a state in which the flag for the second BB is set) in which the end of the specific state is restricted by A function to execute the process of setting the first BB flag and the second BB flag in the AT continuation setting process by 101) and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In the so-called slot machine where the privilege to play is given, the first special result that enables the transition to the first special state as a so-called bonus and the second special result that enables the transition to the second special state , Is provided, and if the player shifts to the first special state or the second special state during the specific state, a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, while the first special state or the second special state is set during the normal state. Since a specific event does not occur when shifting, we aim to shift to the first special state or the second special state in a specific state instead of the normal state, for example, winning the first special result or the second special result and waiting for a prize Playability such as waiting for a transition to a specific state in a situation is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is premised that the specific state may be terminated when the first special result or the second special result is obtained in the specific state, and the termination of the specific state is restricted if the first special result is obtained. A specific restricted state may be set including a 1 restricted state and a second restricted state in which the end of the specific state is restricted if it is the second special result. Therefore, while aiming to shift to each special state in a specific state, the special result of the side that is set to the restricted state does not become the special result of the side that is not set to the restricted state and the specific state does not end. Aiming to win the game will be realized, and it will be possible to provide a game machine that is more interesting than ever.

Feature L2. The setting trigger occurs from the time when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes either the first special result or the second special result to the end of the corresponding first special state and the second special state. The game machine according to the feature L1 characterized by being.

Assuming that each bonus is not won in duplicate, there will be no duplicate winning in the special result until the end of the special state after winning each special result. Therefore, by setting an opportunity to set a special result that restricts the end of the specific state between the above-mentioned special result winning and the end of the special state, the setting of the restricted state is completed before the special result is won. It becomes possible.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the setting trigger occurs when either the first special state or the second special state ends.

According to the above configuration, at the end of the first special state or the second special state, for example, the special result to be restricted can be set by setting an opportunity to set a special result that limits the end of the specific state. In the configuration in which the notification is performed, it is possible to prevent confusion between the winning special result or the executing special state and the special result set as the restriction target.

Feature L4. The restriction setting means executes a limited lottery to determine which restricted state is to be set in the specific restricted state based on the setting opportunity, and sets the specific restricted state based on the lottery result of the restricted lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3.

According to the above configuration, which restricted state is set depends on the result of the restricted lottery, and it is possible to generate randomness in the restricted state. In this way, it is possible to pay attention to the type of special result to be won while predicting which restricted state is set by the production or the like.

Feature L5. The restriction setting means can set the specific restricted state according to the number of times of the setting trigger or the number of times of the first special state and the second special state in the specific state (main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of performing the next BB lottery according to the value of the consecutive villa counter.

According to the above configuration, a special result that limits the end of the specific state is set according to the number of transitions to the special state in the specific state and the number of setting triggers that occur from the winning of the special result to the end of the special state. Therefore, for example, if it is the first setting opportunity, it is easy to be set to the first restricted state, while if it is the second setting opportunity different from the first setting, it is easy to be set to the second restricted state. It is possible to realize the gameability such as, and manage the average number of consecutive villas in the special state to some extent through the advantage of the first special state and the second special state and the ease of setting the restricted state. Is possible.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature L4, "the limit setting means performs the limit lottery according to the number of times of the setting trigger or the number of times of the first special state and the second special state in the specific state. It has the means that can be done. "

Feature L6. The restriction setting means is a means (by the main control device 101) capable of setting the specific restricted state according to the type of the special state that is won or stays when the setting opportunity occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of performing a next BB lottery according to the type of the BB this time.

According to the above configuration, a special result that restricts the end of the specific state is set according to the special result that is won when the setting opportunity occurs in the specific state or the type of the special state. It is possible to realize playability such that the first special result is easily set to the first restricted state and the second special result is easily set to the second restricted state, and the first special state and the second are The continuity and discontinuity of the special state can be managed to some extent on the game machine side through the advantage of the special state and the ease of setting the restricted state.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature L4, "the restriction setting means performs the restriction lottery according to the type of the special state that is won or stays when the setting opportunity occurs. Is equipped with possible means. "

Feature L7. A setting value setting means (main control device) that has a setting value of a plurality of stages capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and sets a setting value of one of the setting values of the plurality of stages. It has a function to execute the winning probability setting process by 101).
The limit setting means is a means capable of setting the specific limit state according to the set value set by the set value setting means (the next BB lottery is performed according to the set value by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, a special result for limiting the end of a specific state is set according to a set value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium. Therefore, for example, the first When the set value is set, it is easy to be set to the first restricted state, and when the second set value is set, it is easy to be set to the second restricted state. It is possible to adjust the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the special game medium through the ease of setting the advantage and the restricted state between the 1 special state and the 2nd special state.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature L4, "it has a setting value of a plurality of stages capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the setting values of the plurality of stages. Equipped with a set value setting means (a function to execute a winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) for setting a set value.
The limit setting means may include means capable of performing the limit lottery according to the set value set by the set value setting means. "

Feature L8. It is provided with a game number grasping means (a function of executing a process of managing the advantageous section game number AG by the main control device 101) for grasping at least the number of games including the specific state.
The limit setting means is a means capable of setting the specific limit state according to the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means (next BB lottery according to the advantageous section game number AG by the main control device 101). The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of performing the above.

According to the above configuration, a special result that limits the end of the specific state is set according to the number of games including the specific state. Therefore, for example, in the early stage of the specific state, it is easy to set the first restricted state, and the specific state is specified. It is possible to realize game playability such that it is easy to set the second restricted state as the state progresses or at the end of the specific state, and the advantage and the restricted state between the first special state and the second special state are set. It is possible to diversify the progress of the game in a specific state through the ease of playing.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature L4, "a game number grasping means for grasping at least the number of games including the specific state (a function of executing a process of managing the advantageous section game number AG by the main control device 101) is provided." Prepare,
The limit setting means may include means capable of performing the limit lottery according to the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means. "

Feature L9. The limitation setting means according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein the first termination limiting means and the second termination limiting means can be set as the specific limiting state of the present time. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, only one of the first restricted state in which the specific state does not end when the first special result is won and the second restricted state in which the specific state does not end when the second special result is won. Instead, it may be set to both the first restricted state and the second restricted state. Therefore, in this case, the specific state is determined regardless of whether the first special result or the second special result is won. It will not end. As a result, the range of playability in which the presence or absence of continuation of the specific state differs depending on which special result is won is widened, and the continuity of the specific state can be improved.

Feature L10. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is set to be lower than the probability that the second special result will be obtained.
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, wherein the restriction setting means is easier to set the first restricted state as the specific restricted state than the second restricted state.

According to the above configuration, the first restricted state in which the end of the specific state in the first special result that is difficult to win is restricted is the second restriction in which the end of the specific state in the second special result that is easy to win is restricted. It is easier to set than the state, and it is difficult to set the second restricted state of the second special result, which is easier to win. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to continue the specific state, and it is possible to prevent the ball output rate from becoming too high. Further, in such a configuration, since the first restricted state is easier to set than the second restricted state, the case where the first special result is won wins the second special result. It can be said that the first special result is more advantageous than the second special result because the configuration is more likely to be restricted in a specific state than in the case. Further, since the first special result on the advantageous side is more difficult to win than the second special result, it is possible to secure the balance between the advantage and the winning probability.

Feature L11. The state after the specific state is terminated by the specific end means in the first restricted state is more advantageous to the player after the specific state is terminated by the specific end means in the second restricted state. The gaming machine according to the feature L10.

According to the above configuration, even though the first restricted state is set, the state after the second special result is won and the specific state is completed is set to the second restricted state. Regardless, the first special result is more advantageous for the player than the state after the specific state is completed. That is, the first special result on the side that is likely to be restricted when winning is not subject to restriction when won, and the state after the specific state is completed is advantageous. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the case where the specific state ends despite winning the first special result on the advantageous side, and it is possible to eliminate the decrease in motivation to play. It will be possible.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
Based on a predetermined transition opportunity (winning the advantageous section transition lottery and shifting to the advantageous section), the specific transition means for shifting from the normal state to the specific state (in the section display first process by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the process of shifting to the advantageous section) and
Based on a predetermined end trigger (BB winning different from the set BB flag), the specific ending means for shifting from the specific state to the normal state (BB winning in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section in the game) and
When shifting from the specific state to the normal state by the specific end means, the specific initialization means for executing the initialization process of the information used in the specific state (initialization process of advantageous section information by the main control device 101). Function to execute) and
A process of setting a BB carry-over flag by the main control device 101, which can store the result information of the game that triggered the end as special result information that is not the target of the initialization process by the initialization means, is executed. Function to do) and
When shifting from the normal state to the specific state by the specific transition means, the special result information stored in the special storage means can be used to set the advantage of the specific state. Means (a function of executing a process of setting the CZ mode according to the type of the BB carry-over flag in the process for the advantageous section transition game by the main control device 101)
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, the result of winning a prize differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. At the time of winning, the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means. Yes, game playability in which the degree of advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of mode notification is realized.

While the mode notification is executed in the specific state, it is not executed in the normal state, and when the specific state ends, the initialization process of the specific state is performed. Therefore, in the normal state other than the specific state, the specific state before that is executed. Information is not inherited, for example, a game between a player who started the game from the normal state after the end of the advantageous specific state and a player who started the game from the normal state after the end of the other advantageous specific state. Fairness is easily guaranteed.

However, for example, in a configuration in which a specific state and a specific state occur in a relatively short span, it is caused by the difference between the player at the end of the specific state and the player who plays after that. Although inequality is unlikely to occur, there is an inconvenience that the flow of the game is blocked by the fact that specific information is not inherited, and it is not possible to improve the interest.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the result information of the game that triggered the end of the specific state is stored as special result information, and the special result information is used to set the advantage at the time of the next transition to the specific state. As a result, information can be shared across the specific state and the specific state without overturning the precondition that the information used in the specific state is initialized at the end, and the specific state and the specific state are linked. It is possible to improve the interest of the game in a villa-like structure.

Feature M2. The privilege granting means is a special result (first BB, second BB) in which the lottery result by the lottery means is predetermined, and when the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, the special It is possible to give special benefits (1st BB state transition, 2nd BB state transition) corresponding to the result,
The termination opportunity can occur when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result.
The special storage means corresponds to winning the special result when the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The information is stored as the special result information.
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein in a game in which the special result information is stored in the special storage means, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position.

According to the above configuration, the conventional configuration in which the winning information is carried over if the winning game is not successful is used as the special result information to serve as a bridge of information between specific states for comparison. With a simple structure, it is possible to favorably plan the interest of a villa in a specific state.

Feature M3. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
The special storage means is described when the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result. Information corresponding to winning the first special result is stored as the first special result information, and in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the said effective position. When the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is not stopped, the information corresponding to the winning of the second special result is stored as the second special result information.
The specific setting means has different advantages for the player between the specific state set by using the first special result information and the specific state set by using the second special result information. The gaming machine according to the feature M2, which is characterized by being set to.

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends in the game that resulted in the first special result, and the specific state set by using the first special result information as the carry-over information of the first special result and the second special It is set so that the advantage for the player is different from the specific state set by using the second special result information about the result. By doing so, the advantage of the next specific state is set according to the special result that triggered the end of the specific state, and even the game that ends the specific state can be interested in the lottery result. it can.

Features M4. When the first special result becomes the end trigger in the specific state, the second special result does not become the end trigger in the specific state, and the second special result becomes the end trigger in the specific state. If so, the gaming machine according to feature M3, characterized in that the first special result does not trigger the end in the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when one special result triggers the end of a specific state, the other special result does not trigger the end in the specific state. Therefore, a plurality of special results are set and the special result triggers the end. When the specific state ends, it means that the special result on the side that does not trigger the end is not obtained in the first place, but the special result on the unfortunate side. In such a configuration, the unfortunate special result can be used to set the advantage of the next specific state, so that the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be expressed in the next specific state. It is possible to make up for it by making it advantageous, or to make it more disappointing by making the next specific state disadvantageous, and it is possible to associate continuous specific states well.

Feature M5. As the special result, the probability that the first special result (first BB) and the second special result (second BB, second BB flag) which is less advantageous to the player than the first special result is set is for the first BB. Based on the fact that it is lower than the probability that the flag will be set, the 2nd BB winning will be more disadvantageous than the 1st BB winning).
The special storage means is described when the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result. Information corresponding to winning the first special result is stored as the first special result information, and in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the said effective position. When the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is not stopped, the information corresponding to the winning of the second special result is stored as the second special result information.
The specific setting means is set so that the specific state set by using the first special result information is more advantageous to the player than the specific state set by using the second special result information. The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M4, which is characterized by being set.

According to the above configuration, the specific state ends in the game in which the first special result is advantageous for the player, and the advantage of the specific state is used by using the first special result information as the carry-over information of the first special result. The case where the degree is set is set to be more advantageous than the case where the advantage of the specific state is set by using the second special result information about the second special result on the disadvantageous side. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the specific state has ended despite winning the first special result on the advantageous side, by the advantage of the specific state from the next time onward. Therefore, it is possible to successfully inherit the advantageous information of the first special result across specific states.

Feature M6. When the first special result becomes the end trigger in the specific state, the second special result does not become the end trigger in the specific state, and the second special result becomes the end trigger in the specific state. In that case, the first special result does not trigger the end in the specific state.
The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein the second special result is more likely to be set at the end trigger than the first special result.

According to the above configuration, when one special result triggers the end of a specific state, the other special result does not trigger the end in the specific state. Therefore, a plurality of special results are set and the special result triggers the end. When the specific state ends, it means that the special result on the side that does not trigger the end is not obtained in the first place, but the special result on the unfortunate side. In such a configuration, the unfortunate special result can be used to set the advantage of the next specific state, so that the feeling of loss due to the end of the specific state can be expressed in the next specific state. It is possible to make up for it by making it advantageous, or to make it more disappointing by making the next specific state disadvantageous, and it is possible to associate continuous specific states well.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the second special result is more likely to be set as the end trigger than the first special result, so that it is the first special result on the premise that it is advantageous not to end the specific state. Can be said to be advantageous. Then, when the specific state ends despite the fact that the first special result on the advantageous side is obtained, the specific state to be re-shifted thereafter is more than the case where the second special result ends. It will be advantageous. By doing so, it is possible to successfully pass on the advantages and disadvantages of the first special result and the second special result to the next specific state.

Feature M7. The gaming machine according to feature M5 or feature M6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is higher than the probability that the second special result will be obtained.

According to the above configuration, the first special result on the advantageous side is a result that is difficult to win in each game in the first place. In other words, it is a case where the specific state ends despite winning the advantageous first special result that is difficult to win, and it makes me feel more disappointed that the specific state ends with the first special result. It will be a situation. With such a configuration, the significance of supplementing with the advantage of the next specific state is enhanced.

Feature M8. The special result information is stored in the special storage means, and the erasing means (main control device 101) capable of erasing the special result information based on the fact that the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M7, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of clearing the BB carry-over flag at the time of winning a BB prize.

According to the above configuration, if the special result prize is established in the situation where the special result winning is carried over as the special result information, the special result information is deleted. In this case, the specific setting means will not inherit the special result information at the end of the previous specific state until the next time. By doing so, it is possible to take over the special result information across specific states, but it is also possible not to take over it, and the player's operation (success or failure of winning) of whether or not to take over is possible. ), It is possible to improve the playability in a specific state within a range that does not eliminate the real thrill of the so-called slot machine, such as establishing a prize corresponding to the game result based on the operation of the player.

Feature M9. In a situation where the special result information as the end trigger of the specific state is stored in the special storage means, the special result information corresponding to the special result information is performed before the next transition to the specific state occurs. When the symbol combination stops at the effective position, the special symbol combination corresponding to the special result information does not stop at the effective position before the next transition to the specific state occurs. , Any of the features M2 to M8 characterized in that the next specific state is disadvantageous to the player (when a BB prize is won in the normal section, the normal mode is set as a transition to an advantageous section in the BB state). The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, if the winning of the special result that triggered the end of the specific state is established before the transition to the next specific state, the next specific state will be for the player than the case where the winning is not established. It becomes a disadvantageous specific state. By doing so, it is possible to urge the special result winning to not be established in the normal state between the specific states, and it is possible to preferably perform the game of associating the specific states with each other by using the special result.

Feature M10. When the special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, a function of executing a special transition means (a function of shifting to the BB state by the main control device 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to a special state advantageous to the player. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features M2 to M9.

According to the above configuration, the special result in which the winning information is carried over to the next game or later is a so-called bonus in which the player is transferred to a special state advantageous to the player by winning the prize. By using such a configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature M1 while making good use of the existing configuration.

Moreover, although it is basically considered that the prize should be established early because the bonus is in an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to carry over the information across specific states by carrying it over without intentionally winning the prize. By making it possible, it becomes possible to realize a novel playability that takes advantage of the psychology of the player who wants to establish a prize at an early stage.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state can be shifted to a special state advantageous to the player. Possible special transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main controller 101),
When shifting to the special state in the specific state, it is possible to cause a specific event based on the mode notification by the mode notification means, which is an advantageous event for the player in the special state, while the above. Specific means (main control) that does not cause the specific event in the special state when the state shifts to the special state in the normal state, or makes the specific event less likely to occur than in the case of shifting to the special state in the specific state. The function of executing the process for notifying the push order bell at the time of winning the push order bell in the JAC carry-over state by the device 101) and
With
As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position, the special transition means sets the gaming state to the first special. When the state (first BB state) is entered, the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, the game state. Is configured to shift to the second special state (second BB state).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the first special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, the first special A first stop control means (first BB by the main control device 101) that controls so that a specific roll (reach roll) that does not stop if the roll is different from the pattern combination and is not the first special result is stopped. A function that executes the process of stopping the reach at the time of winning) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the second special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, the second special A second stop control means (the second stop control means by the main control device 101) that controls the normal rolls (outside rolls) that can be stopped even if the rolls are different from the pattern combination and are not the second special result. (A function to execute the process to prevent the reach from stopping when the 2BB is won) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the specific state is not terminated, while when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the specific state is terminated and the normal state is terminated. (A function that does not end the advantageous section in the first BB winning game in the second processing of the section display by the main control device 101, but executes a process of ending the advantageous section in the second BB winning game).
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, a so-called bonus that shifts to a special state by winning a prize is set, and the result of winning differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. Since the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, it is possible to realize a game playability in which a special state and a specific notification are fused.
While the mode notification is executed in the specific state, it is not executed in the normal state, and when the state shifts to the special state during the specific state, an advantageous specific event based on the mode notification may occur in the special state. When the state shifts to the special state, the specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the state shifts to the special state, it is advantageous for the player to be in the specific state.

Here, in this game machine, if the special result is won during the specific state, the specific state may end. More specifically, if it is the first special result among the special results, the specific state does not end, while the second If it is a special result, the specific state ends. Therefore, while expecting a special result winning that makes it possible to cause a transition to a special state during a specific state, it is expected that the special result will not become a second special result, and during the specific state It can be of great interest to the types of special results that are won.

Then, when the first special result is won, the specific roll as a so-called reach that does not stop before the winning can be stopped, while when the second special result is won, the reach is stopped. However, since the normal roll can be stopped, it is possible to win the first special result and to grasp that the specific state continues by the appearance of the specific roll. In other words, it is possible to grasp that the specific state has ended by winning the second special result by the fact that the specific result does not appear. In this way, in the game playability of the slot machine, such as stopping each orbiting body by itself to obtain a privilege, a new game such as determining whether or not a specific state is continued in relation to the stop result of the orbiting body can be performed. It can be added to improve the interest of the game.

Feature N2. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, when the first special pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the means for ending the specific state and shifting to the normal state ( The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section when a prize is established in the first BB winning game in the section display second process by the main control device 101). ..

According to the above configuration, even if the end of the specific state is restricted based on the first special result winning game, the specific state ends when the first special result winning is established in the first special result winning game. Therefore, in order to continue the specific state, it is necessary to win the first special result among the first special result and the second special result, and not to establish the first special result prize in the game. By doing so, it becomes easy for a specific roll to appear in the first special result winning game, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the special roll prepared with great care does not appear in the playability of the feature N1.

Feature N3. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second special result within a predetermined number of games after the end of the special state, the limiting means (main control device 101) capable of restricting the end of the specific state by the specific end means. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2, characterized in that the counter after BB is 20 or less, and the second BB winning game is provided with a function of executing a process of not ending an advantageous section).

According to the above configuration, if the second special result is won within a predetermined number of games after the special state, the end of the specific state is restricted. That is, after the special state, if it is within the predetermined number of games, the specific state continues in both the first special result and the second special result, and when the predetermined number of games is exceeded, the specific state is changed based on the second special result winning. Can be finished. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize the presence or absence of continuation of a specific state by the special result of the villa and the addiction, and it is interesting to play that it is advantageous to shift to the special state during the specific state. Can be improved.

Feature N4. It is provided with a predetermined transition means (a function of executing a process of shifting to the RT state after the end of the first BB state by the main control device 101) for shifting to a predetermined state that continues for the predetermined number of games after the special state is completed. ,
When the second special result is obtained in the specific state and in the predetermined state, the limiting means restricts the end of the specific state, while the limiting means is in the specific state and is not in the predetermined state. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the end of the specific state is not restricted when the second special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to manage the presence or absence of the end of the specific state at the time of winning the second special result by using the predetermined state that is set after the end of the special state and continues for a predetermined number of games. .. By doing so, it is not necessary to individually grasp the number of games after the special state, and it is possible to manage the continuity of the specific state with a relatively simple configuration.

More specifically, the "predetermined state" includes an "RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result can change".

Feature N5. The predetermined transition means according to feature N4, wherein the predetermined transition means shifts to the predetermined state after the first special state ends, but does not shift to the predetermined state after the second special state ends. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined state is set after the first special state, the end of the specific state based on the winning of the second special result is restricted over the subsequent predetermined number of games, while the second special state is restricted. After that, since the predetermined state is not set, the specific state ends by winning the second special result even if the number of games is within the predetermined number. That is, the specific state ends when the second special result is obtained twice in succession in the specific state. By doing so, in a game to entertain which special result will be obtained, it is possible to greatly improve the fun of the game by using a relatively simple configuration such as a predetermined state set after the special state. Will be.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, wherein the first special state is more advantageous to the player than the second special state.

In the above configuration, winning the second special result is set as disadvantageous to the player even from the viewpoint of the advantage between the first special state and the second special state. By doing so, the difference in advantage between the first special result and the second special result becomes large, and it becomes possible to draw more attention to which special result is won.

Feature N7. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, if the special symbol combination does not stop at the effective position, it is the special result until the special symbol combination stops at the effective position. It is equipped with special storage means (a function of executing the process of setting the BB carry-over flag by the main control device 101) capable of storing the special result information (first BB carry-over flag, second BB carry-over flag) corresponding to the above.
In a situation where a predetermined transition permission condition (AT mode winning) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific event may occur in the special state when the transition to the special state is performed in the specific state. become,
When the transition permission condition is not satisfied in the specific state and the transition to the special state is performed in the specific state, the specific event does not occur in the special state or the transition permission condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, characterized in that the specific event is less likely to occur than in the case of shifting to the special state in the present situation.

According to the above configuration, even if a transition is made to a special state in a situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied, a specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur during the special state, so until the transition permission condition is satisfied in the specific state. Playability such as waiting for a special result prize is realized. That is, after the second special result is won in the specific state and the specific state is completed, the second special result prize is not established immediately, and after waiting for the transition to the specific state and the establishment of the transition permission condition, the relevant state is concerned. By establishing the second special result prize, it is a playability that can receive the benefit (specific event in the second special state) due to the second special result. In such playability, in the situation where the second special result is won, the specific result as the reach is not stopped and only the normal result is stopped, so it is conscious that the second special result is carried over. It is possible to wait for the transition to a specific state or the establishment of the transition permission condition while preventing the transition, and it is possible to preferably enhance the effect during the game by preventing the points of interest in the game from being dispersed.

Feature N8. When the special pattern combination stops at the effective position in the situation where the transition permission condition is not satisfied in the specific state, the means for terminating the specific state (BB in the section display second process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature N7, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in a winning game).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state is completed based on the second special result winning and then the specific state is transferred, if the second special result prize is established before the transition permission condition is satisfied, it is specified. The state ends again. By doing so, it is possible to preferably perform a game such as waiting without winning a prize until the transition permission condition is satisfied in the situation where the special result is won.

Feature N9. When shifting to the specific state, a predetermined number setting means (setting of the number of ceiling games by the main control device 101) sets a specific number (number of ceiling games) for a specific number (number of games) until the transition permission condition is satisfied. Function to execute processing) and
After shifting to the specific state, the establishment means for establishing the transition permission condition based on the fact that the specific number reaches the specific number (AT based on the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becoming 0). A function to execute the process of setting the mode winning flag) and
The gaming machine according to the feature N8, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, a specific number is set as the so-called number of ceiling games after the transition to the specific state until the transition permission condition is satisfied, and when the number of ceiling games is reached, the transition permission condition is satisfied. Therefore, the transition permission condition is satisfied. Ending a specific state by establishing a special result prize before leads to a reset of the number of ceiling games. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably execute the playability of waiting for the special result winning until the transition permission condition is satisfied during the specific state.

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
Starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result (first small winning combination) can be won, and the stop operation means is the first. By operating in a second operation mode different from the operation mode, it is possible to win a prize in the second operation result (fourth small winning combination to 27th small winning combination) that can give a profit different from the first operation result. The mode result (for example, push order bell) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means (main control) capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing push order notification processing by the device 101) is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result and the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, the gaming state can be shifted to a special state advantageous to the player. Possible special transition means (function to execute bonus state processing by the main controller 101),
When shifting to the special state in the specific state, it is possible to cause a specific event based on the mode notification by the mode notification means, which is an advantageous event for the player in the special state, while the above. Specific means (main control) that does not cause the specific event in the special state when the state shifts to the special state in the normal state, or makes the specific event less likely to occur than in the case of shifting to the special state in the specific state. The function of executing the process for notifying the push order bell at the time of winning the push order bell in the JAC carry-over state by the device 101) and
With
As a game state, a predetermined state (RT state) that shifts when a predetermined transition trigger (end of the first BB state) occurs and ends when a predetermined end trigger (digests 20 games) occurs. Has been set and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the specific state and not the predetermined state, the specific state is terminated, while the specific state is in the predetermined state. If the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result in the situation, the specific end means that does not end the specific state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the advantageous section is selected in the BB winning game in the RT state. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not end, but has a function of executing a process of ending an advantageous section in a second BB winning game in a normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, and the orbiting body is stopped as a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the game based on the operation of the stop operation means, thereby corresponding to the winning of the lottery result. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given, a so-called bonus that shifts to a special state by winning a prize is set, and the result of winning differs depending on the mode of the stop operation of the stop operation means. Since the mode notification regarding the mode of the stop operation may be executed by a predetermined notification means and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, it is possible to realize a game playability in which a special state and a specific notification are fused.

While the mode notification is executed in the specific state, it is not executed in the normal state, and when the state shifts to the special state during the specific state, an advantageous specific event based on the mode notification may occur in the special state. When the state shifts to the special state, the specific event does not occur or is unlikely to occur. Therefore, if the state shifts to the special state, it is advantageous for the player to be in the specific state.

Here, in this game machine, if a special result is won during a specific state, the specific state may end. More specifically, if a special result is obtained during the predetermined state in the specific state, the specific state does not end, while the specific state is specified. If a special result is obtained in a state other than the predetermined state, the specific state ends. Therefore, while expecting a special result winning that makes it possible to cause a transition to a special state during a specific state, it is expected that the special result will occur during a predetermined state, and a special result that is won during the specific state. It is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the timing of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature O2. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position, the special transition means sets the gaming state to the first special. When the state (first BB state) is entered, the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, the game state. Is configured to shift to the second special state (second BB state).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the first special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, the first special A first stop control means (first BB by the main control device 101) that controls so that a specific roll (reach roll) that does not stop if the roll is different from the pattern combination and is not the first special result is stopped. A function that executes the process of stopping the reach at the time of winning) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated at a timing when the second special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position, the second special A second stop control means (the second stop control means by the main control device 101) that controls the normal rolls (outside rolls) that can be stopped even if the rolls are different from the pattern combination and are not the second special result. (A function to execute the process to prevent the reach from stopping when the 2BB is won) and
With
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result in the specific state and not the predetermined state, the specific end means does not end the specific state, while the lottery result by the lottery means. Is the second special result, the specific state is terminated and the normal state is shifted to.
In the specific state and in the predetermined state, the stop operation is performed at a timing when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position. When the means is operated, the stop limiting means for limiting the stop of the specific roll by the first stop control means (execution of processing for preventing the reach eye in the RT state by the main control device 101 from being stopped). The gaming machine according to feature O1, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, in a situation other than the predetermined state, the specific state does not end if it is the first special result among the special results, while the specific state ends if it is the second special result. Therefore, while expecting a special result winning that makes it possible to cause a transition to a special state during a specific state, if the special result becomes a second special result, it is expected that the state is in a predetermined state. It is possible to draw great interest in the type of special result that is won during a specific state, such as expecting the first special result if the situation is not in a predetermined state.

Then, when the first special result is won, the specific roll as a so-called reach that does not stop before the winning can be stopped, while when the second special result is won, the reach is stopped. However, since the normal roll can be stopped, it is possible to win the first special result and to grasp that the specific state continues by the appearance of the specific roll. In other words, it is possible to grasp that the specific state has ended by winning the second special result by the fact that the specific result does not appear.

In such a configuration, it is a state other than the predetermined state that the specific result as the reach is stopped as the first special result. Therefore, the specific state can be achieved by winning the special result in a state other than the predetermined state without eliminating the feeling of excitement in the predetermined state, such as the specific state continuing by winning the special result during the predetermined state. It is possible to fully enjoy the game in which a specific roll is used to grasp that the game can be completed.

Feature O3. The game according to feature O2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first special result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second special result. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first special result is easier to win than the second special result, the appearance of a specific result at the time of winning the first special result in a predetermined state is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances that it is not possible to grasp which special result was obtained during the predetermined state depending on the presence or absence of the appearance of a specific roll, and the significance of the configuration like the feature O2 is enhanced. ..

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the transition trigger is generated by the end of the special state.

According to the above configuration, the specific state will not end even if the special result is won between the end of the special state and the time when the end condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to realize the continuous villa property of the special state in the specific state by a relatively simple configuration such as the relationship between the predetermined state and the presence or absence of the end of the specific state.

Feature O5. As the special result, a first special result (first BB) and a second special result (second BB) different from the first special result are set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position, the special transition means sets the gaming state to the first special. When the state (first BB state) is entered, the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped at the effective position, the game state. Is configured to shift to the second special state (second BB state).
The transition trigger can occur when the first special state ends, but cannot occur when the second special state ends, or is less likely to occur than when the first special state ends. Features The gaming machine described in O4.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined state is set after the first special state, the end of the specific state based on the winning of the special result is restricted until the end condition is satisfied, while after the second special state. Is not set to the predetermined state, and then the specific state ends with the special result winning. That is, when the second special result is obtained in the specific state, after the second special state based on the second special result, the specific state can be terminated by winning the next special result. By doing so, in a game to entertain which special result will be obtained, it is possible to greatly improve the fun of the game by using a relatively simple configuration such as a predetermined state set after the special state. Will be.

Feature O6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result is set in which a re-game that enables the next game to be played without requiring a new game medium is given by the privilege-giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the predetermined state is a re-gaming state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-gaming result is different from the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the continuation of the specific state at the time of winning the special result in the specific state by using a relatively simple configuration such as the re-game state as the so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the re-game result is different from the normal game state. It is possible to set the sex.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature O group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature O group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a game machine, 32 ... Reel as a circuit board, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (8)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies,
Starting operation means for starting the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the starting operation means, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
A drive control means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when the starting operation means is operated and stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stopping operating means is operated.
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a game machine equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, and the gaming state is shifted to the special state based on the fact that the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position, and is predetermined. A special transition means that can terminate the special state based on the establishment of the special termination condition,
In the game in which the special result is won, if the special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the special result storage means capable of storing the special result information corresponding to the winning of the special result is used. ,
With
As the special result, a first special result and a second special result different from the first special result are set.
The special transition means sets the gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the first special pattern combination corresponding to the first special result is stopped at the effective position. The first special state is shifted to one special state, the first special state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first special end condition, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and is in the effective position. The game state is shifted to the second special state based on the fact that the second special pattern combination corresponding to the second special result is stopped, and the second special end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined second special end condition is satisfied. It is possible to end a special state,
The special result storage means corresponds to winning the first special result when the first special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position in the game in which the first special result is won. In the game in which the first special result information is stored and the second special result is won, if the second special pattern combination does not stop at the effective position, the second special result is won. It is possible to store the second special result information corresponding to the fact that
When the special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result.
In a configuration in which the special state is more advantageous than the case of shifting to the special state in a situation where the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied and the transition to the special state in the situation where the advantageous conditions are not satisfied. Yes,
When the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specific result is such that the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. If the lottery result by the lottery means has the same or substantially the same probability as the specific result, the advantageous condition is satisfied when the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means. The probability is different from the probability that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, or is a probability difference larger than the probability difference that results in the specific result. A game machine characterized by that. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, so that the first operation result can be won, and the stop operation means is different from the first operation mode. A mode result is set in which a prize can be won for the second operation result, which can give a profit different from the first operation result by being operated in the second operation mode.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, the mode notification means capable of executing the mode notification regarding the first operation mode or the operation mode including the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means is provided.
As the gaming state, a specific state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed or is less likely to be executed than the specific state are set.
A transition determination means for executing a transition determination as to whether or not a transition condition corresponding to the transition from the normal state to the specific state is satisfied based on a predetermined first determination trigger.
Based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the transition condition is satisfied, the specific transition means for shifting from the normal state to the specific state, and
A permission determination means for executing a permission determination as to whether or not a permission condition corresponding to permitting an advantageous transition to the special state is satisfied in the specific state.
Based on the result of the permission determination by the permission determination means being the result that the permission condition is satisfied, the advantageous establishment means for establishing the advantageous condition and the advantageous establishment means for establishing the advantageous condition.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with. The claim is characterized in that when the transition to the special state occurs in a situation where the permission condition is not satisfied, the special state becomes a special state which is more disadvantageous than the situation where the advantageous condition is satisfied. 2. The game machine described in 2. The transition determination means can execute the transition determination in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means.
The claim is characterized in that the permission determination means can execute the permission determination in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. 2 or the gaming machine according to claim 3. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means and the special result storage means 4. The fourth aspect of the present invention is that, in a situation where the second special result information is stored, the probability that the transition determination by the migration determination means will result in the transition condition being satisfied is different. The gaming machine described in. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the permission condition is satisfied by the permission determination by the permission determination means and the special result storage means 4. Claim 4 characterized in that, in a situation where the second special result information is stored, the probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means is different from the probability that the permission condition is satisfied. Or the gaming machine according to claim 5. In the situation where the first special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means is determined in the special result storage means. While the probability is higher than the probability that the transition condition is satisfied in the transition determination by the transition determination means in the situation where the second special result information is stored, the special result storage means The probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in the situation where the first special result information is stored is determined by the second special result information in the special result storage means. Any one of claims 4 to 6, characterized in that the probability is lower than the probability that the permission condition is satisfied in the permission determination by the permission determination means in the situation where is stored. The game machine described in. The result that the permission condition is satisfied when the permission determination is executed in a situation where neither the first special result information nor the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means. When the permission determination is executed in a situation where either the first special result information or the second special result information is stored in the special result storage means, the permission condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 7, wherein the probability of the result is higher.

Images